Split System Air Conditioners: Inverter Series

EDAU 28 - 856
Split System Air Conditioners
Inverter Series
Heat Pump [50Hz]
Cooling Only [50Hz]
EDAU28-856
SkyAir Inverter Series ................................................................... 1

1. External appearance ...............................................................................2
2. Model name, power supply and nomenclature .......................................3
2.1 Model name and power supply ................................................................3
2.2 Nomenclature ...........................................................................................4
3. Functions.................................................................................................5
3.1 Indoor unit ................................................................................................5
3.2 Outdoor unit..............................................................................................6
4. Specifications ..........................................................................................7
5. Dimensions and service space .............................................................22
5.1 Indoor unit ..............................................................................................22
5.2 Wired remote controller ..........................................................................34
5.3 Wireless remote controller......................................................................35
5.4 Outdoor unit............................................................................................38
5.5 Installation service space .......................................................................44
6. Piping diagrams ....................................................................................50
6.1 Indoor unit ..............................................................................................50
6.2 Indoor unit + outdoor unit .......................................................................52
6.3 Outdoor unit............................................................................................55
7. Wiring diagrams ....................................................................................60
7.1 Indoor unit ..............................................................................................60
7.2 Outdoor unit............................................................................................66
7.3 Field wiring .............................................................................................74
8. Electric characteristics ..........................................................................75
8.1 RKS25EB / 35EB / 50FB / 60FBVMA
RXS25EB / 35EB / 50FB / 60FB / 71FBVMA.........................................75
8.2 RZQ71FV4A / RZQ100FV4A .................................................................76
8.3 RZQ100KV4A / RZQ125KV4A / RZQ160KV4A .....................................77
8.4 RZQ100HY4A / RZQ125HY4A / RZQ160HY4A ....................................78
9. Capacity tables......................................................................................79
9.1 Capacity tables.......................................................................................79
10.Operation limits .....................................................................................93
11.Fan performance...................................................................................95
11.1 FBQ ........................................................................................................95
12.Air velocity and temperature distributions .............................................96
12.1 FFQ ........................................................................................................96
12.2 FHQ......................................................................................................100
12.3 FAQ ......................................................................................................104
13.Sound level .........................................................................................105
13.1 Overall sound level...............................................................................105
13.2 Octave band level.................................................................................107
Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit .......................................... 111

1. Centre of gravity..................................................................................112
2. Installation of indoor unit .....................................................................115
2.1 FCQ71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
(Operation / installation manual) ..........................................................115
2.2 FFQ25B8 / 35B8 / 50B8 / 60B8V1B
Table of Contents i
EDAU28-856
2.3 FHQ50BV / 60BV / 71BV / 100BV / 125BVV1B

2.4 FAQ100BVV1B (Operation / installation manual) ................................180
2.5 FBQ50B / 60B / 71BV1A (Operation / installation manual) ..................200
3. Installation of outdoor unit ...................................................................221
3.1 RKS25EB / 35EBVMA, RXS25EB / 35EBVMA
(Installation manual) .............................................................................221
3.2 RKS50FB / 60FBVMA, RXS50FB / 60FBVMA
3.3 RXS71FBVMA (Installation manual) ....................................................237
3.4 RZQ71F / 100FV4A (Installation manual) ............................................245
3.5 RZQ100K / 125K / 160KV4A (Installation manual) ..............................264
3.6 RZQ100H / 125H / 160HY4A (Installation manual)..............................280
Detail Information of Options..................................................... 297

1. Accessories.........................................................................................299
1.1 Indoor unit ............................................................................................299
1.2 Outdoor unit..........................................................................................304
2. Remote controller................................................................................305
2.1 BRC1D61 — Wired remote controller with weekly schedule timer ......305
2.2 Wireless remote controller....................................................................313
3. FCQ.....................................................................................................315
3.1 BYCP125K-W1 — Decoration panel....................................................315
3.2 KDBH55K160F — Sealing member of air discharge outlet..................320
3.3 KDBP55H160FA — Panel spacer........................................................324
3.4 KDDP55K160(K) — Fresh air intake kit (chamber type) ......................327
3.5 KDDP55X160 — Fresh air intake kit (direct installation type) ..............332
3.6 KAFP556H80·160, KAFP557H80·160
— High efficiency filter (including chamber) .........................................335
3.7 KAFP552H80·160, KAFP553H80·160
— Replacement high efficiency filter ....................................................338
3.8 KDDFP55H160 — High efficiency filter chamber.................................339
3.9 KAFP551K160 — Replacement long-life filter .....................................342
3.10 KAFP55H160 — Ultra long-life filter unit (including chamber) .............343
3.11 KAFP55H160H — Replacement ultra long-life filter.............................346
3.12 KKSJ55K160 — Chamber connection kit.............................................347
3.13 KDJP55H80·160 — Branch duct chamber...........................................348
3.14 KDTP55K80·160 — Insulation kit for high humidity .............................351
3.15 KRP1H98 — Installation box for adaptor PCB .....................................353
3.16 KRCS01-4B — Remote sensor (for indoor temperature).....................358
4. FFQ .....................................................................................................362
4.1 BYFQ60B7W1 — Decoration panel .....................................................362
4.2 KDBHQ44B60 — Sealing member of air discharge outlet ...................365
4.3 KDBQ44B60 — Panel spacer ..............................................................367
4.4 KAFQ441B60 — Replacement long-life filter .......................................370
4.5 KDDQ44X60 — Fresh air intake kit (direct installation type)................371
4.6 DTA112BA51 — Interface adaptor for SkyAir series ...........................373
4.7 KRP1BA101 — Installation box for adaptor PCB.................................375
5. FHQ.....................................................................................................384
5.1 KDU50N60VE / KDU50N125VE — Drain-up kit ..................................384
ii Table of Contents
EDAU28-856
5.2 KAF501DA56·80·112·160 — Replacement long-life filter ....................389

5.3 KHFP5MA63·160 — L-type piping kit (for upward direction)................389
5.4 KRP1CA93 — Installation box for adaptor PCB...................................390
5.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA — Electrical box with earth terminal ..............398
6. FAQ.....................................................................................................400
7. FBQ.....................................................................................................404
7.1 KTBJ25K56W / 80W — Service access panel.....................................404
7.2 KDAJ25K56A / 71A — Air discharge adaptor ......................................407
8. Outdoor unit ........................................................................................410
8.1 KPW937A4 — Air direction adjustment grille .......................................410
8.3 KKP937A4 — Drain plug......................................................................412
8.4 KKP945A4 — Drain plug......................................................................413
8.5 KKPJ5F180 — Central drain plug ........................................................414
8.6 K-KYZP15C — Wire fixture for preventing overturning ........................415
8.7 KPT-60B160 — Fixture for preventing overturning ..............................417
8.8 KRP58M51 — Demand adaptor...........................................................419
Table of Contents iii

EDAU28-856
iv Table of Contents
EDAU28-856
Part 1 1
SkyAir Inverter Series

Model series
Class 25 35 50 60 71 90 100 125 140 160
FCQ 71K 100K 125K 140K
FFQ 25B8 35B8 50B8 60B8

Indoor
FHQ 50BV 60BV 71BV 100BV 125BV
unit
FAQ 100BV
FBQ 50B 60B 71B
RXS 25EB 35EB 50FB 60FB 71FB
Outdoor RKS 25EB 35EB 50FB 60FB

unit
100F
125K 160K
RZQ 71F 100K
125H 160H
100H
Inverter Series 1
External appearance EDAU28-856
1. External appearance
Indoor unit
FCQ FFQ FHQ
FAQ FBQ
Remote controller
Wired type Wireless type
BRC1D61
Outdoor unit
RKS25EB / 35EBVMA RKS50FB / 60FBVMA

RXS71FBVMA
RXS25EB / 35EBVMA RXS50FB / 60FBVMA
RZQ71F / 100FV4A RZQ100K~160KV4A RZQ100H~160HY4A
2 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Model name, power supply and nomenclature
2. Model name, power supply and nomenclature

1
2.1 Model name and power supply
Indoor unit Outdoor unit Power supply

FCQ71KVEA RZQ71FV4A
FCQ100KVEA RZQ100KV4A
1 phase 240V 50Hz
FCQ100KVEA RZQ100HY4A
FCQ125KVEA RZQ125HY4A 3 phase 415V 50Hz
FCQ140KVEA RZQ160HY4A
FFQ25B8V1B RKS25EBVMA
FFQ35B8V1B RKS35EBVMA
1 phase 220~240V 50Hz
FFQ50B8V1B RKS50FBVMA
FFQ60B8V1B RKS60FBVMA
FFQ25B8V1B RXS25EBVMA
FFQ35B8V1B RXS35EBVMA
1 phase 220~240V 50Hz
FFQ50B8V1B RXS50FBVMA
FFQ60B8V1B RXS60FBVMA
FHQ50BVV1B RKS50FBVMA
1 phase 220~240V 50Hz
FHQ60BVV1B RKS60FBVMA
FHQ50BVV1B RXS50FBVMA
1 phase 220~240V 50Hz
FHQ60BVV1B RXS60FBVMA
FHQ71BVV1B RZQ71FV4A
FHQ100BVV1B RZQ100KV4A 1 phase 240V 50Hz
FHQ125BVV1B RZQ125KV4A
FAQ100BVV1B RZQ100FV4A 1 phase 240V 50Hz
FBQ50BV1A RXS50FBVMA
FBQ60BV1A RXS60FBVMA 1 phase 220~240V 50Hz
FBQ71BV1A RXS71FBVMA
Note: 1. : New model or changed model

2. Power supply intake : outdoor unit
Inverter Series 3
Model name, power supply and nomenclature EDAU28-856
2.2 Nomenclature
Indoor unit
FB Q 50 B V1 A
For Australia
Power supply symbol
VE : 1 phase 220~240V 50Hz / 220V 60Hz
V1 : 1 phase 220~240V 50Hz
Indicates major design category
Capacity indication
Refrigerant : R-410A
FC : Ceiling mounted cassette type
FF : 600×600 multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type
FH : Ceiling suspended type
FA : Wall mounted type
FB : Ceiling mounted built-in type
Outdoor unit
R X S 60 FB VM A
For Australia
Power supply symbol
VM : 1 phase 220~240V 50Hz / 220~230V 60Hz
Capacity indication
Refrigerant : R-410A, Inverter (high grade model)
X : Inverter heat pump
K : Inverter cooling only
Outdoor unit for pair use
RZ Q 100 H Y4 A
For Australia
Power supply symbol
V4 : 1 phase 240V 50Hz
Y4 : 3 phase 415V 50Hz
Capacity indication
Refrigerant : R-410A
Outdoor unit for inverter, heat pump
4 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Functions
3. Functions
1
3.1 Indoor unit
FCQ FFQ FHQ50·60 FHQ71~125 FAQ FBQ

Items Features
Heat pump Heat pump Cooling only Heat pump Cooling only Heat pump Heat pump Heat pump
Auto swing { { { { { { { —
Swing pattern selection { { { — — — — —
Draft prevention function { { { { { { { —
Switchable fan speed { { { { { { { {
Program “Dry” { { { { { { { {
High ceiling application { — — { (*1) { (*1) { (*1) — —
Control
High fan speed mode — — — — — — { —
Two selectable Wired type { { { { { { { {
thermo-sensors Wireless type — — — — — — — —
Hot start { { — { — { { {
Year-round cooling applicable { { { { { { { {
Timer selector { { { { { { { {
Mould Mould resistant treatment for filter { { { { { { { —
prevention Mould-proofing drain pan — — — — — — { —
Drain pump mechanism { { { { { { — —
Pre-charged for up to 10 m — { { { { — — {
Pre-charged for up to 30 m { — — — — { { —
Long-life filter { { { { { { — —
Work & Filter sign { { { { { { { {
servicing
Ceiling soiling prevention { — — — — — — —
Low gas pressure detection { — — — — { { —
Emergency operation { { { { { { { —
Self-diagnosis function { { { { { { { {
Auto-restart { { { { { { { {
Auto cooling/heating change-over { { — { — { { {
Control by 2 remote controllers { { { { { { { {
Control
Control by 1 remote controller { { { { { { { {
features
External command control { { { { { { { {
Central remote control { { { { { { { {
Interlock control { { { { { { { {
Ultra long life filter { — — — — — — —
Option High-efficiency filter { — — — — — — —
Fresh air intake kit { { { — — — — —
Others PE fin for outdoor unit { { { { { { { {
Note: { : Functions exist.

— : No functions
*1 : Installable on max. 3.5 m high ceiling
Inverter Series 5
Functions EDAU28-856
3.2 Outdoor unit
RKS25EBVMA/RKS35EBVMA
Items Functions RKS50FBVMA/RKS60FBVMA
Inverter control {
(for comfortable air conditioning)
Control
Night time quiet operation function
for cooling
—
Operation
range Wide operation range Cooling 10~46°CDB

— : No functions
RXS50FBVMA RZQ71FV4A/RZQ100FV4A
RXS25EBVMA
Items Functions RXS35EBVMA RXS60FBVMA RZQ100KV4A/RZQ125KV4A/RZQ160KV4A
RXS71FBVMA RZQ100HY4A/RZQ125HY4A/RZQ160HY4A
Inverter control
{ { {
(for comfortable air conditioning)
Control
Night time quiet operation function
for cooling — — {
Operation Cooling 10~46°CDB 10~46°CDB –5~46°CDB

Wide operation range
range Heating –10~20°CWB –15~18°CWB –15~15.5°CWB

— : No functions
6 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Specifications
4. Specifications
1
FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–)
Indoor unit FCQ71KVEA FCQ100KVEA
Model
Outdoor unit RZQ71FV4A RZQ100KV4A
kW 7.1 (3.3-8.0) 10.0 (5.0-11.2)
Cooling capacity *1 Btu/h 24,200 (11,200-27,300) 34,100 (17,100-38,200)
kcal/h 6,100 (2,800-6,800) 8,600 (4,300-9,600)
kW 8.0 (3.5-9.0) 11.2 (5.1-12.8)
Heating capacity *1 Btu/h 27,300 (11,900-30,700) 38,200 (17,400-43,700)
kcal/h 6,800 (3,000-7,700) 9,600 (4,400-11,000)
Colour — —
Dimensions H×W×D mm 256×840×840 298×840×840
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSS tubes) Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Coil Rows×Stages×Fin pitch 2×10×1.2 2×12×1.2
Face area m² 0.446 0.535
Model QTS48C15M QTS48C15M
Type Turbo fan Turbo fan
Fan Motor output W 56 120
m³/min (H)21 (L)13.5 (H)32 (L)20
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)350 (L)225 (H)533 (L)333
Sound level *3 dB(A) (H)35 (L)28 (H)43 (L)32
Sound power dB(A) (H)53 (L)46 (H)60 (L)50
Mass (weight) kg 21 24
Liquid mm φ9.5 (Flare) φ9.5 (Flare)
Piping
connections
Gas mm φ15.9 (Flare) φ15.9 (Flare)
Drain mm I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32 I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32
Wired *2 BRC1D61 BRC1D61
Remote controller (option)
Wireless Heat pump BRC7F632F BRC7F632F
Model BYCP125K-W1 BYCP125K-W1
Colour Fresh white Fresh white
Decoration
panel (option)
Air filter Resin net (with mould resistance) Resin net (with mould resistance)
Mass (weight) kg 5.5 5.5
Outdoor unit RZQ71FV4A RZQ100KV4A
Colour Ivory white Ivory white
Dimensions H×W×D mm 770×900×320 1,170×900×320
Type Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XSS tubes) Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Face area m² 0.66 1.01
Model 2YC63BXD JT100G-VD@T3
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed swing type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output kW 1.8 1.9
Type Propeller Propeller
Motor output W 70 70+70
Fan
m³/min 52 95
Air flow rate
l/sec 867 1,583
Cooling / Heating dB(A) 48/50 49/51
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode dB(A) 47 45
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) 66 65
Piping
connections
Drain mm φ26.0 (Hole) φ26.0 (Hole)
Safety devices High pressure switch. Fuse. High pressure switch. Fuse.
Capacity step % Compressor revolution speed control (inverter system) Compressor revolution speed control (inverter system)
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Max. length m 50 (equivalent length 70m) 75 (equivalent length 90m)
Ref. piping
Max. height difference m 30 30
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge (factory charge) kg 2.8 (charged for 30m) 3.7 (charged for 30m)
Model Refer to the name plate of compressor. Refer to the name plate of compressor.
Ref. oil
Charge L 0.75 1.0
Drawing No. C : 3D058468 C : 3D058468
Note: *1. The above data are based on the following conditions. Conversion formulae
Cooling Heating Piping length Hz, volts kcal/h=kW×860
Indoor : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB Indoor : 20°CDB 7.5m Btu/h=kW×3412
50Hz, 240V cfm=m³/min×35.3
Outdoor : 35°CDB Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal)
*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

*3. Anechoic chamber conversion value, measured according to JIS parameters and criteria. During operation
these values are somewhat higher owing to ambient conditions.
Inverter Series 7
Specifications EDAU28-856

Model
Outdoor unit RZQ125KV4A RZQ160KV4A
kW 12.5 (5.7-14.0) 14.0 (6.2-15.4)
kcal/h 10,800 (4,900-12,000) 12,000 (5,300-13,200)
kW 14.0 (6.0-16.2) 16.0 (6.2-18.0)
kcal/h 12,000 (5,200-13,900) 13,800 (5,300-15,500)
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.535 0.535
m³/min (H)33 (L)22.5 (H)33 (L)22.5
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)550 (L)375 (H)550 (L)375
Piping
connections
Decoration
panel (option)
Dimensions H×W×D mm 1,170×900×320 1,170×900×320
Model JT100G-VD@T3 JT100G-VD@T3
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed scroll type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output W 70+70 70+70
Fan
m³/min 95 95
Air flow rate
l/sec 1,583 1,583
Sound level *3
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) — —
Piping
connections
Ref. piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.0 1.0
Drawing No. C : 3D058468 C : 3D058468
50Hz, 240V cfm=m³/min×35.3

8 Inverter Series
FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–) 1

Indoor unit FCQ100KVEA
Model
Outdoor unit RZQ100HY4A
kW 10.0 (5.0-11.2)
Cooling capacity *1 Btu/h 34,100 (17,100-38,200)
kcal/h 8,600 (4,300-9,600)
kW 11.2 (5.1-12.8)
Heating capacity *1 Btu/h 38,200 (17,400-43,700)
kcal/h 9,600 (4,400-11,000)
Indoor unit FCQ100KVEA
Colour —
Dimensions H×W×D mm 298×840×840
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Coil Rows×Stages×Fin pitch 2×12×1.2
Face area m² 0.535
Model QTS48C15M
Type Turbo fan
Fan Motor output W 120
m³/min (H)32 (L)20
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)533 (L)333
Sound level *3 dB(A) (H)43 (L)32
Sound power dB(A) (H)60 (L)50
Mass (weight) kg 24
Liquid mm φ9.5 (Flare)
Piping
connections
Gas mm φ15.9 (Flare)
Drain mm I.D.φ25 O.D.φ32
Wired *2 BRC1D61
Wireless Heat pump BRC7F632F
Model BYCP125K-W1
Colour Fresh white
Decoration
panel (option)
Air filter Resin net (with mould resistance)
Mass (weight) kg 5.5
Outdoor unit RZQ100HY4A
Colour Ivory white
Dimensions H×W×D mm 1,345×900×320
Type Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Face area m² 1.15
Model JT1G-VDYR@T
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed scroll type
Motor output kW 1.7
Type Propeller
Motor output W 70+70
Fan
m³/min 100
Air flow rate
l/sec 1,667
Cooling / Heating dB(A) 49/51
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode dB(A) 45
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) 65
Mass (weight) kg 108
Piping
connections
Drain mm φ26.0 (Hole)
Safety devices High pressure switch. Fuse.
Capacity step % Compressor revolution speed control (inverter system)
Refrigerant control Electronic expansion valve
Max. length m 75 (equivalent length 90m)
Ref. piping
Max. height difference m 30
Model R-410A
Refrigerant
Charge (factory charge) kg 4.3 (charged for 30m)
Model Refer to the name plate of compressor.
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.0
Drawing No. C : 3D061456
50Hz, 415V cfm=m³/min×35.3

Inverter Series 9

Model
Outdoor unit RZQ125HY4A RZQ160HY4A
kW 12.5 (5.7-14.0) 14.0 (6.2-15.4)
kcal/h 10,800 (4,900-12,000) 12,000 (5,300-13,200)
kW 14.0 (6.0-16.2) 16.0 (6.2-18.0)
kcal/h 12,000 (5,200-13,900) 13,800 (5,300-15,500)
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.535 0.535
m³/min (H)33 (L)22.5 (H)33 (L)22.5
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)550 (L)375 (H)550 (L)375
Piping
connections
Decoration
panel (option)
Outdoor unit RZQ125HY4A RZQ160HY4A
Model JT1G-VDYR@T JT1G-VDYR@T
Fan
m³/min 100 100
Air flow rate
l/sec 1,667 1,667
Sound level *3
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) — —
Piping
connections
Ref. piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.0 1.0
Drawing No. C : 3D061456 C : 3D061456
50Hz, 415V cfm=m³/min×35.3

10 Inverter Series
FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type) 1

Indoor unit FFQ25B8V1B FFQ35B8V1B
Model
Outdoor unit RKS25EBVMA RKS35EBVMA
kW 2.5 (1.2-3.0) 3.4 (1.2-3.7)
kcal/h 2,150 (1,030-2,580) 2,920 (1,030-3,180)
kW — —
Heating capacity Btu/h — —
kcal/h — —
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.269 0.269
Motor output W 55 55
Fan
m³/min (H)9.0 (L)6.5 (H)10.0 (L)6.5
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)150 (L)108 (H)167 (L)108
Sound level *3 dB(A) (H)29.5 (L)24.5 (H)32 (L)25
Sound power dB(A) 46.5 49
Piping
connections
Drain mm VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26) VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26)
Wireless Cooling only BRC7E531W BRC7E531W
Model BYFQ60B7W1 BYFQ60B7W1
Colour White (RAL 9010) White (RAL 9010)
Decoration
Dimentions H×W×D mm 55×700×700 55×700×700
panel (option)
Air filter Removable/washable/mildew proof/long life Removable/washable/mildew proof/long life
Outdoor unit RKS25EBVMA RKS35EBVMA
Type Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XA tubes) Cross fin coil (Waffle fins and Hi-XA tubes)
Face area m² 0.425 0.425
Model 1YC23NXD#A 1YC23NXD#A
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed swing type Hermetically sealed swing type
Fan
m³/min (H)33.5 (L)23.4 (H)33.5 (L)23.4
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)558 (L)390 (H)558 (L)390
Cooling / Heating dB(A) 46/— 47/—
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode dB(A) — —
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) 61/— 62/—
Piping
connections
Safety devices Fuse. Fuse.
Max. length m 20 20
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.375 0.375
Drawing No. — —
Indoor : 27°CDB, 19.0°CWB 7.5m Btu/h=kW×3412
Outdoor : 35°CDB — (Horizontal) 50Hz, 220-240V cfm=m³/min×35.3

Inverter Series 11
FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type)

Model
Outdoor unit RKS50FBVMA RKS60FBVMA
kW 4.7 (1.7-5.6) 5.8 (1.7-6.0)
kcal/h 4,040 (1,460-4,820) 4,990 (1,460-5,160)
kW — —
kcal/h — —
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.269 0.269
Fan
m³/min (H)12.0 (L)8.0 (H)15.0 (L)10.0
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)200 (L)133 (H)250 (L)167
Sound power dB(A) 53 58
Piping
connections
Wireless Cooling only BRC7E531W BRC7E531W
Decoration
panel (option)
Face area m² 0.595 0.595
Model 2YC36BXD#A 2YC36BXD#A
Fan
m³/min (HH)50.9 (H)48.9 (L)41.7 (HH)54.2 (H)50.9 (L)45.0
Air flow rate
l/sec (HH)848 (H)815 (L)695 (HH)903 (H)848 (L)750
Sound level *3
Piping
connections
Max. length m 30 30
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.65 0.65
Drawing No. — —

12 Inverter Series
FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type) 1

Model
Outdoor unit RXS25EBVMA RXS35EBVMA
kW 2.5 (1.2-3.0) 3.4 (1.2-3.7)
kcal/h 2,150 (1,030-2,580) 2,920 (1,030-3,180)
kW 3.2 (1.2-4.5) 4.0 (1.2-5.0)
kcal/h 2,750 (1,030-3,870) 3,440 (1,030-4,300)
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.269 0.269
Fan
m³/min (H)9.0 (L)6.5 (H)10.0 (L)6.5
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)150 (L)108 (H)167 (L)108
Sound level *3 dB(A) (H)29.5 (L)24.5 (H)32 (L)25
Sound power dB(A) 46.5 49
Piping
connections
Wireless Heat pump BRC7E530W BRC7E530W
Decoration
panel (option)
Outdoor unit RXS25EBVMA RXS35EBVMA
Face area m² 0.425 0.425
Model 1YC23NXD#A 1YC23NXD#A
m³/min (H)33.5 (L)23.4 (H)33.5 (L)23.4
Fan Cooling
Air flow l/sec (H)558 (L)390 (H)558 (L)390
rate m³/min (H)30.2 (L)28.3 (H)30.2 (L)28.3
Heating
l/sec (H)503 (L)472 (H)503 (L)472
Sound level *3
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) 61/62 62/63
Piping
connections
Max. length m 20 20
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.375 0.375
Drawing No. — —
Outdoor : 35°CDB 50Hz, 220-240V cfm=m³/min×35.3
Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal)

Inverter Series 13
FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type)

Model
Outdoor unit RXS50FBVMA RXS60FBVMA
kW 4.7 (1.7-5.6) 5.8 (1.7-6.0)
kcal/h 4,040 (1,460-4,820) 4,990 (1,460-5,160)
kW 5.5 (1.7-7.0) 7.0 (1.7-8.0)
kcal/h 4,730 (1,460-6,020) 6,020 (1,460-6,880)
Colour — —
Face area m² 0.269 0.269
Fan
m³/min (H)12.0 (L)8.0 (H)15.0 (L)10.0
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)200 (L)133 (H)250 (L)167
Sound power dB(A) 53 58
Piping
connections
Wireless Heat pump BRC7E530W BRC7E530W
Decoration
panel (option)
Face area m² 0.595 0.595
m³/min (HH)50.9 (H)48.9 (L)41.7 (HH)54.2 (H)50.9 (L)45.0
Fan Cooling
Air flow l/sec (HH)848 (H)815 (L)695 (HH)903 (H)848 (L)750
rate m³/min (H)45.0 (L)45.0 (H)46.3 (L)46.3
Heating
l/sec (H)750 (L)750 (H)772 (L)772
Sound level *3
Piping
connections
Max. length m 30 30
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.65 0.65
Drawing No. — —
Outdoor : 35°CDB 50Hz, 220-240V cfm=m³/min×35.3
Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal)

14 Inverter Series
FHQ (Ceiling suspended type) 1

Indoor unit FHQ50BVV1B FHQ60BVV1B
Model
kW 5.0 (1.7-5.6) 5.7 (1.7-6.0)
kcal/h 4,300 (1,460-4,820) 4,900 (1,460-5,160)
kW — —
kcal/h — —
Colour White White
Dimensions H×W×D mm 195×960×680 195×1,160×680
Face area m² 0.182 0.233
Type Sirocco fan Sirocco fan
Fan
m³/min (H)13 (L)10 (H)17 (L)13
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)216 (L)167 (H)283 (L)216
Sound power dB(A) (H)54 (H)55
Air filter Removable/washable Removable/washable
Piping
connections
Wireless Cooling only BRC7EA66 BRC7EA66
Face area m² 0.595 0.595
Fan
m³/min (HH)50.9 (H)48.9 (L)41.7 (HH)54.2 (H)50.9 (L)45.0
Air flow rate
l/sec (HH)848 (H)815 (L)695 (HH)903 (H)848 (L)750
Sound level *3
Piping
connections
Max. length m 30 30
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.65 0.65
Drawing No. C: 3D055513A C: 3D055514A

Inverter Series 15
FHQ (Ceiling suspended type)

Model
kW 5.0 (1.7-5.6) 5.7 (1.7-6.0)
kcal/h 4,300 (1,460-4,820) 4,900 (1,460-5,160)
kW 6.0 (1.7-7.0) 7.2 (1.7-8.0)
kcal/h 5,160 (1,460-6,020) 6,190 (1,460-6,880)
Colour White White
Face area m² 0.182 0.233
m³/min (H)13 (L)10 (H)17 (L)13
Fan Cooling
rate m³/min (H)13 (L)10 (H)16 (L)13
Heating
l/sec (H)216 (L)167 (H)267 (L)216
Sound power dB(A) (H)54 (H)55
Air filter Removable/washable Removable/washable
Piping
connections
Wireless Heat pump BRC7EA63W BRC7EA63W
Face area m² 0.595 0.595
m³/min (HH)50.9 (H)48.9 (L)41.7 (HH)54.2 (H)50.9 (L)45.0
Fan Cooling
rate m³/min (H)45.0 (L)45.0 (H)46.3 (L)46.3
Heating
l/sec (H)750 (L)750 (H)772 (L)772
Sound level *3
Piping
connections
Max. length m 30 30
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.65 0.65
Drawing No. C: 3D055511 C: 3D055512
50Hz, 220-240V cfm=m³/min×35.3

16 Inverter Series
FHQ (Ceiling suspended type) 1

Indoor unit FHQ71BVV1B
Model
Outdoor unit RZQ71FV4A
kW 7.1 (3.3-8.0)
kcal/h 6,100 (2,800-6,800)
kW 8.0 (3.5-9.0)
kcal/h 6,800 (3,000-7,700)
Indoor unit FHQ71BVV1B
Colour White
Dimensions H×W×D mm 195×1,160×680
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and N-hix tubes)
Face area m² 0.233
Type Sirocco fan
Motor output W 62
Fan
m³/min (H)17 (L)14
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)283 (L)233
Air Filter —
Mass (weight) kg 27
Piping
connections
Drain mm VP20 (I.D.φ20 O.D.φ26)
Wired *2 BRC1D61
Wireless Heat pump BRC7EA63W
Outdoor Unit RZQ71FV4A
Colour Ivory white
Face area m² 0.66
Model 2YC63BXD
Comp. Type Hermetically sealed swing type
Motor output kW 1.8
Type Propeller
Motor output W 70
Fan
m³/min 52
Air flow rate
l/sec 867
Sound level *3
Mass (weight) kg 65
Piping
connections
Thermal protector for outdoor fan motor and indoor fan motor. High pressure switch. Low pressure switch. Over current
Safety devices
device. Motor protector.(compressor)
Ref. piping
Model R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 0.75
Drawing No. C : 4D054893A
Cooling Heating Piping length Hz, volts Standard kcal/h=kW×860
50Hz, 240V AS/NZS3823.1.1 cfm=m³/min×35.3
Outdoor : 35°CDB, 24°CWB Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal)

Inverter Series 17

Model
kW 10.0 (5.0-11.2) 12.1 (5.7-14.0)
kcal/h 8,600 (4,300-9,600) 10,400 (4,900-12,000)
kW 11.2 (5.1-12.8) 14.0 (6.0-16.2)
kcal/h 9,600 (4,400-11,000) 12,000 (5,200-13,900)
Colour White White
Dimensions H×W×D mm 195×1,400×680 195×1,590×680
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and N-hix tubes) Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and N-hix tubes)
Face area m² 0.293 0.341
Fan
m³/min (H)24 (L)20 (H)30 (L)25
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)400 (L)333 (H)500 (L)416
Piping
connections
Wireless Heat pump BRC7EA63W BRC7EA63W
Model JT100G-VD@T3 JT100G-VD@T3
Fan
m³/min 95 95
Air flow rate
l/sec 1,583 1,583
Sound level *3
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) 65 —
Piping
connections
Ref. piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 1.0 1.0
Drawing No. C : 4D058470A C : 4D058470A
50Hz, 240V cfm=m³/min×35.3

18 Inverter Series
FAQ (Wall mounted type) 1

Indoor unit FAQ100BVV1B
Model
kW 9.7 (4.9-11.0)
kcal/h 8,300 (4,200-9,400)
kW 11.0 (5.5-12.6)
kcal/h 9,500 (4,700-10,800)
Indoor unit FAQ100BVV1B
Colour White
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and N-hix tubes)
Face area m² 0.332
Type Cross flow fan
Motor output W 49
Fan
m³/min (H)23 (L)19
Air flow rate
l/sec (H)383 (L)316
Air filter —
Mass (weight) kg 26
Piping
connections
Wired *2 BRC1D61
Wireless Heat pump BRC7C610W
Colour Ivory white
Face area m² 0.66
Model 2YC63BXD
Motor output kW 1.8
Type Propeller
Motor output W 70
Fan
m³/min 56
Air flow rate
l/sec 933
Sound level *3
Mass (weight) kg 65
Piping
connections
Thermal protector for outdoor fan motor and indoor fan motor. High pressure switch. Low pressure switch. Over current
Safety devices
device. Motor protector.(compressor)
Ref. piping
Model R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. oil
Charge L 0.75
Drawing No. C : 4D054914A
Cooling Heating Piping length Hz, volts Standard kcal/h=kW×860
50Hz, 240V AS/NZS3823.1.1 cfm=m³/min×35.3
Outdoor : 35°CDB, 24°CWB Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal)

Inverter Series 19
FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type)

Indoor unit FBQ50BV1A FBQ60BV1A
Model
kW 5.0 (1.7-5.6) 5.7 (1.7-7.0)
kcal/h 4,300 (1,460-4,820) 4,900 (1,460-6,020)
kW 6.0 (1.7-7.0) 7.0 (1.7-8.0)
kcal/h 5,160 (1,460-6,020) 6,020 (1,460-6,880)
Indoor unit FBQ50BV1A FBQ60BV1A
External static
High-Standard-Low Pa 88-49-20 88-49-20
pressure *4
Face area m² 0.132 0.220
m³/min (H)13 (L)9 (H)18 (L)13
Fan Cooling
rate m³/min (H)14 (L)10 (H)19 (L)14
Heating
l/sec (H)233 (L)167 (H)316 (L)233
Sound power dB(A) — —
Air filter — —
Piping
connections
Wireless Heat pump BRC4C62 BRC4C62
Face area m² 0.595 0.595
m³/min (HH)50.9 (H)48.9 (L)41.7 (HH)54.2 (H)50.9 (L)45.0
Fan Cooling
rate m³/min (H)45.0 (L)45.0 (H)46.3 (L)46.3
Heating
l/sec (H)750 (L)750 (H)772 (L)772
Sound level *3
Piping
connections
Max. length m 30 30
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.65 0.65
Drawing No. C: 3D055515 C: 3D055516
Note: *1. The above data are based on the following conditions.
Conversion formulae
Cooling Heating Piping length Hz, volts
kcal/h=kW×860
50Hz, 220-240V
Outdoor : 35°CDB Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal) cfm=m³/min×35.3

*4. Initial setting is Standard.
20 Inverter Series
FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type) 1

Indoor unit FBQ71BV1A
Model
Outdoor unit RXS71FBVMA
kW 6.7 (2.3-8.0)
kcal/h 5,800 (1,980-6,900)
kW 8.2 (2.3-10.0)
kcal/h 7,050 (1,980-8,600)
Indoor unit FBQ71BV1A
External static
High-Standard-Low Pa 88-49-20
pressure *4
Type Cross fin coil (Multi louver fins and Hi-XSS tubes)
Face area m² 0.220
Type Sirocco fan
Motor output W 110
m³/min (H)18 (L)13
Fan Cooling
Air flow l/sec (H)300 (L)216
rate m³/min (H)19 (L)14
Heating
l/sec (H)316 (L)233
Sound power dB(A) —
Air filter —
Mass (weight) kg 41
Piping
connections
Wired *2 BRC1D61
Wireless Heat pump BRC4C62
Outdoor unit RXS71FBVMA
Colour Ivory white
Dimentions H×W×D mm 770×900×320
Face area m² 0.641
Model 2YC36BXD#D
Motor output kW 1.92
Type Propeller
Motor output W 66
m³/min (HH)57.1 (H)54.5 (L)46.0
Fan Cooling
Air flow l/sec (HH)952 (H)908 (L)767
rate m³/min (H)52.5 (L)52.5
Heating
l/sec (H)875 (L)875
Sound level *3
Night quiet mode dB(A) —
Sound power Cooling / Heating dB(A) 66/66
Mass (weight) kg 71
Piping
connections
Safety devices Fuse.
Max. length m 30
Ref. Piping
Model R-410A
Refrigerant
Ref. Oil
Charge L 0.75
Drawing No. C: 3D054918
Note: *1. The above data are based on the following conditions.
Conversion formulae
Cooling Heating Piping length Hz, volts
kcal/h=kW×860
50Hz, 220-240V
Outdoor : 35°CDB Outdoor : 7°CDB, 6°CWB (Horizontal) cfm=m³/min×35.3

*4. Initial setting is Standard.
Inverter Series 21
22
5.1
Unit (mm)
B
5.1.1
CONNECTION POSITION
81 2 × 100=200 85 OF BRANCH DUCT
124 (ROUND SHAPE TYPE)
160
300 860~910 (CELING OPENING SPACE) (NOTE 4)
950 NOTE 2 C/L 124
OR LESS 710 (SUSPENTION POSITION) 16-M4 HOLE CONNECTION POSITION 109
8 9 420 OF BRANCH DUCT 95
FCQ71KVEA
(SQUARE-SHAPED TYPE)
160
20-M4
PREPARED HOLE
PIPE CONNECTION SIDE
95
80
110
124
157 CONNECTION POSITION
124
350 OF BRANCH DUCT
Indoor unit
25
C/L
350
157
C B ARROW VIEW
2 × 100=200
950
213
Dimensions and service space
80
780 (SUSPENTION POSITION)

CONNECTION POSITION φ
90
DRAIN CONNECTION SIDE OF BRANCH DUCT (KN 100
OC
860~910 (CELING OPENING SPACE) (NOTE 4)

(ROUND SHAPE TYPE) KH
OLE
)
OF FRESH AIR INTAKE KIT
90
420 (DIRECT INSTALLATION TYPE) 183
A ARROW VIEW
C ARROW VIEW
16-M4 PREPARED HOLE
3 20-M4 PREPARED HOLE
CONNECTION POSITION 55 840 55
55 840 55 OF BRANCH DUCT
340 (SQUARE-SHAPED TYPE) 81 2 × 100=200 85 5
80 2 × 100=200 80 64 124
850
124 50
ADJUSTABLE (0~675)
95
110
124
95
110
124
60
105
256
246
175
10
165
160
160
42
150
130
125
5. Dimensions and service space
20 C/L 256 35 OR LESS
50
40
157 35 OR LESS (NOTE 4)
SUSPENTION BOLT 157 (NOTE 4)

CONNECTION POSITION 350 CONNECTION POSITION CONNECTION POSITION
4-M8~M10 350
OF BRANCH DUCT 280 OF BRANCH DUCT OF BRANCH DUCT
(ROUND SHAPE TYPE) 330 4 1 2
• DECORATION PANEL (SQUARE-SHAPED TYPE)
1500 OR MORE
(ROUND SHAPE TYPE)
(REQUIRED SPACE)
A
NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURE'S LABEL BYCP125K-W1 FRESH WHITE 6.5Y 9.5/0.5
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT:
FOR HEIGHT INSTALLATION
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE 2500 OR MORE
SUCTION GRILL INNER SIDE'S ELECTRIC COMPONENTS BOX'S LID SURFACE LOCAL CONNECTION OD φ 32
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL: 9 DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY) (OUTLET) (UNIT CONNECTION
DECORATION PANEL'S CORNER DECORATION COVER INNER SURFACE OD φ 26)
• REQUIRED SPACE
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL 1500mm OR MORE* 8 CORNER DECORATION COVER
BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER. REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE 200mm OR MORE* 7 SUCTION GRILLE
CONTROLLER IN DETAIL. 6 AIR-OUTLET
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30˚C AND 1500mm OR MORE* CONNECTION WIRING/
RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE UNIT 5 REMOTE CONTROL WIRING
1500mm OR MORE*
CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL INSULATION (THICKNESS CONNECTION
10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM) IS REQUIRED. 200mm OR MORE*
1500mm OR MORE* POWER-SOURCE WIRING
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 910mm 4
* WHEN THE BLOW-OFF GRILL IS CLOSING. THE REQUIRED AND A UNIT WIRING CONNECTION
SQUARE CEILING OPENING, KEEP THE CLEARANCE OF 35mm OR LESS
SPACE IS 500mm OR MORE. 3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION VP25 (OD φ 32)
BETWEEN THE INDOOR UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT THE 2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION φ 15.9 (FLARE CONNECTION)
WHEN UNITING AND CLOSING A CORNER PART (BOTH
PANEL OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED. 1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION φ 9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
RIGHT AND LEFT OF THE BLOW-OFF GRILL TO CLOSE), IT
5. PLEASE DO NOT PLACE THE THING BEEN DAMP AND TROUBLED UNDER AN ITEM PART NAME REMARK
IS 200mm OR MORE.
INDOOR UNIT.
WHEN THE CASE WHERE HUMIDITY IS 80% OR MORE, AND THE DRAIN
OUTLET ARE CHOKED UP AND THE AIR FILTER ARE DIRTY, DEW MAY FALL.
3D058460A
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
B CONNECTION POSITION
81 2 × 100=200 85 OF BRANCH DUCT 160
300 860~910 (CELING OPENING SPACE) (NOTE 4) 160 (ROUND SHAPE TYPE) 167
950 NOTE 2 C/L 93 67
OR LESS 710 (SUSPENTION POSITION) 16-M4 HOLE CONNECTION POSITION
8 9 420 OF BRANCH DUCT 95
67
(SQUARE-SHAPED TYPE) 29
EDAU28-856
160
Inverter Series
20-M4
PREPARED HOLE
167
93
PIPE CONNECTION SIDE
80
29
95
157
160
CONNECTION POSITION
350 OF BRANCH DUCT
25
157
350
C B ARROW VIEW C/L
950
2 × 100=200
213
6
80

CONNECTION POSITION
OF BRANCH DUCT
φ1
90
DRAIN CONNECTION SIDE

(ROUND SHAPE TYPE)
(KNO 00
860~910 (CELING OPENING SPACE) (NOTE 4)

CK H
OLE
7 CONNECTION POSITION )
OF FRESH AIR INTAKE KIT 90
(DIRECT INSTALLATION TYPE) 196
A ARROW VIEW 420
C ARROW VIEW
16-M4 PREPARED HOLE
FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
3 27-M4 PREPARED HOLE

55 840 55 CONNECTION POSITION 55 840 55
340 OF BRANCH DUCT 81 2 × 100=200 85
80 2 × 100=200 80 (SQUARE-SHAPED TYPE) 64 160 5
160 50
850
95
167
ADJUSTABLE (0~675)
167
93
95
60
105
29
160
298
29
288
10
160
175
160
165
150
42
130
67
125
20 C/L 35 OR LESS (NOTE 4) 35 OR LESS
50
40
256
157 (NOTE 4)
SUSPENTION BOLT 350 CONNECTION POSITION OF BRANCH DUCT
4-M8~M10
350
CONNECTION POSITION 280 4 1 2 OF BRANCH DUCT (SQUARE-SHAPED TYPE) • DECORATION PANEL
330 (ROUND SHAPE TYPE)
1500 OR MORE
OF BRANCH DUCT
(REQUIRED SPACE)
(ROUND SHAPE TYPE) A BYCP125K-W1 FRESH WHITE 6.5Y 9.5/0.5

NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURE'S LABEL
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE 2500 OR MORE
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT: LOCAL CONNECTION OD φ 32

SUCTION GRILL INNER SIDE'S ELECTRIC COMPONENTS BOX'S LID SURFACE 9 DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY) (OUTLET) (UNIT CONNECTION
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL: OD φ 26)
• REQUIRED SPACE
DECORATION PANEL'S CORNER DECORATION COVER INNER SURFACE 1500mm OR MORE* 8 CORNER DECORATION COVER
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL 200mm OR MORE* 7 SUCTION GRILLE
BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER. REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE 6 AIR-OUTLET
CONTROLLER IN DETAIL. 1500mm OR MORE* CONNECTION WIRING/
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30˚C 1500mm OR MORE* 5 REMOTE CONTROL WIRING
AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE CONNECTION
200mm OR MORE*
UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL INSULATION 1500mm OR MORE* POWER-SOURCE WIRING
4
(THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM) IS AND A UNIT WIRING CONNECTION
* WHEN THE BLOW-OFF GRILL IS CLOSING. THE REQUIRED
REQUIRED. 3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION VP25 (OD φ 32)
SPACE IS 500mm OR MORE.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 910mm 2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION φ 15.9 (FLARE CONNECTION)
WHEN UNITING AND CLOSING A CORNER PART (BOTH RIGHT 1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION φ 9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
AND LEFT OF THE BLOW-OFF GRILL TO CLOSE), IT IS 200mm ITEM PART NAME REMARK
BETWEEN THE INDOOR UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT THE
OR MORE.
PANEL OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
5. PLEASE DO NOT PLACE THE THING BEEN DAMP AND TROUBLED UNDER AN
INDOOR UNIT.
WHEN THE CASE WHERE HUMIDITY IS 80% OR MORE, AND THE DRAIN
OUTLET ARE CHOKED UP AND THE AIR FILTER ARE DIRTY, DEW MAY FALL.
3D058469A
23
1
24
Unit (mm)
585~660 (CEILING OPENING SPACE) 5.1.2
700 300 OR LESS 533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)
NOTE) 2. 320
8 89
210
DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE CEILING
B
6
89
φ 100
150
700
FFQ25B8V1B / FFQ35B8V1B
PIPE CONNECTION 4-M4 HOLE OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE

SIDE (DIRECT CONNECTION)

585~660 (CEILING OPENING SPACE)
B ARROW VIEW
7
A ARROW VIEW
320
• REQUIRED SPACE
1500mm OR MORE *
3 62.5 575 62.5
1500mm
62.5 575 62.5 OR MORE *
196 1500mm
750
OR MORE *
ADJUSTABLE (0~545)
5 1500mm OR MORE *
260
285
* WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,
25
205
183
145
(180)
THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.
295 OR MORE
172
55
30
45 OR LESS 45 OR LESS
FFQ (600×600 multi flow ceiling mounted cassete type)
211 2 NOTE) 4.
SUSPENTION BOLT 1 4
4-M8~M10
1500 OR MORE
A
NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURE'S LABEL 8 DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY) I.D. φ 25 (OUTLET)
(REQUIRED SPACE)
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT : ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE

2500 OR MORE
7 SUCTION GRILLE
SUCTION GRILLE 6 AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL : ON THE INNER FRAME 5 REMOTE CONTROL CODE
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE

AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL. • DECORATION PANEL 3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION VP20 (O.D. φ 26)
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30˚C 2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION φ 9.5 (FLARE CONNECTION)
BYFQ60BW1 WHITE Ral 9010 1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION φ 6.4 (FLARE CONNECTION)
AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE
UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL INSULATION ITEM PART NAME REMARK
(THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM)
IS REQUIRED.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm
BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT THE PANEL
OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
3D039003B
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
700 300 OR LESS 533 (SUSPENTION POSITION)
NOTE) 2. 320
EDAU28-856
8 89
Inverter Series
210
DRAIN CONNECTION
SIDE CEILING
B
6
89
φ 100
150
700
FFQ50B8V1B / FFQ60B8V1B
PIPE CONNECTION 4-M4 HOLE OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE

SIDE (DIRECT CONNECTION)

B ARROW VIEW
7
A ARROW VIEW
320
• REQUIRED SPACE
1500mm OR MORE *
3 62.5 575 62.5
1500mm
62.5 575 62.5 OR MORE *
196 1500mm
750
OR MORE *
ADJUSTABLE (0~545)
5 1500mm OR MORE *
260
285
* WHEN THE DISCHARGE GRILL IS CLOSEOUT,
25
205
183
145
(180)
THE REQUIRED SPACE IS 200mm OR MORE.

295 OR MORE
172
55
30
45 OR LESS 45 OR LESS
211 2 NOTE) 4.
SUSPENTION BOLT 1 4
4-M8~M10
1500 OR MORE
A
NOTE) 1. STICKING LOCATION FOR MANUFACTURE'S LABEL 8 DRAIN HOSE (ACCESSORY) I.D. φ 25 (OUTLET)
(REQUIRED SPACE)
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR INDOOR UNIT : ON THE BELL MOUTH INSIDE

2500 OR MORE
7 SUCTION GRILLE
SUCTION GRILLE 6 AIR DISCHARGE GRILL
MANUFACTURE'S LABEL FOR DECORATION PANEL : ON THE INNER FRAME 5 REMOTE CONTROL CODE
FROM THE FLOOR SIDE
INSIDE SUCTION GRILLE

AND CONTROL WIRING CONNECTION
2. IN CASE OF USING WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER, THIS POSITION WILL
4 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION
BE A SIGNAL RECEIVER.
REFER TO THE DRAWING OF WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER IN DETAIL. • DECORATION PANEL 3 DRAIN PIPE CONNECTION VP20 (O.D. φ 26)
3. WHEN THE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY IN THE CEILING EXCEED 30˚C 2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION φ 12.7 (FLARE CONNECTION)
BYFQ60BW1 WHITE Ral 9010 1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION φ 6.4 (FLARE CONNECTION)
AND RH 80% OR THE FRESH AIR IS INDUCTED INTO THE CEILING OR THE
UNIT CONTINUES 24 HOUR OPERATION, AN ADDITIONAL INSULATION ITEM PART NAME REMARK
(THICKNESS 10mm OR MORE OF GLASSWOOL OR POLYETHYLENE FORM)
IS REQUIRED.
4. THOUGH THE INSTALLATION IS ACCEPTABLE UP TO MAXIMUM OF 660mm
BETWEEN THE MAIN UNIT AND THE CEILING OPENING SO THAT THE PANEL
OVERLAP ALLOWANCE CAN BE ENSURED.
3D039005B
25
1
26
Unit (mm)
5.1.3
170
12 9
105 145 60
FHQ50BVV1B
90
18 17 16 142 58
36
135
115 60
65
160
102
40
185
210
85
192
50 60 65
Position slit hole for taking out in piping back

127
260
(View from the front)
105
10 15
5
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
8
135
5 11 80
40
920
(Hanging position)
Hanging bolt
90
155 Position : Hole of wall
4-M8 ~ M10 1 for taking out in piping back
680
5
(Required space)
55
4 φ45 14
195
155
Number Name Description
55 1 Air discharge grille
13
30 or more 960 30 or more 2 Air suction grille
6
(Service space) (Service space)
3 Air filter
300 or more
(Required space)
The front 4 Gas pipe connection φ 12.7 flare
Brand name plate
(Note.2) 5 Liquid pipe connection φ 6.4 flare
For height installaion

Obstacle
6 Drain pipe connection VP 20
Floor side
From the floor side 2500 or more

7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4
Drain pipe 8 Suspention bracket

connection VP20
6
9 Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid
(For left piping)
10 Upward piping and wiring connection opening lid
11 Right side pipe connection Slit hole
12 Left back drain pipe connection Slit hole
300
275
275
225
13 Left side drain pipe connection Slit hole

14 Right side drain pipe connection Slit hole
80 80 15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ 100
Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille. 105 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ 60
3 2 7 5 4
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 17 Upward gas pipe connection φ 36
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail. 170
3. The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached. 18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ 26
2
(0.5mm × 2 wicks × O.D. φ 5.4)
(It is not attached to VRV.)
3D027536D
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
170 12 9
105 145 60
90
EDAU28-856
18 17 16 142 58
Inverter Series
FHQ60BVV1B
36
135
115 60
65
102
160
40
185
210
85
192
50 60 65
127 Position slit hole for taking out in piping back
260
5
10
105
15
8
(Hanging position)
1120
135 (Required space)
(Hanging position)
5
Hanging bolt
1
680 4-M8~M10 5 11 Position : Hole of wall
80
for taking out in piping back
(Required space)
40

90
155
155
195
55 55 14
13 φ 45
4
6 30 or more 1160 30 or more
(Service space)
300 or more
(Services pace)
(Required space)
The front Number Name Description
Brand name plate 1 Air discharge grille
Obstacle

(Note. 2) 2 Air suction grille
Floor side
3 Air filter

4 Gas pipe connection φ 12.7 flare
Drain pipe
5 Liquid pipe connection φ 6.4 flare
connection VP20
6 6 Drain pipe connection VP20
(For left piping)
8 Suspention bracket
300
275
275

225

80 80 12 Left back drain pipe connection Slit hole
105 13 Left side drain pipe connection Slit hole
3 2 7 5 4
170 14 Right side drain pipe connection Slit hole
15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ 100
Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate: Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille. 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ 60
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal receiver. 17 Upward gas pipe connection φ 36
Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ 26
3. The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm2 × 2wicks × O. D. φ 5.4)
3D037994A
27
1
28
Unit (mm)
170 12 9
FHQ71BVV1B
145 60
105
90
135
18 17 16 142 58
36
115 60
65
40
160
102
185
210
85
50 60 65
192
127 (View from the front)
260
105
10 15
5
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
8
135
5 11 80
1120 40
(Hanging position)
Hanging bolt Position : Hole of wall
90
1
155
4-M8 ~ M10 for taking out in piping back

680
5
(Required space)
55 14
4 φ45
155
195

13
2 Air suction grille
6 30 or more 1160 30 or more
(Service space) (Service space) 3 Air filter
300 or more
(Required space)
4 Gas pipe connection φ15.9 flare
The front
5 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 flare

Obstacle Brand name plate
(Note.2) 6 Drain pipe connection VP20

Floor side
8 Suspention bracket
Drain pipe 9 Backward piping and wiring connection opening lid

connection VP20
6 10 Upward piping and wiring connection opening lid
(For left piping)
300
275
275
Slit hole
225
14 Right side drain pipe connection

15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100
80 80 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60

Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille.
105 17 Upward gas pipe connection φ36
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 4
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
3 2 7 5 18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ26
170
3. The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
2
(0.5mm × 2 wicks × O.D. φ5.4)
3D027538F
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
170
EDAU28-856
105 12 9
145 60
Inverter Series
FHQ100BVV1B
18 17 16 90
142 58
36
135
115 60
160
102
185
210
40
85
65
192
50 60 65

127
260
10 105
15
(Required space)
5
(Hanging position)
8
135
1360 5 11 80
(Hanging position)
Hanging bolt 1
40
680 4-M8 ~ M10 Position:Hole of wall
for taking out in piping back
5
(Required space)
90
155
155
195
55
4 φ45 14
55 Number Name Description
13
30 or more 1400 30 or more
Air suction grille
300 or more
(Service space) (Service space) 2
(Required space)
3 Air filter
The front 4 Gas pipe connection

Obstacle φ15.9 flare
Brand name plate
(Note.2) 5 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 flare
Floor side

6 Drain pipe connection VP20

Drain pipe
connection VP20 8 Suspention bracket
(For left piping)
6
300
275
275
225
80 80 15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100
16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60

Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille. 105
3 2 7 5 4 Upward gas pipe connection
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 17 φ36
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail. 170
18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ26
3.The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm²×2wicks×O.D. φ5.4)
3D044893A
29
1
30
Unit (mm)
170
105 12 9
145 60
18 17 16
FHQ125BVV1B
90
142 58
36
135
115 60
160
102
185
210
40
85
65
192
50 60 65

127
260
105
10
15
5
(Required space)
(Hanging position)
8
135
1550
(Hanging position) 5 11 80
Hanging bolt 40 Position : Hole of wall
4-M8 ~ M10 1
680 for taking out in piping back
5
90
(Required space)
155
13
155
195
55
4 φ45 14
55 Number Name Description

1 Air discharge grille
6
30 or more 1590 30 or more Air suction grille
2
300 or more
(Service space) (Service space)
(Required space)
3 Air filter
The front
Brand name plate 4 Gas pipe connection φ15.9 flare

Obstacle
(Note.2)
5 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 flare
Floor side

6 Drain pipe connection VP20
Drain pipe 7 Earth terminal (Inside the electric components box) M4

connection VP20 6 8 Suspention bracket
(For left piping)
300
275
275
225

80 80 15 Hole of wall for taking out in piping back φ100
3
105 16 Upward drain pipe connection φ60
Note) 1. Location of unit's Name plate : Bottom of fan housing inside the suction grille. 2 7 5 4
2. In case of using wireless remote controller, this position will be a signal 170 17 Upward gas pipe connection φ36
receiver. Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
18 Upward liquid pipe connection φ26
3.The remote control code is the standard <about 3m outside the machine> attached.
(0.5mm²×2wicks×O.D. φ5.4)
(It is attached to VRV.)
3D044894B
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
5.1.4
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
Piping direction
FAQ100BVV1B
Notes
1. Location of general rated name plate
Right side plate outside surface
2. In case of using wireless remote controller,
this position will be a signal receiver.
Refer to the drawing of wireless remote controller in detail.
50 or more 50 or more
(Required space) (Required space)
1570
FAQ (Wall mounted type)
7
9
360
8
Brand name plate 250 or more

200 3 Note 2. Service space
2 for air filter
1235 100
74 Direction for air filter draw out
8-5 × 20 Oval hole (For wood screw) 120 180 120 120 210 120 120 123
60 5-6 × 20 Oval hole (For wood screw)
50 or more
40
6 6 Ceiling surface
15
10
(Required space)
9 Slit hole for left side piping connection

53
A A A A A A A A
8 Slit hole for right side piping connection
360
10
7 Earth terminal (M4) (inside cover)
50 40
6 Drain piping connection (VP20 O. D. φ 26)
142
50 35
45
40
5 Gas piping connection (φ 9.5 Flare)
50 30 40 40
Approx. 450 60 4 Gas piping connection (φ 15.9 Flare)
15
6
Approx. 580 φ 80 Hole 3 Discharge outlet
40 13-φ 5 Hole (For wood screw) 5
4 Approx. 600 Piping and wiring 2 Air filter
50 2-φ 12 Hole (For bolt) intake 1 Front grille
70
NO. PART NAME
Mounting location
Detail A (Mounting hole for installation plate)
3D044897A
31
1
32
Unit (mm)
5.1.5
FBQ50BV1A
145 630
(SUSPENSION POSITION)
7
556
533
160
150
250
208
228
750
7 × 65=455
6 × 65=390
27
4 × 120=480
A VIEW 160 P. C. D. 600
10 9 8 φ 125
FRESH AIR INTAKE POSITION
(KNOCK HOLE)
FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type)
100
6-M5HOLE
25 800 25
700 60 (CIRCUMFERENCE)
440
460 50 315 B VIEW
65 3 5
SUSPENSION BOLT
1
67
135
150
195
200
B
150
245
215
A
300
135 120
2 × 65=130
57 2
3 × 150=450
SERVICE SPACE 6 4
300
485 10 INSPECTION HOLE 400 × 400
SPACE
45 46
NOTE) 2
300 OR MORE 9 SWITCH BOX
SERVICE
3 × 65=195
8 SUCTION FLANGE
7 DISCHARGE FLANGE
6 DRAIN HOLE VP25 (O. D. φ 32, l. D. φ 25 )
NOTE) 1. LOCATION OF UNIT' S NAME PLATE : FAN HOSING SURFACE.
5 POWER WIRING PORT
2. IF THE CEILING IS NOT REMOVABLE, A 300mm SERVICE SPACE
4 INTERUNIT WIRING PORT
MUST BE KEPT BETWEEN THE UNIT AND THE CEILING.
3 DRAIN PIPE CONNETION VP25 (O. D. φ 32, l. D. φ 25 )
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE.
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION φ 12.7 FLARE CONNECTION
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD (GRAVITY METHOD)
( ) 1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION φ 6.4 FLARE CONNECTION
50% OR MORE.
NUMBER NAME DESCRIPTION
3D053083
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
7 145 630
(SUSPENSION POSITION) 8
856
833
FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A
160
250
208
150
228
1050
11 × 65=715
27
12 × 65=780
6 × 120=720
A VIEW 160P. C. D. 600
φ 125
FRESH AIR INTAKE POSITION
(KNOCK HOLE)
9
10
100
25 800 25 6-M5HOLE
1000 60 440 (CIRCUMFERENCE)
760 50 315
SUSPENSION BOLT 3 5 B VIEW
65
1
67
150
135
195
200
B
245
215
150
A
300
135 120
2 × 65=130
57 2
5 × 150=750 6 4
300
SERVICE SPACE
785
SPACE
300 OR MORE 45 46
NOTE) 2
SERVICE
10 INSPECTION HOLE 600 × 600
3 × 65=195
9 SWITCH BOX
NOTE) 1. LOCATION OF UNIT'S NAME PLATE: FAN HOSING SURFACE. 8 SUCTION FLANGE
2. IF THE CEILING IS NOT REMOVABLE, A 300mm SERVICE SPACE 7 DISCHARGE FLANGE
MUST BE KEPT BETWEEN THE UNIT AND THE CEILING. 6 DRAIN HOLE VP25 (O. D. φ 32, I. D. φ 25)
3. MOUNT THE AIR FILTER AT THE SUCTION SIDE. 5 POWER WIRING PORT
SELECT ITS COLORIMETHOD (GRAVITY METHOD) 4 INTERUNIT WIRING PORT
50% OR MORE. 3 DRAIN PIPE CONNETION VP25 (O. D. φ 32, I. D. φ 25)
2 GAS PIPE CONNECTION NOTE) 4.
4. PIPE SPECIFICATION
1 LIQUID PIPE CONNECTION φ 6.4 FLARE CONNECTION
FBQ60 φ 12.7 (FLARE CONNECTION) NUMBER NAME DESCRIPTION
FBQ71 φ 15.9 (FLARE CONNECTION)
3D053084A
33
1
Dimensions and service space EDAU28-856
5.2 Wired remote controller
BRC1D61
Unit (mm)
NOTE) 1. REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD AND STAPLE ARE NOT ATTACHED.
THEY ARE FIELD SUPPLIED PARTS.
• SPECIFICATIONS OF CORD
• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS
FOR AUSTRALIA FOR OTHER COUNTRIES
SHIELD WIRE VINYL CORD WITH SHEATH OR CABLE
TYPE
(INSULATED THICKNESS: 1mm OR MORE) (INSULATED THICKNESS: 1mm OR MORE)
SIZE 0.75 ~ 1.25mm2
42
TOTAL
120
500m
84
LENGTH
38
120 17 18
CORD OUTLET HOLE
23 28
46
• INSTALLATION METHOD
A EXPOSED BODY, EXPOSED CORD B EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD C EXPOSED BODY, EMBEDDED CORD
17 CONDUIT
STAPLE REMOTE CONTROLLER
REMOTE CONTROLLER REMOTE CONTROLLER
117
0~5
( BETWEEN REMOTE
CONTROLLER AND
CONTROL BOX
) 17 THROUGH HOLE
(φ12 ~ φ16)
17 CONTROL BOX
3D048117
34 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Dimensions and service space
5.3 Wireless remote controller

1
BRC7F632F (for FCQ heat pump)
Unit (mm)
• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS • RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
TRANSMITTING PART RECEIVER
REFRIGERANT
PIPING SIDE
157
DRAIN PIPING
62 17.5 SIDE
• REMOTE CONTROLLER HOLDER
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE> • RECEIVER DETAIL
LIQUID CRYSTAL DECORATION PANEL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
• WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT FOR EACH DECORATION PANEL

WIRELESS REMOTE
REMOTE CONTROLLER DECORATION PANEL
CONTROLLER KIT
HOLDER BRC7F632F BRC7F634F BRC7F635F BYCP125K-W1
3D052918B
BRC7E530W (for FFQ heat pump)

BRC7E531W (for FFQ cooling only)
• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS • RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Unit (mm)
TRANSMITTING PART
DRAIN PIPING SIDE REFRIGERANT PIPING SIDE

157
RECEIVER
62 17.5

<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>
DECORATION PANEL
LIQUID CRYSTAL (BYFQ60BW1)
REMOTE CONTROLLER (BYFQ60B7W1)
• RECEIVER DETAIL
(WIRELESS) (BYFQ60B8W1)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
3D038937A
Inverter Series 35
BRC7EA63W (for FHQ heat pump)

BRC7EA66 (for FHQ cooling only)
Unit (mm)
TRANSMITTING PART
• RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
RECEIVER
157
62 17.5

< INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE > • RECEIVER DETAIL
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
3D028963B
BRC7C610W (for FAQ heat pump)

Unit (mm)
• RECEIVER INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
TRANSMITTING PART
157
RECEIVER
62 17.5
• RECEIVER DETAIL

<INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE>
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
INDOOR UNIT WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT REMOTE CONTROLLER

HOLDER
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM COOLING ONLY SYSTEM
FXYA25 · 32 · 40 · 50 · 63KVE BRC7C510W BRC7C511W

VRV System
FXYA25 · 32 · 40 · 50 · 63KJV1 BRC7CA510W BRC7CA511W
FAY71 · 100FAVE
Split System BRC7C610W BRC7C611W
FAQ100BVV1B
C : 3D010766B
36 Inverter Series
BRC4C62 (for FBQ heat pump) 1

• REMOTE CONTROLLER DIMENSIONS • RECEIVER DETAIL Unit (mm)
TRANSMITTING PART
120
157
0.5
70 18 35
Switch box
62 17.5 (Field Supplied
2 – 5 × 9 Slot parts)
< INSTALLATION TO WALL SURFACE >
P1 P2
(Ceiling Opening)
LIQUID CRYSTAL
REMOTE CONTROLLER
(WIRELESS)
83.5
106
72
• Service space for ceiling installation
(Service space)
more than 90
REMOTE CONTROLLER
HOLDER
NOTE Do not install more than 3 receivers in the vicinity of

one another. 49
With 4 or more units, there is always the possibility (Ceiling Opening)
of malfunction. 3D007898B
Inverter Series 37
5.4 Outdoor unit
RKS25EBVMA / RKS35EBVMA
RXS25EBVMA / RXS35EBVMA
Unit (mm)
3D059795A
38 Inverter Series
RKS50FBVMA / RKS60FBVMA
RXS50FBVMA / RXS60FBVMA
1
3D062061
Unit (mm)
Inverter Series 39
RXS71FBVMA
Unit (mm)
3D062060
40 Inverter Series
Unit (mm)
HOLE FOR ANCHOR

BOLT 4-M12
EDAU28-856
30
Inverter Series
320
350
43
RZQ71FV4A / RZQ100FV4A
(345 ~ 355)
61
30
41
94
140 620 140
30 900 3
4
2
1
7
7
6
6
5 5
770
55
341
339
60
223
84 55
54 95
54 95
53 95
89 19
89
80
28
19 52
142 145
13 67
71 16
8
16
8 Drain outlet outside diameter φ 26,3 portion
7 Control wiring intake φ 27 knock hole
58
6 Power supply wiring intake φ 34 knock hole
5 Refrigerant piping intake
4 Grounding terminal M5 (in switch box)
3 Service port
70 102 117
5 2 Liquid pipe connection φ 9.5 Flare
1 Gas pipe connection φ 15.9 Flare
45 376 191
ITEM PART NAME REMARK
3D046682B
41
1
42
Unit (mm)
HOLE FOR ANCHOR
BOLT 4-M12
30
320
350
43
61
(345~355)
41
30
94
140 620 140
30 900
3
2
RZQ100KV4A / RZQ125KV4A / RZQ160KV4A
7
7
6
7 6
1170
5
6 5
55
5
55
423
422
95
95
95
223
84
89
60
54
53
54
89 19 19 80 52
142 145 13 67
8 71 16
16
8 Drain outlet outside diameter φ 26, 3portion
7 Control wiring intake φ 27 knock hole
6 Power supply wiring intake φ 34 knock hole
58
4 Grounding terminal M5 (in switch box)
70 102 117
5 3 Service port
2 Liquid pipe connection φ 9.5 Flare
45 376 191 1 Gaspipe connection φ 15.9 Flare
ITEM PART NAME REMARK
3D058488A
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Unit (mm)
Hole for anchor
bolt 4-M12
30
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
320
350
36
55
(345~355)
38
30
91
140 620 140
(Pitch of foundation bolt holes)
(Pitch of foundation bolt holes)

30 900
3
RZQ100HY4A / RZQ125HY4A / RZQ160HY4A
4
2
1
7
7
6 7
1345
6
5 6
5 5
55
60
55
435
416
95
95
95
223
84
24
53
89
54
54
89 19 19 80 52
142 145 13 67
8
71 16
16
8 Drain pipe connection Outside Diameter φ26, 3 portion
7 Control wiring intake φ27 knock hole
6 Power supply wiring intake φ34 knock hole
58
71 102 117
4 Grounding terminal In switch box (M5)
5 3 Service port In the unit
2 Liquid pipe connection φ9.5 Flare
45 376 191
1 Gas pipe connection φ15.9 Flare
NO. Parts name Remarks
3D060941
43
1
5.5 Installation service space
INSTALLATION SERVICE SPACE
When there is an obstacle on the suction side (The unit of the values is mm)
No obstacle above
1 Stand-alone installation 2 Series installation

· Obstacle on the suction · Obstacle on (2 or more)
side only both sides · Obstacle on both sides
10 10
0o 00
rm or
ore mo
re re
mo
or 10 ore
50 0o o rm
rm 00
ore 1 20
0o ore
rm
rm 0o
ore 20
Obstacle above, too
1 Stand-alone installation 2 Series installation

· Obstacle on the · Obstacle on the (2 or more)
suction side, too suction side and · Obstacle on the
both sides suction side and
both sides
ore
1000 or more
re rm
1000 or more
r mo 0o
0o 50
1000 or more
50 ore
rm
0o
50
10
00
15 or
re 0o mo
o rm re
rm ore
0o ore
10 15 rm
0o 0o ore
rm 15 20 rm
0o
ore rm 0o
ore 20
When there is an obstacle

on the discharge side
No obstacle above
1 Stand-alone installation 2 Series installation (2 or more)
ore
rm re
0o mo
50 or
00
10
Obstacle above, too
1 Stand-alone installation r 2 Series instation
0o ss
50 s (2 or more) r le
0o
les 50
1000 or more
1000 or more
ore re
rm mo
0o or
50 00
10 3D046687B
44 Inverter Series
When there are obstacles on both suction 1

and discharge sides :
Pattern 1 When the obstacles on the discharge

side is higher than the unit :
(There is no height limit for obstructions
on the intake side.)
No obstacle above
H
1 Stand-alone installation
L
re
mo
or
50
ore
0o
rm L>H
50
2 Series installation (2 or more)
H
ore
rm
0o
20
L>H re
mo
0 or
00
Obstacle above, too 1
1 Stand-alone installation ss
r le
0o
The relations between H, 50
A and L are as follows :
1000 or more
L A
0 < L ≤ 1 / 2H 750
L≤H
1 / 2H < L ≤ H 1000
H < L Set the stand as : L ≤ H.
L
Close the bottom of the installation re
mo
H
frame to prevent the discharged air 0 or

15
from being bypassed. A
ss
2 Series installation (2 or less) r le
0o
50
The relations between H,
A and L are as follows:
1000 or more
L A
0 < L ≤ 1 / 2H 1000
L≤H
1 / 2H < L ≤ H 1250
Close the bottom of the installation
L
frame to prevent the discharged air re

mo
H
from being bypassed. 0 or

20
A
Only two units can be installed for
this series.
Pattern 2 When the obstacle on the discharge side

is lower than the unit :
(There is no height limit for obstructions
on the intake side.)
H
No obstacle above
L
1 Stand-alone installation re
mo
or
L≤H 50
re
mo
0 or
50
2 Series installation (2 or more)

H
The relations between H,

L
A and L are as follows :
L A
A
0 < L ≤ 1 / 2H 150 re
mo
1 / 2H < L ≤ H 200 0 0o
r
10 3D046687B
Inverter Series 45
Obstacle above, too
1 Stand-alone installation
ss
The relations between H, A and L are as follows : r le
0o
50
1000 or more
L A
0 < L ≤ 1 / 2H 50
L≤H
1 / 2H < L ≤ H 100
H
L
frame to prevent the discharged air
o re
rm
2 Series installation (2 or less) 0o
50
The relations between H, A and L are as follows :
ss
r le
1000 or more
0o
50
L A
0 < L ≤ 1 / 2H 150
L≤H
1 / 2H < L ≤ H 200
H
L
frame to prevent the discharged air
o re
o rm
Only two units can be installed for 00
10
this series.
Double-decker installation
1 Obstacle on the discharge side
Do not stack more than two unit. X
The drain piping construction size
100
of upper side outdoor unit is needed
about 100mm.
Close "X" to prevent the discharged air

re
from being bypassed. mo
or
00
( : the gap between the upper and 10
lower outdoor units.)
2 Obstacle on the suction side
Do not stack more than two unit.
X
The drain piping construction size
of upper side outdoor unit is
needed about 100mm.
100
Close "X" to prevent the discharged air

from being by passed.
( : the gap between the upper and re
mo
0 or
lower outdoor units.) 20
Multiple rows of series installation

(on the rooftop, etc.)
1 One row of stand-alone

installation 50 more
or
re
mo
or
00
10
0
10 more
or
0
50 more
or
2 Rows of series installation

(2 or more)
L
The relations between H, A

A and L are as follows:
re
mo
L A or
00
20
0 < L ≤ 1 / 2H 150
L≤H
H
0
40 more
1 / 2H < L ≤ H 200 or
00
H<L Cannot be installed 10 more
or 3D046687B
46 Inverter Series

1
INSTALLATION SERVICE SPACE
(The measure of these
STAND-ALONE INSTALLATION values is "mm".)
No obstacle above
(1) Obstacle on the suction side only (2) Obstacle on both sides and suction side, too (3) Obstacle on the discharge side only
100
or m ore
rm ore ore o re orm
1 00 o 100 or m 500
or m
ore 100
Obstacle above, too
(1) Obstacle on the suction side, too (2) Obstacle on both sides and suction side, too (3) Obstacle on the discharge side only, too
less
s less 0 or
1000 or more
1000 or more
l e s o r 5 0
1000 or more
or 500
500
150
or m
e ore
r mor 150 ore
100 o or m o rm mor
e
ore 150 500
or
When there are obstacles on both suction and discharge sides

Pattern 1 When the obstacles on the discharge side is higher than the unit
(1) No obstacle above (2) Obstacle above, too
(There is no limit for the height The relations between H, A and L are as follows.
of obstructions on the suction L A
L≤1/2H 750
side.) L≤H 1/2H<L≤H 1000
H<L Set the stand as: L≤H
(*) Close the bottom of the installation frame to
prevent the discharged air from being by passed.
ore ss
rm or le
0o
10 500
L 1000 or more
ore
rm
500o
ore
rm
H
o
250
A
Pattern 2 When the obstacle on the discharge side is lower than the unit
L≤1/2H 100
side.) L≤H 1/2H<L≤H 200
prevent the discharged air from being by passed.
ore
H 1000 or more
ss
orm
0 0 or le
100 5
ore
or m
500
L
A
ore
rm
10 00 o
3D058489A
Inverter Series 47
(*) · In side extraction, please

provide the space of piping.
SERIES INSTALLATION (2 OR MORE) (The measure of these
valuesis "mm".)
No obstacle above
(1) Obstacle on the suction side and both sides (2) Obstacle on the discharge side only
100
0o
rm
ore
200
or m re re
ore r mo
0o r mo
0o 100
30
Obstacle above, too
(1) Obstacle on the discharge side (2) Obstacle on the suction side and both sides
ss
or le
1000 or more
ss
500 or le
1000 or more
500
100
0o
rm
ore
200 ore
ore or m rm
m 0o
0 or ore 30
100
When there are obstacles on both suction and discharge sides

Pattern 1 When the obstacles on the discharge side is higher than the unit
L≤1/2H 1000
side.) L≤H 1/2H<L≤H 1250
prevent the discharged air from being bypassed.
Limit of series installation is 2 unit.
ss
e or le
or mor 500
300
1000 or more
re
0o r mo
100
L
re
H
o r mo
300
A
(There is no limit for the height
H 1000 or more
of obstructions on the suction ss

0 0 or le
side.) 5
H
L
A re A
rmore
0o r mo
15 00 o 150
The relations between H, A and L are as follows. The relations between H, A and L are as follows.
L A L A
L≤1/2H 250 L≤1/2H 250
1/2H<L≤H 300 L≤H 1/2H<L≤H 300
prevent the discharged air from being bypassed.
Limit of series installation is 2 unit.
3D058489A
48 Inverter Series
(The measure of these

1
DOUBLE-DECKER INSTALLATION
values is "mm".)
(*) · Do not stack more than two unit.
· The drain piping construction size of upper side outdoor unit is needed about 100mm.
· Close "X" to prevent the discharged air from being bypassed
( : the gap between the upper and lower outdoor units).
· In side extraction, please provide the space of piping.
(1) Obstacle on the discharge side (2) Obstacle on the suction side
X X
100
100
re ore
0or mo or m
100 300
MULTIPLE ROWS OF SERIES INSTALLATION (ON THE ROOFTOP, ETC.)
(The measure of these values is "mm".)
(1) One row of stand-alone installation (2) Rows of series installation (2 or more)
L
100
0 or A
200or more 0
00 re 300or
0 2 r mo
H
0 e
100or omore 0 60 mor
e 150or orore
mor mor
em
The relations between H, A and L are as follows.
L A
L≤1/2H 250
L≤H 1/2H<L≤H 300
H<L Can not be installed
3D058489A
Inverter Series 49
Piping diagrams EDAU28-856
6. Piping diagrams
6.1 Indoor unit
FFQ25B8V1B / FFQ35B8V1B / FFQ50B8V1B / FFQ60B8V1B
FFQ25 · 35B8V1B
FFQ50 · 60B8V1B
C : 4D039335
FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B
C : 4D037995H
50 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Piping diagrams
FBQ50BV1A / FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A 1
4D053090A
Inverter Series 51
6.2 Indoor unit + outdoor unit
FCQ71KVEA / FHQ71BVV1B + RZQ71FV4A

FAQ100BVV1B + RZQ100FV4A
3D046686B
52 Inverter Series
FCQ100KVEA / FHQ100BVV1B + RZQ100KV4A

1
FCQ140KVEA + RZQ160KV4A
3D058486
Inverter Series 53
FCQ100KVEA + RZQ100HY4A
3D060712
54 Inverter Series
6.3 Outdoor unit

1
3D047318F
Inverter Series 55
3D047316J
56 Inverter Series
RKS50FBVMA / RKS60FBVMA 1
3D051636J
Inverter Series 57
3D051637H
58 Inverter Series
RXS71FBVMA 1
3D054593A
Inverter Series 59
60
7.1
A3P A4P
INDOOR UNIT GRN R2T S1L
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD A1P SS1 H1P
A1P t˚ X2A H2P BS1
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
R3T SS2 H3P
(HUMIDITY SENSOR UNIT) X2M H4P
C1 CAPACITOR t˚ V1R+ X18A X15A
TO OUTDOOR 1 BLK X24A
Wiring diagrams
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE + X24A X1A X1A

UNIT Z1F K1R PS
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) KPR - C1 SS1 NOTE) 3 NOTE) 3 RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY 2 WHT
NORM. EMG. X1M NOTE) 2
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) YLW
3 RED F2
Indoor unit
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) CENTRAL REMOTE

X27A X30A ORG
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) HAP F1 CONTROLLER
BLU
X25A P2 P2
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) H05VV-U4G2.5 BLK P1 R1T WIRED REMOTE
RC TC YLW M P1 CONTROLLER
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) NOTE) 7 GRN/YLW ~ SS1
YLW X35A X33A
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) M1P
NOTE) 3 NOTE) 3
R3T THERMISTOR PTC IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
S1L FLOAT SWITCH X36A MSW
7. Wiring diagrams
OPERATION SYSTEM
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH X16A
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT M1S
(EMERGENCY) X20A
V1R DIODE BRIDGE (MASTER) (SLAVE)
Z1C X20A
X1M TERMINAL STRIP X2M X2M N=1 Z1C
X2M TERMINAL STRIP 1 1 N=1
BLU
BRN
RED
WHT
ORG
Z1C FERRITE CORE 2 2
CN1 R1T
WHT
ORG
BRN
BLU
RED
Z1F NOISE FILTER 3 3 A2P

MS WHT
PS POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT M1F 3~
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT MS
M1F 3~
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
100~140-CLASS
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED TO
FCQ71KVEA / FCQ100KVEA / FCQ125KVEA / FCQ140KVEA
71-CLASS
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
REMOTE CONTROLLER
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) X24A A2P
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(ON-RED) X1M A1P X2M
(TIMER-GREEN)
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X35A X33A
(FILTER SIGN-RED) CONTROL BOX
(DEFROST-ORANGE)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH NOTES)
(MAIN/SUB) 1. : TERMINAL , : CONNECTOR : FIELD WIRING
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH 2. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) MANUAL.
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 3. X24A, X33A, X35A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ARE BEING USED.
X24A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS 4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING DATA AND CATALOGS,
REMOTE CONTROLLER) ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
X33A CONNECTOR 5. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2) BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING DATA, ETC.
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) 6. SYMBOLS SHOWS AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW GRN : GREEN ORG : ORANGE BRN : BROWN
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL PNK : PINK GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
ADAPTOR) 7. SHOWS ONLY IN CASE OF PROTECTED PIPES.
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER USE H07RN-F IN CASE OF NO PROTECTION.
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
3D058379A
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
: Color of wire
: (Marked) color of wire connector.
: Color of PCB connector.
In case of simultaneous To outdoor unit

operation system (See
note 3)
Wired remote
Indoor unit Indoor unit controller
(master) (slave)
3.15 A Switchbox
To outdoor unit
Remote (See note 3)
controller
NOTES
1 In case of using a remote controller, connect it to the unit in accordance to the attached installation manual.
FFQ25B8V1B / FFQ35B8V1B / FFQ50B8V1B / FFQ60B8V1B
2 X24A is connected when the wireless remote controller kit is being used.
3 Remote controller model varies according to the combination system.
See technical data and catalogs, etc. before connecting.
4 Ground the shield of the remote controller wire to the indoor unit.
(In case of using shield wire).
LEGEND M1P Motor (drain pump) Wireless remote controller (receiver/display unit)
M1S Motor (swing flap) A3P Printed circuit board
Terminal Q1M Thermo switch (M1F embedded) A4P Printed circuit board
Connector R1T Thermistor (air) BS1 Push button (on/off)
Wire clamp R2T Thermistor (coil -1) H1P Light emitting diode (on - red)
Field wiring R3T Thermistor (coil -2) H2P Light emitting diode (timer - green)
RED Red RC Signal receiver unit H3P Light emitting diode (filter sign - red)
BLK Black S1L Float switch H4P Light emitting diode (defrost - orange)
WHT White TC Signal transmission unit SS1 ²Selector switch (main/sub)
YLW Yellow T1R Transformer (220-240V/224V) SS2 Selector switch (wireless address set)
GRN Green V1TR Phase control circuit
X1M Terminal strip Connector for optional parts
A1P Printed circuit board X2M Terminal strip X33A Connector (adaptor for wiring)
C1 Capacitor (M1F) X35A Connector (group control adaptor)
Wired remote controller X40A Connector (on/off input from outside)
F1U Fuse (F5A, 250V)
HAP Light emitting diode (service monitor green) R1T Thermistor (air) X60A, X61A Connector (interface adaptor for sky-air series)
KPR Magnetic relay (M1P) SS1 Selector switch (main/sub)
M1F Motor (indoor fan)
C : 3TW26476-1
61
Wiring diagrams
1
62
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
Wiring diagrams
F1U FUSE (F5A 250V)

HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S)
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) : CONNECTER DISCRIMINATION COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
R3T
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) R1T R2T : CONNECTER COLOUR FOR COMPONENTS.
IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS t˚ : CONNECTER COLOUR FOR PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD.
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) YLW
FHQ50BVV1B / FHQ60BVV1B
OPERATION SYSTEM t˚ t˚
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) A1P WHT
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT X2M X1M SS1
F1U X19A X18A YLW X17A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (MASTER) (SLAVE) TO OUTDOOR UNIT 1 BLK X24A P2 P2
X61A P1 P1 R1T
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL-1) 1 1 2 WHT NOTE)4 X5A WIRED REMOTE
X10A T1R X11A
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL-2) 2 2 3 RED t˚ GRY CONTROLLER
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) 3 3 X27A X60A PRP
BLU
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) H05VV-U4G2.5 X26A C1
X2M X2M KPR
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT A1P
A3P A4P
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
REMOTE SS1 H1P V1TR
YLW
X20A
WHT
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK CONTROLLER H2PBS1 RED M

SS2 ~
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK H3P X25A NOTE) 6 Q1M
X24A X2A H4P BLK
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT KAR X29A M1F
NOTE) 4 X1A X1A RC TC BLK
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT MSW
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT BLK ~
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER M1S
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X14A
X40A X33A X35A HAP S1Q
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X15A NOTE) 6
A1P C1 T1R
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER X1M X2M
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
CONTROL BOX
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) NOTES)
1. : TERMINAL
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED)
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (TIMER-GREEN) , : CONNECTOR
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (FILTER SIGN-RED)
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (DEFROST-ORANGE) 2. : FIELD WIRING
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET)
4. X24A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED.
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS 5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND
X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
X25A CONNECTOR (DRAIN PUMP) 6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP(M1P), REMOVE THE JUMPER CONNECTOR OF X15A AND EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL
X33A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP.
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X40A CONNECTOR (ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE)
X60A CONNECTOR
X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
3D037842D
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE R1T R2T
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN) H2P OPERATION SYSTEM t° t°
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE A1P
(TIMER-GREEN) X1M SS1
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT TO OUTDOOR X2M
X19A X18A P2 P2
(MASTER) (SLAVE) UNIT 1 BLK X24A P1 R1T
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE X61A P1
NOTE)4
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) (FILTER SIGN-RED) 1 1 2 WHT X10A T1R X11A X5A WIRED REMOTE
3 RED GRY CONTROLLER
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 2 2 t°
X27A X60A PRP
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) (DEFROST-ORANGE) 3 3 BLU
H05VV-U4G2.5
KPR X26A C1
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH
(MAIN/SUB) X2M X2M A1P A2P A3P
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) SS1 H1P V1TR X20A
YLW
WHT
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
FHQ71BVV1B / FHQ100BVV1B / FHQ125BVV1B
REMOTE BS1
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH H2P RED M
SS2 ~
(WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) CONTROLLER H3P X25A
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) NOTE)6 BLK Q1M
X24A X2A H4P
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS X1A X1A
M1F
NOTE)4 RC TC KAR X29A
BLK MSW
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) ~
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT BLK
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK X25A CONNECTOR (DRAIN PUMP) M1S
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT X33A CONNECTOR X14A
X40A X33A X35A HAP S1Q
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) X15A NOTE)6
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER X35A CONNECTOR
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) X40A CONNECTOR
(ON/OFF INPUT FROM OUTSIDE) NOTES)
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER
(RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT) X60A CONNECTOR 1. : TERMINAL
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR , : CONNECTOR
FOR SKY AIR SERIES)
2. : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH
THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X15A X33A X25A
5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
X61A
A1P C1 T1R CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
X40A 6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP (M1P), REMOVE THE JUMPER CONNECTOR OF X15A AND EXECUTE THE ADDITIONAL
X60A X1M X2M
WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP.
X35A X24A CONTROL BOX 7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS: RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW PRP : PURPLE GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE
3D043825B
63
Wiring diagrams
1
64
(TRANSFORMER 230V/16V)
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F) X1M SS1 WIRED REMOTE
FAQ100BVV1B
R1T R2T P1 P1
Wiring diagrams
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE P2 P2 R1T CONTROLLER

X60A X61A t˚ t˚
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) TO OUTDOOR A1P
X15A
UNIT X2M X19A X18A X5A
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) A2P X35A
1 BLK NOTE) 4
X24A X61A SS1
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY(M1P) A1P 2 WHT
X10A X2A X1A X11A X24A
X25A 3 RED NORM. EMG.
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) C1 X60A A2P
X27A
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) X2M X1M X26A BLK
H05VV-U4G2.5 GRY
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) CONTROL BOX KPR PRP
BLU
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) IN CASE OF SIMULTANEOUS V1TR X20A
OPERATION SYSTEM BLK M
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL) ~ Q1M
INDOOR UNIT INDOOR UNIT WHT
(MASTER) (SLAVE) M1F
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) X25A RED
NOTE) 8 X98A
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (EMERGENCY) 1 1 ORG
C1
V1TR PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT 2 2 RC TC KAR YLW
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK 3 3 X29A MSW
~
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK X14A M1S
S1Q
X2M X2M X35A HAP
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT X15A
TO OUTDOOR UNIT
NOTE) 8
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT REMOTE
CONTROLLER A1P A3P A4P
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
SS1 H1P
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) H2P
X24A X2A SS2 H3P BS1
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) H4P
NOTE) 4 X1A X1A
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER (RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT)
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL , : CONNECTOR RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
2. : FIELD WIRING
A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF)
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) 5. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM, CONFIRM ENGINEERING
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (TIMER-GREEN) MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS : RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE GRY : GRAY
H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (FILTER SIGN-RED) PRP : PURPLE BLU : BLUE
H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (DEFROST-ORANGE) 7. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1, SS2)
BY INSTALLATION MANUAL AND ENGINEERING MATERIALS, ETC.
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 8. X15A, X25A ARE CONNECTED WHEN THE DRAIN UP KIT IS BEING USED.
SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) CONNECT IT TO THE KIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
X15A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH)
X25A CONNECTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
X35A CONNECTOR (GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X60A CONNECTOR (INTERFACE ADAPTOR FOR SKYAIR SERIES)
X61A
3D044228A
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
EDAU28-856
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
Inverter Series
F1U FUSE (250V, 5A, B )
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(SERVICE MONITOR GREEN)
R1T R2T R3T
K1R~4R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) WIRED REMOTE
t˚ t˚ t˚ CONTROLLER
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) INDOOR UNIT A1P (OPTIONAL PARTS)
X2M X19A X18A X17A
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) F1U X1M SS1
1 BLK P2 P2
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) X61A SS1
TO OUTDOOR UNIT 2 WHT X10A T1R X11A P1 P1 R1T
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) X5A
t˚ NORM. EMG.
3 RED X60A
FBQ50BV1A / FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A
X27A
X21A NOTE) 7 NOTE) 7
R2T THERMISTOR (LIQUID) K4R FLL ORG
KPR
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) H05VV-U4G2.5 K3R FL BLU M1F WHT
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH K2R FM BLK M
~ C1
K1R FH GRY YLW
(EMERGENCY) Q1M
X35A X25A WHT FC RED
A1P C1 X2M
S1L FLOAT SWITCH X60A M
X33A ~
T1R TRANSFORMER M1P
X61A T1R
(220-240V/22V) RC TC
X1M X15A S1L
GRN/YLW
X1M TERMINAL STRIP

SS1 NOTE) 7
X2M TERMINAL STRIP
CONTROL BOX X33A X35A HAP
RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL , : CONNECTOR
2. : FIELD WIRING
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
4. REMOTE CONTROLLER MODEL VARIES ACCORDING TO THE COMBINATION SYSTEM,
CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS CONFIRM ENGINEERING MATERIALS AND CATALOGS, ETC. BEFORE CONNECTING.
X33A CONNECTOR 5. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS : RED : RED BLK : BLACK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW
GRN : GREEN GRY : GRAY BLU : BLUE ORG : ORANGE
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) 6. CONFIRM THE METHOD OF SETTING THE SELECTOR SWITCH (SS1) BY INSTALLATION
X35A CONNECTOR MANUAL AND ENGINEERING MATERIALS, ETC.
7. GROUND THE SHIELD OF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CORD TO THE INDOOR UNIT.
(GROUP CONTROL ADAPTOR)
X60A CONNECTOR
X61A (INTERFACE ADAPTOR
FOR SKYAIR SERIES)
3D052779B
65
Wiring diagrams
1
Wiring diagrams EDAU28-856
7.2 Outdoor unit
3D046707L
66 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Wiring diagrams
RKS50FBVMA / RKS60FBVMA 1
3D050981K
Inverter Series 67
RXS50FBVMA
3D056095A
68 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Wiring diagrams
RXS60FBVMA 1
3D050706H
Inverter Series 69
RXS71FBVMA
3D053931B
70 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
TO INDOOR UNIT L-RED N-WHT
POWER SUPPLY A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV)
~ N X1M L N BS1 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
Y1E
(FORCED DEF./PUMP DOWN)
240V L M
R1T R2T R3T R4T S1NPL C1 · C2 · C3 CAPACITOR
50Hz X1M 1 2 3
DS1 DIP SWITCH

RED BRN t° t° t° t°
WHT GRN/YLW BLK WHT RED F1U FUSE (T6.3A/250V)
A1P LA NA X1A HAP (A1P)
E SERVICE MONITOR (GREEN)
X20A X19A X17A X18A X64A X12A HAP (A2P) SERVICE MONITOR (GREEN)
F1U NOTES 2.
H1P (A1P) SERVICE MONITOR (RED)
K1M MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S)
Z1F K2R MAGNETIC RELAY
K1R K2R TC X6A L1R REACTOR
LB NB M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR)
M1F MOTOR (FAN)
RED WHT Z3C NOTES 2.
R5T PS POWER CIRCUIT
LC NC Y1S Y2S R1 · R2 RESISTOR
PS RC R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
t° X207A R1 X22A N=1 X28A X77A
HAP R2T THERMISTOR (COIL)
K1M R3T THERMISTOR (DISC. PIPE)
L1R K2R
ORG P1 R4T THERMISTOR (SUCTION PIPE)
X205A X3A R5T THERMISTOR (POWER MODULE)
Z2C RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
BRN P2
+
P< DS1 ON S1NPL PRESSURE SENSOR (LOW)
BS1 HAP
S1PH PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
X60A N=1 S1PH 1 2 3 4 OFF
V2R TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
H1P
V1R POWER MODULE
-
V1T - +
V2R · V3R DIODE MODULE
V3R
P3 + C3 V1T IGBT
YLW + C2 X6A CONNECTOR (OPTION)
+ C1 A1P A2P X1M TERMINAL STRIP
P4 Y1E EXPANSION VALVE
L1R
R2 A Y1S 4 WAY VALVE
-
+ BS1 Y2S SOLENOID VALVE
Z1C NOISE FILTER
V1R Z2C NOISE FILTER
X1M
U V W N X206A Z3C NOISE FILTER
X201A Z1F NOISE FILTER
A2P EL.COMPO.ASSY FRONT ARROW A (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
Z1C N=4 NOTES 1. : WIRE CLAMP 2.REFER TO THE OPTIONAL MANUAL,
Z2C N=1 : TERMINAL FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO X6A AND X77A.
: CONNECTOR 3.THE POSITIONS OF THE SELECTOR SWITCHES
: RELAY CONNECTOR (DS1) INDICATE FACTORY SETTING.
RED YLW BLU BRN MS : RELAY CONNECTOR REFER TO THE SERVICE MANUAL IN DETAIL.
U V W N M1F
3~ (FIXED TYPE) 4.COLOURS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE
MS
M1C : FIELD WIRING YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BRN: BROWN GRN: GREEN
3~
3D046442B
71
Wiring diagrams
1
72
Wiring diagrams
L-RED N-BLU
INDOOR A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
POWER SUPPLY UNIT A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
220-240V ~ 50Hz A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
X1M L N GRN X1M 1 2 3 A4P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
N Z2C N=2 BS1 ~ 4 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
GRN/YLW Z3C N=1 A2P C1 ~ 4 CAPACITOR
L H2P H4P H6P
RED BLU GRN BLK WHT RED A4P DS1 DIP SWITCH
LA F1U Z NA E E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER
E3 X803A H1P H3P H5P H7P DS1
F1U, F3U, F4U FUSE (T 6.3A/250V)
2 ON
F F6U FUSE (T 5.0A/250V)
LF RED X801A F3U BS1 BS2 BS3 BS4 OFF H1P ~ 7P (A2P) PILOT LAMP (SERVICE MONITOR-ORANGE)
Z1F X809A 12
RC TC HAP (A1P) FLASHING LAMP
X205A (SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN)
A3P LB NB NF BLU
K1R MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S)
RED BLU
K4R MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC)
LC NC F4U K10R MAGNETIC RELAY
NOTE)2 K11R MAGNETIC RELAY

X9A X5A
Z3F L1R REACTOR
M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR)
Z4F PS M1F MOTOR (FAN) (UPPER)
R1 X6A M2F MOTOR (FAN) (LOWER)
K1R
K4R
L1R K11R PS POWER SUPPLY
K10R X25A X28A
WHT LD R1 RESISTOR
+
HAP R2 RESISTOR
WHT LE S1PH R1T THERMISTOR (AIR)
X2A
V2R P< R2T THERMISTOR (M1C DISCHARGE)
–
+ Y1S E1HC
X32A R3T THERMISTOR (SUCTION)
– V1T S1NPH
+ C2 + C3 X17A R4T THERMISTOR (COIL)
+
V3R P ORG C4 R5T THERMISTOR (COIL MIDDLE)
R10T R1T R2T R3T R4T R5T R6T
R6T THERMISTOR (LIQUID)
+ C1 N GRY t° t° t° t° t° t° RC SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
t° Y1E
R10T THERMISTOR (FIN)
R2 F6U X21A M S1NPH PRESSURE SENSOR (HIGH)
–
+ X111A X11A X12A X13A S1PH HIGH PRESSURE SWITCH
V1R TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
X106A X107A V1R POWER MODULE
U V W V2R, V3R DIODE BRIDGE
A1P L1R V1T IGBT
Z1C MS MS X1M TERMINAL BLOCK
N=6 RED WHT BLU M1F 3~
M2F 3~ Y1E ELECTRIC EXPANSION VALVE
U V W Y1S SOLENOID VALVE (4 WAY VALVE)
A2P A3P
MS C4 Z1C ~ 3C NOISE FILTER (FERRITE CORE)
M1C 3~ NOTES 1. : TERMINAL 2.REFER TO THE OPTIONAL MANUAL, Z1F ~ 4F NOISE FILTER
: TERMINAL BLOCK FOR CONNECTION WIRING TO X6A. HAP
A4P
THE POSITION OF W : CONNECTOR 3.THE POSITIONS OF THE SELECTOR SWITCHES
COMPRESSOR U : RELAY CONNECTOR (DS1) INDICATE FACTORY SETTING. A1P
(FRONT)
TERMINAL (BACK) X1M
: FIELD WIRING REFER TO THE SERVICE MANUAL IN DETAIL.
THE ENTRANCE V EL,COMPO,BOX
4.COLOURS BLK: BLACK RED: RED BLU: BLUE WHT: WHITE
OF WIRE
YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE GRY: GRAY GRN: GREEN
3D056474A
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
L1-RED L2-WHT L3-BLK N-BLU
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (INV)
BS1 PUSH BUTTON SWITCH
EDAU28-856
(FORCED DEF. / PUMP DOWN)
Inverter Series
C1 · C2 · C3 CAPACITOR
DS1 DIP SWITCH
E1HC CRANKCASE HEATER
F1U (A1P) FUSE (T 6.3A 250V)
POWER SUPPLY F2U FUSE (T 6.3A 250V)
3N~ N F3U FUSE (B 5A 250V)
TO INDOOR UNIT S1PL S1PH
380-415V L3 F4U FUSE (B 10A 250V)
50Hz L2 X1M L1L2 L3 N P> P< Y1E F1U (A2P) FUSE
X1M 1 2 3 M
L1 GRN R1T R2T R3T R4T HAP (A1P) SERVICE MONITOR (GREEN)
/YLW HAP (A2P) SERVICE MONITOR (GREEN)
RED WHT BLK BLU GRN BLK WHT RED t˚ t˚ t˚ t˚ H1P (A1P) SERVICE MONITOR (RED)
A1P L1A L2A L3A NA X3A K1M (A1P) MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
E F2U X11A X12A X13A X14A X31A X32A X21A K2M (A1P) MAGNETIC CONTACTOR
NOTES 2. K1R (A1P) MAGNETIC RELAY (Y1S)
Z1F F1U K2R (A1P) MAGNETIC RELAY (Y2S)
K3R (A1P) MAGNETIC RELAY (E1HC)
K1R K2R K3R X6A K4R (A2P) MAGNETIC RELAY
Z2F
TC L1R REACTOR
M1C MOTOR (COMPRESSOR)
M1F · M2F MOTOR (FAN)
K1M K2M Y1S Y2S E1HC PS POWER SUPPLY
R1 X22A X23A R1 (A1P) RESISTOR
X4A X24A R1 · R2 (A2P)
X1A X9A X8A RC RESISTOR
RED WHT BLK Z2C N=1 R2T THERMISTOR (COIL)
F3U Z3C N=1
Z1C F4U R3T THERMISTOR (DISC. PIPE)
N=5 DS1 ON
X109A X104A HAP R4T THERMISTOR (SUCTION PIPE)
BS1
V2R L1B L2B L3B X108A 1234 OFF R5T THERMISTOR (POWER MODULE)
P1 N1 H1P SIGNAL RECEIVER CIRCUIT
PS RC
-
BLK + WHT S1PL PRESSURE SWITCH (LOW)
R1 K4R PRESSURE SWITCH (HIGH)
P2 N2 S1PH
L1R ORG P3
HAP TC SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
V3R V1R POWER MODULE
A1P A2P
-
BRN P4 + C1 + C2 + V2R · V3R DIODE MODULE
+ C3 X6A CONNECTOR (OPTION)
R2 BS1 A X1M TERMINAL STRIP
-
R5T + L1R
F1U Y1E EXPANSION VALVE
V1R Y1S 4 WAY VALVE
t˚
X1M Y2S SOLENOID VALVE
U V W X106A X107A REACTOR BOX
X111A Z1C NOISE FILTER
X102A EL. COMPO. ASSY FRONT ARROW A Z2C NOISE FILTER
A2P
Z4C N=5 Z3C NOISE FILTER
NOTES 1. : TERMINAL 2. REFER TO THE OPTIONAL Z4C NOISE FILTER
Z5C N=6 X506A X507A : TERMINAL MANUAL, FOR CONNECTION Z5C NOISE FILTER
: CONNECTOR WIRING TO X6A. Z1F NOISE FILTER
RED WHT BLK (WITH SURGE ABSORBER)
U V W X516A X517A : RELAY CONNECTOR 3. THE POSITIONS OF THE
MS : RELAY CONNECTOR SELECTOR SWITCHES (DS1) Z2F NOISE FILTER
M1C MS 3~ M1F MS M2F 3~
3~ (FIXED TYPE) INDICATE FACTORY
: FIELD WIRING SETTING. REFER TO THE
SERVICE MANUAL IN DETAIL.
4. COLORS BLK : BLACK
RED : RED BLU : BLUE
WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW
ORG : ORANGE
BRN : BROWN GRN : GREEN
3D047451C
73
Wiring diagrams
1
7.3 Field wiring
Notes 1) Line voltage wiring

Control circuit wiring
2) All wiring, components and materials to be procured on the site
must comply with the applicable local and national codes.
3) Use copper conductor only.
4) As for details, see wiring diagrams.
5) Install fuse and mainswitch for safety.
6) All field wiring and components must be provided by a licensed
electrician.
7) Unit shall be grounded in compliance with the applicable local
and national codes.
8) Wiring shown are general points-of-connection guides only and
are not intended for or to include all details for a specific
installation.
9) Never share a common power source with other equipment.
V4, MODEL Y4, MODEL

POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY
1 ~ 50Hz 3N ~ 50Hz
240V 415V
L N L1 L2 L3 N
MAIN SWITCH MAIN SWITCH
FUSE FUSE
H05VV-U3G H05VV-U5G
H05VV-U4G
C : 4D010992B
74 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Electric characteristics
8. Electric characteristics
1
8.1 RKS25EB / 35EB / 50FB / 60FBVMA
RXS25EB / 35EB / 50FB / 60FB / 71FBVMA
REPRESENTATIVE UNIT POWER SUPPLY COMP OFM IFM
COMBINATION
VOLTAGE
INDOOR UNIT OUTDOOR UNIT Hz-Volts MCA MFA RHz RLA W FLA W FLA
RANGE
3.7
50 - 220
FFQ25B8V1B RKS25EBVMA 50 - 230 MAX.50Hz 264V 9.75 10 55 3.5 23 0.16 55 0.6
RXS25EBVMA MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 240
3.4
4.8
50 - 220
FFQ35B8V1B RKS35EBVMA 50 - 230 MAX.50Hz 264V 9.75 10 79 4.6 23 0.16 55 0.6
RXS35EBVMA MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 240
4.4
7.1
50 - 220
FFQ50B8V1B RKS50FBVMA 50 - 230 MAX.50Hz 264V 19.75 20 71 6.8 53 0.32 55 0.7
RXS50FBVMA MIN.50Hz 198V
50 - 240
6.5
7.6
50 - 220
RKS50FBVMA MAX.50Hz 264V
FHQ50BVV1B RXS50FBVMA 50 - 230 MIN.50Hz 198V 19.75 20 76 7.2 53 0.32 62 0.6
50 - 240
6.9
8.9
50 - 220
MAX.50Hz 264V
FBQ50BV1A RXS50FBVMA 50 - 230 MIN.50Hz 198V 19.75 20 77 8.4 53 0.19 85 0.70
50 - 240
8.1
9.2
50 - 220
FFQ60B8V1B RXS60FBVMA 50 - 230 MIN.50Hz 198V 19.75 20 83 8.8 53 0.39 55 0.7
50 - 240
8.4
8.8
50 - 220
FHQ60BVV1B RXS60FBVMA 50 - 230 MIN.50Hz 198V 19.75 20 87 8.4 53 0.39 62 0.60
50 - 240
8.1
10.0
50 - 220
MAX.50Hz 264V
50 - 240
9.2
11.6
50 - 220
MAX.50Hz 264V
50 - 240
10.6
SYMBOLS: NOTE:
MCA : MIN. CIRCUIT AMPS (A) 1. RLA is based on the following conditions.
MFA : MAX. FUSE AMPS (A) Indoor temp. 27ºCDB/19ºCWB
RLA : RATED LOAD AMPS (A) Outdoor temp. 35ºCDB.
OFM : OUTDOOR FAN MOTOR 2. Maximum allowable voltage variation between phases is 2%.
IFM : INDOOR FAN MOTOR 3. Select wire size based on the larger value of MCA.
FLA : FULL LOAD AMPS (A) 4. Instead of fuse, use circuit breaker.
W : FAN MOTOR RATED OUTPUT (W)
RHz : RATED OPERATING FREQUENCY (Hz)
3D054913D
3D055934C
C : 3D054945B
C : 3D054944A
C : 3D055935A
C : 3D054946A
C : 3D054947
Inverter Series 75
Electric characteristics EDAU28-856
8.2 RZQ71FV4A / RZQ100FV4A
C : 4D054630C
76 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Electric characteristics
8.3 RZQ100KV4A / RZQ125KV4A / RZQ160KV4A

1
C : 4D058471
Inverter Series 77
Electric characteristics EDAU28-856
8.4 RZQ100HY4A / RZQ125HY4A / RZQ160HY4A
4D061563
78 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Capacity tables
9. Capacity tables
1
9.1 Capacity tables
FFQ25B8V1B + RKS25EBVMA
AFR 9
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.24
INDOOR OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (ºCDB)

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
ºC ºC TC SHC PI TC SHC PI TC SHC PI TC SHC PI TC SHC PI TC SHC PI
14.0 20 2.56 1.95 0.56 2.44 1.89 0.61 2.33 1.84 0.67 2.28 1.81 0.69 2.21 1.78 0.72 2.10 1.72 0.78
16.0 22 2.68 1.92 0.56 2.56 1.86 0.62 2.44 1.81 0.67 2.40 1.79 0.69 2.33 1.76 0.73 2.21 1.71 0.78
18.0 25 2.79 2.01 0.57 2.68 1.96 0.62 2.56 1.92 0.67 2.51 1.90 0.70 2.44 1.87 0.73 2.33 1.82 0.78
19.0 27 2.85 2.13 0.57 2.73 2.08 0.62 2.62 2.04 0.68 2.57 2.02 0.70 2.50 1.99 0.73 2.38 1.94 0.78
22.0 30 3.02 2.06 0.57 2.91 2.02 0.63 2.79 1.97 0.68 2.74 1.96 0.70 2.67 1.93 0.73 2.56 1.89 0.79
24.0 32 3.14 2.01 0.58 3.02 1.97 0.63 2.90 1.93 0.68 2.86 1.91 0.71 2.79 1.89 0.74 2.67 1.85 0.79
Symbols NOTES:
AFR : Air flow rate (m³/min.) 1. Capacities are based on the following conditions.
BF : Bypass factor (1) Corresponding refrigerant piping length : 7.5m
EWB : Entering wet bulb temp. (ºC) (2) Level difference : 0m
EDB : Entering dry bulb temp. (ºC) 2. shows nominal (rated) capacities and power input.
TC : Total capacity (kW)
SHC : Sensible heat capacity (kW)
PI : Power input (kW)
C : 3D055938A
FFQ25B8V1B + RXS25EBVMA
AFR 9
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.24

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 2.56 1.95 0.56 2.44 1.89 0.61 2.33 1.84 0.67 2.28 1.81 0.69 2.21 1.78 0.72 2.10 1.72 0.78
16.0 22 2.68 1.92 0.56 2.56 1.86 0.62 2.44 1.81 0.67 2.40 1.79 0.69 2.33 1.76 0.73 2.21 1.71 0.78
18.0 25 2.79 2.01 0.57 2.68 1.96 0.62 2.56 1.92 0.67 2.51 1.90 0.70 2.44 1.87 0.73 2.33 1.82 0.78
19.0 27 2.85 2.13 0.57 2.73 2.08 0.62 2.62 2.04 0.68 2.57 2.02 0.70 2.50 1.99 0.73 2.38 1.94 0.78
22.0 30 3.02 2.06 0.57 2.91 2.02 0.63 2.79 1.97 0.68 2.74 1.96 0.70 2.67 1.93 0.73 2.56 1.89 0.79
24.0 32 3.14 2.01 0.58 3.02 1.97 0.63 2.90 1.93 0.68 2.86 1.91 0.71 2.79 1.89 0.74 2.67 1.85 0.79
HEATING 50Hz 220 - 240V AFR 9
INDOOR OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE (ºCWB)

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
ºC TC PI TC PI TC PI TC PI TC PI
15.0 2.15 0.78 2.52 0.82 2.88 0.85 3.31 0.90 3.60 0.93
20.0 2.04 0.80 2.41 0.84 2.77 0.87 3.20 0.92 3.49 0.95
22.0 2.00 0.81 2.36 0.84 2.72 0.88 3.16 0.93 3.44 0.96
24.0 1.96 0.82 2.32 0.85 2.68 0.89 3.11 0.94 3.40 0.97
25.0 1.93 0.82 2.29 0.86 2.66 0.90 3.09 0.94 3.38 0.97
27.0 1.89 0.83 2.25 0.87 2.61 0.90 3.05 0.95 3.33 0.98
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055936
Inverter Series 79
Capacity tables EDAU28-856
FFQ35B8V1B + RKS35EBVMA
AFR 10
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.25

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 3.48 2.48 0.84 3.33 2.40 0.93 3.17 2.32 1.01 3.10 2.29 1.04 3.01 2.24 1.09 2.85 2.16 1.17
16.0 22 3.64 2.44 0.85 3.48 2.36 0.93 3.32 2.28 1.01 3.26 2.25 1.04 3.17 2.21 1.09 3.01 2.13 1.17
18.0 25 3.80 2.54 0.85 3.64 2.46 0.93 3.48 2.39 1.02 3.42 2.36 1.05 3.32 2.32 1.10 3.16 2.25 1.18
19.0 27 3.87 2.66 0.86 3.72 2.59 0.94 3.56 2.52 1.02 3.49 2.49 1.05 3.40 2.45 1.10 3.24 2.39 1.18
22.0 30 4.11 2.56 0.86 3.95 2.50 0.94 3.79 2.44 1.03 3.73 2.41 1.06 3.63 2.38 1.11 3.48 2.32 1.19
24.0 32 4.27 2.49 0.87 4.11 2.43 0.95 3.95 2.37 1.03 3.89 2.35 1.06 3.79 2.32 1.11 3.63 2.26 1.19
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055939A
FFQ35B8V1B + RXS35EBVMA
AFR 10
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.25

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 3.48 2.48 0.84 3.33 2.40 0.93 3.17 2.32 1.01 3.10 2.29 1.04 3.01 2.24 1.09 2.85 2.16 1.17
16.0 22 3.64 2.44 0.85 3.48 2.36 0.93 3.32 2.28 1.01 3.26 2.25 1.04 3.17 2.21 1.09 3.01 2.13 1.17
18.0 25 3.80 2.54 0.85 3.64 2.46 0.93 3.48 2.39 1.02 3.42 2.36 1.05 3.32 2.32 1.10 3.16 2.25 1.18
19.0 27 3.87 2.66 0.86 3.72 2.59 0.94 3.56 2.52 1.02 3.49 2.49 1.05 3.40 2.45 1.10 3.24 2.39 1.18
22.0 30 4.11 2.56 0.86 3.95 2.50 0.94 3.79 2.44 1.03 3.73 2.41 1.06 3.63 2.38 1.11 3.48 2.32 1.19
24.0 32 4.27 2.49 0.87 4.11 2.43 0.95 3.95 2.37 1.03 3.89 2.35 1.06 3.79 2.32 1.11 3.63 2.26 1.19

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 2.69 1.01 3.14 1.06 3.60 1.11 4.14 1.17 4.50 1.21
20.0 2.55 1.04 3.01 1.09 3.46 1.14 4.00 1.20 4.36 1.24
22.0 2.50 1.05 2.95 1.10 3.40 1.15 3.94 1.21 4.31 1.25
24.0 2.44 1.06 2.90 1.11 3.35 1.16 3.89 1.22 4.25 1.26
25.0 2.42 1.07 2.87 1.12 3.32 1.17 3.86 1.23 4.22 1.27
27.0 2.36 1.08 2.81 1.13 3.26 1.18 3.81 1.24 4.17 1.28
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055937
80 Inverter Series
FFQ50B8V1B + RKS50FBVMA 1
AFR 12
COOLING 50Hz 230V BF 0.16

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 4.82 3.41 1.24 4.60 3.29 1.36 4.38 3.18 1.48 4.29 3.13 1.53 4.16 3.07 1.60 3.94 2.96 1.72
16.0 22 5.03 3.35 1.25 4.81 3.24 1.37 4.59 3.13 1.49 4.51 3.09 1.54 4.38 3.03 1.61 4.16 2.92 1.73
18.0 25 5.25 3.48 1.26 5.03 3.38 1.38 4.81 3.28 1.50 4.72 3.24 1.54 4.59 3.18 1.62 4.37 3.08 1.74
19.0 27 5.36 3.64 1.26 5.14 3.54 1.38 4.92 3.45 1.50 4.83 3.41 1.55 4.70 3.35 1.62 4.48 3.26 1.74
22.0 30 5.68 3.50 1.27 5.46 3.42 1.39 5.24 3.33 1.51 5.16 3.30 1.56 5.02 3.25 1.63 4.81 3.16 1.75
24.0 32 5.90 3.40 1.28 5.68 3.32 1.40 5.46 3.24 1.52 5.37 3.21 1.57 5.24 3.17 1.64 5.02 3.09 1.76
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055942A
FFQ50B8V1B + RXS50FBVMA
AFR 12

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 4.82 3.41 1.24 4.60 3.29 1.36 4.38 3.18 1.48 4.29 3.13 1.53 4.16 3.07 1.60 3.94 2.96 1.72
16.0 22 5.03 3.35 1.25 4.81 3.24 1.37 4.59 3.13 1.49 4.51 3.09 1.54 4.38 3.03 1.61 4.16 2.92 1.73
18.0 25 5.25 3.48 1.26 5.03 3.38 1.38 4.81 3.28 1.50 4.72 3.24 1.54 4.59 3.18 1.62 4.37 3.08 1.74
19.0 27 5.36 3.64 1.26 5.14 3.54 1.38 4.92 3.45 1.50 4.83 3.41 1.55 4.70 3.35 1.62 4.48 3.26 1.74
22.0 30 5.68 3.50 1.27 5.46 3.42 1.39 5.24 3.33 1.51 5.16 3.30 1.56 5.02 3.25 1.63 4.81 3.16 1.75
24.0 32 5.90 3.40 1.28 5.68 3.32 1.40 5.46 3.24 1.52 5.37 3.21 1.57 5.24 3.17 1.64 5.02 3.09 1.76
HEATING 50Hz 230V AFR 12

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 3.70 1.59 4.32 1.67 4.94 1.74 5.69 1.84 6.19 1.90
20.0 3.51 1.63 4.13 1.71 4.75 1.79 5.50 1.88 6.00 1.94
22.0 3.44 1.65 4.06 1.73 4.68 1.80 5.42 1.90 5.92 1.96
24.0 3.36 1.67 3.98 1.74 4.60 1.82 5.35 1.91 5.84 1.98
25.0 3.32 1.67 3.94 1.75 4.56 1.83 5.31 1.92 5.81 1.98
27.0 3.25 1.69 3.87 1.77 4.49 1.85 5.23 1.94 5.73 2.00
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055940A
Inverter Series 81
FFQ60B8V1B + RKS60FBVMA
AFR 15

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.94 4.28 1.58 5.67 4.14 1.74 5.40 4.01 1.89 5.29 3.95 1.95 5.13 3.87 2.04 4.86 3.74 2.19
16.0 22 6.21 4.21 1.59 5.94 4.08 1.75 5.67 3.95 1.90 5.56 3.90 1.96 5.40 3.82 2.05 5.13 3.70 2.20
18.0 25 6.48 4.39 1.60 6.21 4.27 1.76 5.94 4.14 1.91 5.83 4.10 1.97 5.67 4.03 2.06 5.40 3.91 2.21
19.0 27 6.61 4.61 1.61 6.34 4.49 1.76 6.07 4.37 1.91 5.96 4.33 1.97 5.80 4.26 2.07 5.53 4.15 2.22
22.0 30 7.01 4.44 1.62 6.74 4.33 1.77 6.47 4.23 1.93 6.36 4.19 1.99 6.20 4.13 2.08 5.93 4.03 2.23
24.0 32 7.28 4.31 1.63 7.01 4.22 1.78 6.74 4.12 1.94 6.63 4.09 2.00 6.47 4.03 2.09 6.20 3.94 2.24
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055943A
FFQ60B8V1B + RXS60FBVMA
AFR 15

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.94 4.28 1.58 5.67 4.14 1.74 5.40 4.01 1.89 5.29 3.95 1.95 5.13 3.87 2.04 4.86 3.74 2.19
16.0 22 6.21 4.21 1.59 5.94 4.08 1.75 5.67 3.95 1.90 5.56 3.90 1.96 5.40 3.82 2.05 5.13 3.70 2.20
18.0 25 6.48 4.39 1.60 6.21 4.27 1.76 5.94 4.14 1.91 5.83 4.10 1.97 5.67 4.03 2.06 5.40 3.91 2.21
19.0 27 6.61 4.61 1.61 6.34 4.49 1.76 6.07 4.37 1.91 5.96 4.33 1.97 5.80 4.26 2.07 5.53 4.15 2.22
22.0 30 7.01 4.44 1.62 6.74 4.33 1.77 6.47 4.23 1.93 6.36 4.19 1.99 6.20 4.13 2.08 5.93 4.03 2.23
24.0 32 7.28 4.31 1.63 7.01 4.22 1.78 6.74 4.12 1.94 6.63 4.09 2.00 6.47 4.03 2.09 6.20 3.94 2.24

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 4.71 2.11 5.50 2.21 6.29 2.31 7.24 2.43 7.87 2.52
20.0 4.47 2.16 5.26 2.26 6.05 2.37 7.00 2.49 7.60 2.57
22.0 4.37 2.18 5.16 2.29 5.95 2.39 6.90 2.51 7.17 2.59
24.0 4.28 2.21 5.07 2.31 5.86 2.41 6.75 2.53 6.75 2.62
25.0 4.23 2.22 5.02 2.32 5.81 2.42 6.54 2.55 6.54 2.63
27.0 4.13 2.24 4.92 2.34 5.71 2.45 6.12 2.57 6.12 2.65
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055941A
82 Inverter Series
FHQ50BVV1B + RKS50FBVMA 1
AFR 13

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.12 3.71 1.32 4.89 3.59 1.45 4.66 3.47 1.57 4.56 3.43 1.62 4.42 3.36 1.70 4.19 3.24 1.83
16.0 22 5.35 3.64 1.33 5.12 3.53 1.45 4.89 3.42 1.58 4.79 3.38 1.63 4.65 3.31 1.71 4.42 3.20 1.84
18.0 25 5.58 3.80 1.33 5.35 3.70 1.46 5.12 3.59 1.59 5.02 3.55 1.64 4.88 3.49 1.72 4.65 3.39 1.84
19.0 27 5.70 4.00 1.34 5.47 3.90 1.47 5.23 3.80 1.59 5.14 3.76 1.64 5.00 3.70 1.72 4.77 3.60 1.85
22.0 30 6.04 3.85 1.35 5.81 3.76 1.48 5.58 3.67 1.60 5.49 3.64 1.66 5.35 3.58 1.73 5.11 3.50 1.86
24.0 32 6.27 3.74 1.36 6.04 3.66 1.48 5.81 3.58 1.61 5.72 3.55 1.66 5.58 3.50 1.74 5.34 3.42 1.87
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055285A
FHQ50BVV1B + RXS50FBVMA
AFR 13

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.12 3.71 1.32 4.89 3.59 1.45 4.66 3.47 1.57 4.56 3.43 1.62 4.42 3.36 1.70 4.19 3.24 1.83
16.0 22 5.35 3.64 1.33 5.12 3.53 1.45 4.89 3.42 1.58 4.79 3.38 1.63 4.65 3.31 1.71 4.42 3.20 1.84
18.0 25 5.58 3.80 1.33 5.35 3.70 1.46 5.12 3.59 1.59 5.02 3.55 1.64 4.88 3.49 1.72 4.65 3.39 1.84
19.0 27 5.70 4.00 1.34 5.47 3.90 1.47 5.23 3.80 1.59 5.14 3.76 1.64 5.00 3.70 1.72 4.77 3.60 1.85
22.0 30 6.04 3.85 1.35 5.81 3.76 1.48 5.58 3.67 1.60 5.49 3.64 1.66 5.35 3.58 1.73 5.11 3.50 1.86
24.0 32 6.27 3.74 1.36 6.04 3.66 1.48 5.81 3.58 1.61 5.72 3.55 1.66 5.58 3.50 1.74 5.34 3.42 1.87

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 4.04 1.73 4.72 1.81 5.39 1.89 6.21 1.99 6.75 2.06
20.0 3.83 1.77 4.51 1.86 5.19 1.94 6.00 2.04 6.54 2.11
22.0 3.75 1.79 4.43 1.87 5.10 1.96 5.92 2.06 6.46 2.13
24.0 3.67 1.81 4.34 1.89 5.02 1.98 5.83 2.08 6.38 2.14
25.0 3.62 1.82 4.30 1.90 4.98 1.99 5.79 2.09 6.33 2.15
27.0 3.54 1.84 4.22 1.92 4.90 2.00 5.71 2.10 6.21 2.17
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055282A
Inverter Series 83
FHQ60BVV1B + RKS60FBVMA
AFR 17

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.84 4.25 1.53 5.57 4.12 1.68 5.31 3.98 1.83 5.20 3.93 1.89 5.04 3.85 1.98 4.78 3.72 2.13
16.0 22 6.10 4.18 1.54 5.84 4.05 1.69 5.57 3.93 1.84 5.47 3.88 1.90 5.31 3.80 1.99 5.04 3.68 2.13
18.0 25 6.36 4.36 1.55 6.10 4.25 1.70 5.83 4.13 1.85 5.73 4.08 1.91 5.57 4.01 2.00 5.30 3.90 2.14
19.0 27 6.50 4.59 1.56 6.23 4.48 1.70 5.97 4.36 1.85 5.86 4.32 1.91 5.70 4.25 2.00 5.43 4.14 2.15
22.0 30 6.89 4.42 1.57 6.62 4.32 1.72 6.36 4.22 1.87 6.25 4.18 1.92 6.09 4.12 2.01 5.83 4.03 2.16
24.0 32 7.15 4.30 1.58 6.89 4.21 1.73 6.62 4.12 1.87 6.52 4.08 1.93 6.36 4.03 2.02 6.09 3.94 2.17
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055286A
FHQ60BVV1B + RXS60FBVMA
AFR 17

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.84 4.25 1.53 5.57 4.12 1.68 5.31 3.98 1.83 5.20 3.93 1.89 5.04 3.85 1.98 4.78 3.72 2.13
16.0 22 6.10 4.18 1.54 5.84 4.05 1.69 5.57 3.93 1.84 5.47 3.88 1.90 5.31 3.80 1.99 5.04 3.68 2.13
18.0 25 6.36 4.36 1.55 6.10 4.25 1.70 5.83 4.13 1.85 5.73 4.08 1.91 5.57 4.01 2.00 5.30 3.90 2.14
19.0 27 6.50 4.59 1.56 6.23 4.48 1.70 5.97 4.36 1.85 5.86 4.32 1.91 5.70 4.25 2.00 5.43 4.14 2.15
22.0 30 6.89 4.42 1.57 6.62 4.32 1.72 6.36 4.22 1.87 6.25 4.18 1.92 6.09 4.12 2.01 5.83 4.03 2.16
24.0 32 7.15 4.30 1.58 6.89 4.21 1.73 6.62 4.12 1.87 6.52 4.08 1.93 6.36 4.03 2.02 6.09 3.94 2.17

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 4.85 2.11 5.66 2.21 6.47 2.31 7.45 2.43 8.10 2.52
20.0 4.60 2.16 5.41 2.26 6.22 2.37 7.20 2.49 7.29 2.57
22.0 4.50 2.18 5.31 2.29 6.12 2.39 6.89 2.51 6.89 2.59
24.0 4.40 2.21 5.21 2.31 6.03 2.41 6.48 2.53 6.48 2.62
25.0 4.35 2.22 5.16 2.32 5.98 2.42 6.28 2.55 6.28 2.63
27.0 4.25 2.24 5.06 2.34 5.87 2.45 5.87 2.57 5.87 2.65
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055283A
84 Inverter Series
FBQ50BV1A + RXS50FBVMA 1
AFR 13
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.15

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.12 3.65 1.52 4.89 3.53 1.67 4.66 3.41 1.81 4.56 3.36 1.87 4.42 3.29 1.96 4.19 3.18 2.10
16.0 22 5.35 3.59 1.53 5.12 3.47 1.67 4.89 3.36 1.82 4.79 3.32 1.88 4.65 3.25 1.97 4.42 3.14 2.11
18.0 25 5.58 3.73 1.54 5.35 3.63 1.68 5.12 3.52 1.83 5.02 3.48 1.89 4.88 3.42 1.98 4.65 3.32 2.12
19.0 27 5.70 3.91 1.54 5.47 3.81 1.69 5.23 3.71 1.83 5.14 3.67 1.89 5.00 3.61 1.98 4.77 3.51 2.13
22.0 30 6.04 3.77 1.55 5.81 3.67 1.70 5.58 3.59 1.85 5.49 3.55 1.91 5.35 3.50 1.99 5.11 3.41 2.14
24.0 32 6.27 3.66 1.56 6.04 3.58 1.71 5.81 3.49 1.86 5.72 3.46 1.91 5.58 3.41 2.00 5.34 3.33 2.15

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 4.04 1.63 4.72 1.71 5.39 1.79 6.21 1.89 6.75 1.95
20.0 3.83 1.68 4.51 1.76 5.19 1.83 6.00 1.93 6.54 1.99
22.0 3.75 1.69 4.43 1.77 5.10 1.85 5.92 1.95 6.46 2.01
24.0 3.67 1.71 4.34 1.79 5.02 1.87 5.83 1.96 6.38 2.03
25.0 3.62 1.72 4.30 1.80 4.98 1.88 5.79 1.97 6.33 2.04
27.0 3.54 1.74 4.22 1.82 4.90 1.90 5.71 1.99 6.25 2.05
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055273
FBQ60BV1A + RXS60FBVMA
AFR 18
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.15

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 5.84 4.42 1.71 5.57 4.28 1.88 5.31 4.16 2.04 5.20 4.10 2.11 5.04 4.03 2.21 4.78 3.90 2.37
16.0 22 6.10 4.34 1.72 5.84 4.22 1.89 5.57 4.09 2.05 5.47 4.05 2.12 5.31 3.97 2.22 5.04 3.86 2.38
18.0 25 6.36 4.56 1.73 6.10 4.44 1.90 5.83 4.33 2.06 5.73 4.29 2.13 5.57 4.22 2.23 5.30 4.11 2.39
19.0 27 6.50 4.82 1.74 6.23 4.71 1.90 5.97 4.60 2.07 5.86 4.56 2.13 5.70 4.49 2.23 5.43 4.39 2.39
22.0 30 6.89 4.65 1.75 6.62 4.55 1.92 6.36 4.46 2.08 6.25 4.42 2.15 6.09 4.36 2.24 5.83 4.27 2.41
24.0 32 7.15 4.53 1.76 6.89 4.44 1.92 6.62 4.36 2.09 6.52 4.32 2.16 6.36 4.27 2.25 6.09 4.18 2.42

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 4.71 1.91 5.50 2.00 6.29 2.10 7.24 2.21 7.87 2.28
20.0 4.47 1.96 5.26 2.06 6.05 2.15 7.00 2.26 7.63 2.33
22.0 4.37 1.98 5.16 2.08 5.95 2.17 6.90 2.28 7.54 2.35
24.0 4.28 2.00 5.07 2.10 5.86 2.19 6.81 2.30 7.44 2.38
25.0 4.23 2.01 5.02 2.11 5.81 2.20 6.76 2.31 7.39 2.39
27.0 4.13 2.03 4.92 2.13 5.71 2.22 6.66 2.33 7.09 2.41
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055274
Inverter Series 85
FBQ71BV1A + RXS71FBVMA
AFR 18
COOLING 50Hz 220 - 240V BF 0.11

EWB EDB 20 25 30 32 35 40
14.0 20 6.86 5.00 1.97 6.55 4.84 2.16 6.24 4.69 2.35 6.12 4.62 2.43 5.93 4.53 2.54 5.62 4.38 2.73
16.0 22 7.17 4.91 1.98 6.86 4.77 2.17 6.55 4.62 2.36 6.42 4.56 2.44 6.24 4.47 2.55 5.93 4.33 2.74
18.0 25 7.48 5.13 1.99 7.17 4.99 2.18 6.86 4.86 2.37 6.73 4.80 2.45 6.55 4.72 2.56 6.23 4.59 2.75
19.0 27 7.64 5.40 2.00 7.32 5.27 2.19 7.01 5.13 2.38 6.89 5.08 2.46 6.70 5.00 2.57 6.39 4.87 2.76
22.0 30 8.10 5.20 2.02 7.79 5.08 2.21 7.47 4.97 2.40 7.35 4.92 2.47 7.16 4.85 2.59 6.85 4.74 2.78
24.0 32 8.41 5.06 2.03 8.10 4.95 2.22 7.78 4.85 2.41 7.66 4.80 2.48 7.47 4.74 2.60 7.16 4.64 2.79

EDB -10 -5 0 6 10
15.0 5.52 2.26 6.45 2.37 7.37 2.48 8.48 2.61 9.22 2.70
20.0 5.24 2.32 6.16 2.43 7.09 2.54 8.20 2.67 8.80 2.75
22.0 5.12 2.34 6.05 2.45 6.98 2.56 8.09 2.69 8.31 2.75
24.0 5.01 2.37 5.94 2.48 6.86 2.59 7.82 2.71 7.82 2.76
25.0 4.95 2.38 5.88 2.49 6.81 2.60 7.57 2.71 7.57 2.76
27.0 4.84 2.40 5.77 2.51 6.69 2.62 7.09 2.71 7.09 2.76
Symbols NOTES:
C : 3D055275
86 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
Cooling Heating
1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2
1.16 1.17
1.0 1.0
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
0.31 0.32
Coefficient of power input (-)

FCQ71KVEA / FHQ71BVV1B + RZQ71FV4A
0.2 0.2
0.0 0.0
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8. 0 9.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
9.0
3.2 3.5
Capacity range Capacity range Rated point
Rated point
Cooling Capacity (kW) Heating Capacity (kW)
Cooling Heating
INDOOR Outdoor temperature (°C DB) INDOOR Outdoor temperature (°C WB)
25 30 35 40 -15 -10 -5 0 6 10
EWB EDB EDB
(°C) (°C) TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI
(°C)
(kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-)
16.0 22 6.47 4.39 0.76 6.46 4.43 0.89 6.66 4.62 0.99 6.39 4.49 1.09 16.0 5.14 1.06 5.68 1.12 6.22 1.17 6.75 1.23 8.02 0.92 8.64 0.97
18.0 25 7.43 4.82 0.83 7.20 4.72 0.91 6.95 4.61 1.00 6.67 4.47 1.10 18.0 5.14 1.10 5.67 1.16 6.21 1.22 6.74 1.28 8.01 0.96 8.62 1.01
19.0 27 7.58 4.80 0.84 7.35 4.71 0.91 7.10 4.60 1.00 6.82 4.46 1.10 20.0 5.13 1.15 5.67 1.21 6.20 1.27 6.74 1.33 8.00 1.00 8.61 1.05
19.5 27 7.66 4.79 0.84 7.43 4.70 0.91 7.17 4.59 1.00 6.89 4.46 1.10 21.0 5.13 1.17 5.66 1.23 6.20 1.29 6.73 1.35 8.00 1.02 8.61 1.07
22.0 30 8.05 4.73 0.85 7.81 4.64 0.92 7.55 4.54 1.01 7.26 4.41 1.11 22.0 5.12 1.19 5.66 1.25 6.19 1.32 6.73 1.38 7.99 1.04 8.60 1.09
24.0 32 8.37 4.66 0.85 8.12 4.58 0.93 7.85 4.48 1.02 7.55 4.35 1.12 24.0 5.12 1.23 5.65 1.30 6.19 1.36 6.72 1.43 7.98 1.08 8.59 1.13
Notes:
1. Ratings shown are net capacities which include a deduction for indoor fan motor heat.
9. Air flow rate and (BF) are tabulated below. Symbols:
2. On the figure the mark with show the max. Onces at standard conditoins.
(Pair) AFR : Air flow rate (m³ / min)
On the figure the mark with show rated capacity and rated coefficient of power input.
However the max. Capacity is not guaranteed except at standard condition. FCQ71D FCQ71K FHQ71 FAQ71 BF : By pass factor
3. On the tables show rated capacity and rated coefficient of power input. EWB: Entering wet bulb temp. (°C WB)
AFR 19 21 17 19
4. SHC* is based on each EWB and EDB. (BF) (0.10) (0.10) (0.10) (0.08) EDB : Entering dry bulb temp. (°C DB)
SHC =SHC correction for other dry bulb. TC : Total cooling (heating)
=0.02xAFR (m³ / min.)×(1-BF)×(DB*-EDB) capacity (kW)
Add SHC to SHC*. 10.Rated power input of each model is tabulated below.
5. Capacities are based on the following conditions. (Pair)
Outdoor air: 85% RH. However, the condition FCQ71D FCQ71K FHQ71 FAQ71
(Comp.+indoor+outdoor fan motor).
rated capacity is 7°C DB / 6°C WB. (heating) Cooling 2.05 2.05 2.58 2.52 CPI : Coefficient of power input. (-)
Corresponding refrigerant piping length : 7.5m
Heating 2.10 2.10 2.84 2.60
Level difference : 0m
6. Coefficient of power input is the percentage when the rated value is defined as 1.00.
7. The value contains less than 5% error acording to indoor unit type. Caution :
8. Heating capacity include the drop of frost formation. TC and SHC are shown by kW.
3D054628A
Capacity tables
87
1
88
Cooling Heating
1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2
Capacity tables
1.17
1.0 1.0
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
FAQ100BVV1B + RZQ100FV4A
0.38 0.32

0.2 0.2
0.0 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 9.7 10.0 12.0 14.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
4.9 Capacity range 5.5 Capacity range 12.6
11.0 Rated point 11.0
Cooling Capacity (kW) Heating Capacity (kW) Rated point
Cooling Heating
INDOOR Outdoor temperature (˚C DB) INDOOR Outdoor temperature (˚C WB)
25 30 35 40 -15 -10 -5 0 6 10
EWB EDB EDB
TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI
(˚C) (˚C) (˚C)
16.0 22 8.85 6.00 0.76 8.83 6.06 0.89 9.10 6.31 0.99 8.73 6.13 1.09 16.0 7.03 1.01 7.77 1.07 8.51 1.12 9.24 1.17 11.0 0.92 11.9 0.97
18.0 25 10.2 6.58 0.83 9.80 6.45 0.91 9.50 6.30 1.00 9.12 6.11 1.10 18.0 7.02 1.05 7.76 1.11 8.50 1.16 9.22 1.22 11.0 0.96 11.9 1.01
19.0 27 10.4 6.56 0.84 10.1 6.43 0.91 9.70 6.29 1.00 9.31 6.10 1.10 20.0 7.01 1.09 7.75 1.15 8.49 1.21 9.21 1.27 11.0 1.00 11.9 1.05
19.5 27 10.5 6.55 0.84 10.2 6.42 0.91 9.80 6.28 1.00 9.42 6.09 1.10 21.0 7.01 1.12 7.75 1.17 8.48 1.23 9.21 1.29 11.0 1.02 11.9 1.07
22.0 30 11.0 6.46 0.85 10.7 6.34 0.92 10.3 6.20 1.01 9.89 6.02 1.11 22.0 7.01 1.14 7.74 1.20 8.48 1.26 9.20 1.32 11.0 1.04 11.8 1.09
24.0 32 11.4 6.37 0.85 11.1 6.26 0.93 10.8 6.11 1.02 10.3 5.95 1.12 24.0 7.00 1.18 7.73 1.24 8.47 1.30 9.19 1.36 11.0 1.08 11.8 1.13
Notes :
1. Ratings shown are net capacities which include a deduction 6. Coefficient of power input is the percentage when the Symbols :
for indoor fan motor heat. rated value is defined as 1.00. AFR : Air flow rate (m3 / min)
2. On the figure the mark with show the max. Onces at 7. The value contains less than 5% error acording to indoor BF : By pass factor
standard conditoins. unit type. EWB : Entering wet bulb temp. (˚C WB)
On the figure the mark with show rated capacity and 8. Heating capacity include the drop of frost formation. EDB : Entering dry bulb temp. (˚C DB)
rated coefficient of power input. TC : Total cooling (heating)
However the max. Capacity is not guaranteed except at 9. Air flow rate and (BF) are tabulated below. capacity (kW)
standard condition. (Pair) SHC : Sensible heat capacity (kW)
3. On the tables show rated capacity and rated coefficient FAQ100 PI : Power input (kW)
of power input. AFR 23 (Comp. +indoor+outdoor fan motor).
4. SHC* is based on each EWB and EDB. (BF) (0.10) CPI : Coefficient of power input. (-)
SHC=SHC correction for other dry bulb.
=0.02 × AFR (m3 / min.) × (1-BF) × (DB*-EDB) 10. Rated power input of each model is tabulated below. Caution :
Add SHC to SHC*. (Pair) TC and SHC are shown by kW.
5. Capacities are based on the following conditions. FAQ100
Outdoor air : 85% RH. However, the condition Cooling 3.53
rated capacity is 7˚C DB/6˚C WB. (heating) Heating 3.77
3D054629
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Cooling Heating
1.4 1.4
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
1.2 1.2
1.13 1.15
1.0 1.0
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.45 0.42
0.4
0.4

0.2 0.2
0.0 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0
5.0 11.2 5.1 12.8
Capacity range Rated point Capacity range Rated point
Cooling Heating
25 30 35 40 -15 -10 -5 0 6 10
EWB EDB EDB
(˚C) (˚C) (˚C)
16.0 22 9.12 6.19 0.76 9.10 6.25 0.89 9.38 6.51 0.99 9.00 6.32 1.09 16.0 7.16 1.01 7.91 1.07 8.66 1.12 9.41 1.17 11.2 0.92 12.1 0.97
18.0 25 10.5 6.78 0.83 10.1 6.65 0.91 9.79 6.49 1.00 9.40 6.30 1.10 18.0 7.15 1.05 7.90 1.11 8.65 1.16 9.39 1.22 11.2 0.96 12.1 1.01
19.0 27 10.7 6.76 0.84 10.4 6.63 0.91 10.0 6.48 1.00 9.60 6.29 1.10 20.0 7.15 1.09 7.89 1.15 8.64 1.21 9.38 1.27 11.2 1.00 12.1 1.05
19.5 27 10.8 6.75 0.84 10.5 6.62 0.91 10.1 6.47 1.00 9.71 6.28 1.10 21.0 7.14 1.12 7.89 1.17 8.63 1.23 9.38 1.29 11.2 1.02 12.1 1.07
22.0 30 11.3 6.66 0.85 11.0 6.54 0.92 10.6 6.39 1.01 10.2 6.21 1.11 22.0 7.14 1.14 7.88 1.20 8.63 1.26 9.37 1.32 11.2 1.04 12.0 1.09
24.0 32 11.8 6.57 0.85 11.4 6.45 0.93 11.1 6.30 1.02 10.6 6.13 1.12 24.0 7.13 1.18 7.87 1.24 8.62 1.30 9.36 1.36 11.2 1.08 12.0 1.13
Notes :
standard conditoins. unit type. EWB : Entering wet bulb temp. (˚C DB)
3. On the tables show rated capacity and rated coefficient FCQ100K FHQ100 PI : Power input (kW)
of power input. AFR 32 24 (Comp. +indoor+outdoor fan motor).
4. SHC* is based on each EWB and EDB. (BF) (0.11) (0.14) CPI : Coefficient of power input. (-)
5. Capacities are based on the following conditions. FCQ100K FHQ100
Outdoor air : 85% RH. However, the condition MODEL
1 phase 3 phase 1 phase
rated capacity is 7˚C DB/6˚C WB. (heating) Cooling 2.94 2.94 3.26
Corresponding refrigerant piping length : 7.5m Heating 3.03 3.03 3.77
3D058498A
Capacity tables
89
1
90
Cooling (For FCQ) Cooling (For FHQ) Heating
1.4 1.4 1.4
1.2 1.2 1.2
1.14 1.18 1.18
Capacity tables
1.0 1.0 1.0

0.8 0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4 0.4
0.35 0.39 0.34
0.2 0.2 0.2

0.0 0.0 0.0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0
5.7 5.7 16.2
Capacity range Rated point Capacity range Rated point Capacity range
Rated point
Cooling Capacity (kW) Cooling Capacity (kW) Heating Capacity (kW)
Cooling (For FCQ) Cooling (For FHQ) Heating

INDOOR Outdoor temperature (˚C DB) INDOOR Outdoor temperature (˚C DB) INDOOR Outdoor temperature (˚C WB)
25 30 35 40 25 30 35 40 -15 -10 -5 0 6 10
EWB EDB EWB EDB EDB
TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC SHC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI TC CPI
(˚C) (˚C) (˚C) (˚C) (˚C)
(kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-) (kW) (-)
16.0 22 11.4 7.73 0.76 11.4 7.81 0.89 11.7 8.14 0.99 11.3 7.90 1.09 16.0 22 11.0 7.49 0.76 11.0 7.56 0.89 11.4 7.88 0.99 10.9 7.64 1.09 16.0 8.83 1.05 9.76 1.11 10.7 1.16 11.6 1.22 14.0 0.92 15.1 0.97
18.0 25 13.1 8.48 0.83 12.7 8.32 0.91 12.2 8.12 1.00 11.8 7.88 1.10 18.0 25 12.7 8.21 0.83 12.3 8.05 0.91 11.8 7.86 1.00 11.4 7.63 1.10 18.0 8.82 1.10 9.74 1.15 10.7 1.21 11.6 1.27 14.0 0.96 15.1 1.01
19.0 27 13.3 8.45 0.84 12.9 8.29 0.91 12.5 8.09 1.00 12.0 7.86 1.10 19.0 27 12.9 8.18 0.84 12.5 8.03 0.91 12.1 7.84 1.00 11.6 7.61 1.10 20.0 8.81 1.14 9.73 1.20 10.7 1.26 11.6 1.32 14.0 1.00 15.1 1.05
19.5 27 13.5 8.44 0.84 13.1 8.28 0.91 12.6 8.08 1.00 12.1 7.85 1.10 19.5 27 13.1 8.17 0.84 12.7 8.01 0.91 12.2 7.82 1.00 11.7 7.60 1.10 21.0 8.81 1.16 9.73 1.22 10.6 1.28 11.6 1.34 14.0 1.02 15.1 1.07
22.0 30 14.2 8.33 0.85 13.8 8.18 0.92 13.3 7.99 1.01 12.8 7.76 1.11 22.0 30 13.7 8.06 0.85 13.3 7.91 0.92 12.9 7.73 1.01 12.4 7.51 1.11 22.0 8.80 1.18 9.72 1.24 10.6 1.31 11.6 1.37 14.0 1.04 15.1 1.09
24.0 32 14.7 8.21 0.85 14.3 8.06 0.93 13.8 7.88 1.02 13.3 7.67 1.12 24.0 32 14.3 7.95 0.85 13.8 7.80 0.93 13.4 7.63 1.02 12.9 7.42 1.12 24.0 8.79 1.22 9.71 1.29 10.6 1.35 11.5 1.42 14.0 1.08 15.0 1.13
Notes :
3. On the tables show rated capacity and rated coefficient FCQ125K FHQ125 PI : Power input (kW)
of power input. AFR 33 30 (Comp. +indoor+outdoor fan motor).
4. SHC* is based on each EWB and EDB. (BF) (0.06) (0.13) CPI : Coefficient of power input. (-)
5. Capacities are based on the following conditions. FCQ100 FHQ125
Outdoor air : 85% RH. However, the condition MODEL 1 phase 3 phase 1 phase
rated capacity is 7˚C DB/6˚C WB. (heating) Cooling 3.77 3.77 4.40
Corresponding refrigerant piping length : 7.5m Heating 3.83 3.83 4.55
3D058499A
Inverter Series
EDAU28-856
Cooling Heating
1.4 1.4
EDAU28-856
Inverter Series
1.2 1.2
1.14 1.14
1.0 1.0
0.8 0.8
0.6 0.6
0.4 0.4
FCQ140KVEA + RZQ160KV4A
0.34 0.29

0.2 0.2
0.0 10.0 0.0

0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 0.0 2.0 4.0 6.26.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0
6.2 15.4
Capacity range Rated point Capacity range Rated point
Cooling Heating
25 30 35 40 -15 -10 -5 0 6 10
EWB EDB EDB
(˚C) (˚C) (˚C)
16.0 22 12.8 8.66 0.76 12.7 8.74 0.89 13.1 9.12 0.99 12.6 8.84 1.09 16.0 9.82 1.05 10.8 1.11 11.9 1.16 12.9 1.22 16.0 0.92 17.3 0.97
18.0 25 14.6 9.50 0.83 14.2 9.31 0.91 13.7 9.09 1.00 13.2 8.82 1.10 18.0 9.80 1.10 10.8 1.15 11.8 1.21 12.9 1.27 16.0 0.96 17.2 1.01
19.0 27 15.0 9.47 0.84 14.5 9.29 0.91 14.0 9.07 1.00 13.4 8.80 1.10 20.0 9.79 1.14 10.8 1.20 11.8 1.26 12.9 1.32 16.0 1.00 17.2 1.05
19.5 27 15.1 9.45 0.84 14.7 9.27 0.91 14.1 9.05 1.00 13.6 8.79 1.10 21.0 9.79 1.16 10.8 1.22 11.8 1.28 12.8 1.34 16.0 1.02 17.2 1.07
22.0 30 15.9 9.33 0.85 15.4 9.16 0.92 14.9 8.95 1.01 14.3 8.69 1.11 22.0 9.78 1.18 10.8 1.24 11.8 1.31 12.8 1.37 16.0 1.04 17.2 1.09
24.0 32 16.5 9.20 0.85 16.0 9.03 0.93 15.5 8.83 1.02 14.9 8.59 1.12 24.0 9.77 1.22 10.8 1.29 11.8 1.35 12.8 1.42 16.0 1.08 17.2 1.13
Notes :
3. On the tables show rated capacity and rated coefficient FCQ140K PI : Power input (kW)
of power input. AFR 33 (Comp. +indoor+outdoor fan motor).
4. SHC* is based on each EWB and EDB. (BF) (0.06) CPI : Coefficient of power input. (-)
5. Capacities are based on the following conditions. FCQ140K
Outdoor air : 85% RH. However, the condition Cooling 4.95
rated capacity is 7˚C DB/6˚C WB. (heating) Heating 4.80
3D058500A
Capacity tables
91
1
Capacity correction factor by the length of refrigerant piping
The capacity of the unit has to be corrected in accordance with the length of refrigerant piping.
(The distance between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit)
RXS25, 35:Heating(96.4%)
RXS60, 71:Heating(96.1%)
(%) RXS50:Heating(93.6%) RZQ71:Heating(97.9%)
100
RZQ100F, 100K~160K ,100H~160H
:Heating(96.7%)
95 RZQ71, RZQ100F:Cooling(95%)
Capacity correction factor
90
RXS, RKS25,35:Cooling(94.6%)
85
RZQ100K, 100H:Cooling(84.2%)
RXS,RKS60, 71:Cooling(85.9%)
80
RXS,RKS50:Cooling(90.4%)
RZQ125K, 125H:Cooling(75.2%)
75
70 RZQ160K, 160H:Cooling(70.0%)
05 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 (m)
Length of refrigerant piping (Total length)
Note: 1.  line: Correction factor for Cooling Capacity, line: Correction factor for Heating Capacity
2. The correction factor remains the same whether the outdoor unit is to be installed above or below
the indoor unit.
3. You cannot extend the refrigerant piping exceeding the limit shown in the above table.
92 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Operation limits
10. Operation limits

1
RKS25EBVMA / RKS35EBVMA / RKS50FBVMA / RKS60FBVMA
4D050467G
4D054070E
3D050466E
Inverter Series 93
Operation limits EDAU28-856
RXS50FBVMA / RXS60FBVMA / RXS71FBVMA
3D054069D
Cooling Heating
60 20
50 15
40 10
Continuous operation range
Continuous operation range
Outdoor temp. (˚C WB)
30 5
Outdoor temp. (˚C DB)
operation (Pull-down)
Allowable range of
operation (Warming-up)
20 0
Allowable range of
10 -5
0 -10
-10 -15
-20 -20
5 10 15 20 25 30 5 10 15 20 25 30
Indoor temp. (˚C WB) Indoor temp. (˚C DB)
3D046720C
94 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Fan performance
11. Fan performance

1
11.1 FBQ
FBQ50BV1A
50Hz
(mmH2O) (Pa) (mmH2O)

150
15 15
HIGH (HIGH ESP)
L P)
NA ES
T ER GH
I
EX (H
F E
O R
10 100 IT SU 10
M S
LI E
R PR
P PE IC
U TA T
S
HIGH (LOW ESP)

LOW
5 50 ATIC 5
NAL ST
TER
F EX
L IM IT O H ESP)
ER (HIG NOTE) 1. THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CAN BE USED TO SWITCH
LOW SURE BETWEEN "HIGH" AND "LOW" .
S
PRE 2. THE AIR FLOW IS SET TO "STANDARD" BEFORE LEAVING THE FACTORY.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO SWITCH BETWEEN "STANDARD ESP" AND "HIGH ESP"
BY FIELD SETUP OF REMOTE CONTROLLER.
HIGH (STANDARD ESP)
0 0 0
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 15.5
AIR FLOW (m3/min)
3D053085
FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A
50Hz
(mmH2O)(Pa) (mmH2O)
150
15 15
HIGH (HIGH ESP)
L P)
NA ES
T ER GH
I
EX (H
F E
O R
10 100 IT SU 10
M S
LI E
R PR
P PE IC
U TA T
S
LOW
HIGH (LOW ESP)
5 50 5
NAL
TER ESP)
F EX
L IM IT O E (HIGH
ER SUR
LOW IC PRES
T
STA
NOTE) 1. THE REMOTE CONTROLLER CAN BE USED TO SWITCH
BETWEEN "HIGH" AND "LOW" .
2. THE AIR FLOW IS SET TO "STANDARD" BEFORE LEAVING THE FACTORY.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO SWITCH BETWEEN "STANDARD ESP" AND "HIGH ESP"
HIGH (STANDARD ESP)
BY FIELD SETUP OF REMOTE CONTROLLER.
0 0 0
14 16 18 20 21
AIR FLOW (m3/min)
3D053086A
Inverter Series 95
Air velocity and temperature distributions EDAU28-856
12. Air velocity and temperature distributions

12.1 FFQ
FFQ25B8V1B (Cooling)
FFQ25B8V1B (Heating)
96 Inverter Series
EDAU28-856 Air velocity and temperature distributions
FFQ35B8V1B (Cooling) 1
Inverter Series 97
FFQ50B8V1B (Cooling)
98 Inverter Series
FFQ60B8V1B (Cooling) 1
Inverter Series 99
12.2 FHQ
FHQ50BVV1B (Cooling)
FHQ50BVV1B (Heating)
100 Inverter Series

FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B (Cooling) 1
FHQ60BVV1B / FHQ71BVV1B (Heating)
Inverter Series 101

FHQ100BVV1B (Cooling)
102 Inverter Series

FHQ125BVV1B (Cooling) 1
Inverter Series 103

12.3 FAQ
FAQ100BVV1B (Cooling)
FAQ100BVV1B (Heating)
104 Inverter Series

EDAU28-856 Sound level
13. Sound level

1
13.1 Overall sound level
13.1.1 Indoor unit
dB(A)
220-240V 50Hz
Model Measuring location
H L
FCQ71KVEA 35 28
FCQ100KVEA 43 32
FCQ125KVEA 44 34
4D058461
FCQ140KVEA 44 36
230V 50Hz
H L
FFQ25B8V1B 29.5 24.5
FFQ35B8V1B 32 25
FFQ50B8V1B 36 27
4D040176A
FFQ60B8V1B 41 32
FHQ50BVV1B 38 33
FHQ60BVV1B 39 33
FHQ71BVV1B 39 35
4D028281B
FHQ100BVV1B 42 37
FHQ125BVV1B 44 39
FAQ100BVV1B 45 41
4D027787B
FBQ50BV1A 33 29
FBQ60BV1A 34 30
FBQ71BV1A 34 30 4D053091
Note: Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as the construction (acoustic absorption
coefficient) of the particular room in which the equipments installed.
Inverter Series 105

Sound level EDAU28-856
13.1.2 Outdoor unit

dB(A)
220-240V 50Hz
Cooling Heating
RKS25EBVMA 46 —
1m
RKS35EBVMA 47 —
RKS50FBVMA 47 —
4D047727G
RKS60FBVMA 49 —
RXS25EBVMA 46 47
RXS35EBVMA 47 48
1m
RXS50FBVMA 47 48
RXS60FBVMA 49 49 3D047725H
RXS71FBVMA 52 52
240V 50Hz
Cooling Heating
RZQ71FV4A 48 50
RZQ100FV4A 50 54 4D054631
RZQ100KV4A 49 51
RZQ125KV4A 50 52
RZQ160KV4A 50 52 4D058513
415V 50Hz
Model Measuring Location
Cooling Heating
RZQ100HY4A 49 51
RZQ125HY4A 50 52
RZQ160HY4A 50 52 4D061464
Note: Operation sound is measured in an anechoic chamber.

Sound level will vary depending on a range of factors such as the construction (acoustic absorption
coefficient) of the particular room in which the equipments installed.
106 Inverter Series

13.2 Octave band level

13.2.1 Indoor unit 1
FCQ71KVEA FCQ100KVEA FCQ125KVEA
70 70 70
NC-60 NC-60 NC-60
OCTAVE BAND SOUND PRESSURE LEVEL


60 60 60
NC-50 HI NC-50 NC-50

HI
dB (0dB=0.0002µ bar)
50 50 HI 50
NC-40 NC-40 NC-40

40 40 40
NC-30 NC-30 NC-30

LOW LOW
30 30 LOW 30
NC-20 NC-20 NC-20

20 20 20
APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING THRESHOLD HEARING THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS FOR CONTINUOUS FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE NOISE NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz) OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
4D058461 4D058462 4D058463
FCQ140KVEA FFQ25B8V1B FFQ35B8V1B

70
NC-60
60
NC-50
50 HI
NC-40
40
NC-30
LOW
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
OCTAVE BAND CENTER FREQUENCY (Hz)
4D058464 4D040176A 4D040177A
FFQ50B8V1B FFQ60B8V1B FHQ50BVV1B
4D040178A 4D040179A 4D028281B
FHQ60BVV1B FHQ71BVV1B FHQ100BVV1B

70
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
NC-40
40 HI
LOW
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4D037997A 4D028355B 4D028283B
Inverter Series 107

FHQ125BVV1B FAQ100BVV1B (Cooling) FAQ100BVV1B (Heating)

70
NC-60
60
NC-50
50
NC-40 HI
40
LOW
NC-30
30
NC-20
20
APPROXIMATE
THRESHOLD HEARING
FOR CONTINUOUS
NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4D028284B 4D027787B 4D027790B
FBQ50BV1A FBQ60BV1A / FBQ71BV1A
4D053091 4D053092A
13.2.2 Outdoor unit

RKS25EBVMA RKS35EBVMA RKS50FBVMA
4D047727G 4D047728G 4D027648E
RKS60FBVMA RXS25EBVMA (Cooling) RXS25EBVMA (Heating)
4D040949F 3D047725H 3D047725H
108 Inverter Series

RXS35EBVMA (Cooling) RXS35EBVMA (Heating) RXS50FBVMA (Cooling)

1
3D047726H 3D047726H 3D027645P
RXS50FBVMA (Heating) RXS60FBVMA (Cooling) RXS60FBVMA (Heating)
3D027645P 3D035059G 3D035059G
RXS71FBVMA (Cooling) RXS71FBVMA (Heating) RZQ71FV4A (Cooling)
3D054590A 3D054590A 4D054631
RZQ71FV4A (Heating) RZQ100FV4A (Cooling) RZQ100FV4A (Heating)
4D054633 4D054632 4D054634
Inverter Series 109

RZQ100KV4A (Cooling) RZQ100KV4A (Heating) RZQ125KV4A (Cooling)

70 70 70
NC-60 NC-60 NC-60

60

60
60
NC-50 NC-50 NC-50

50 50 50
dB(0dB=0.0002µ bar)
NC-40 NC-40 NC-40

40 40 40
NC-30 NC-30 NC-30

30 30 30
NC-20 NC-20 NC-20

20 20 20
NOISE NOISE NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4D058513 4D058519 4D058514
RZQ125KV4A (Heating) RZQ160KV4A (Cooling) RZQ160KV4A (Heating)

70 70 70
NC-60 NC-60 NC-60

60
60
60
NC-50 NC-50 NC-50

50 50 50
NC-40 NC-40 NC-40

40 40 40
NC-30 NC-30 NC-30

30 30 30
NC-20 NC-20 NC-20

20 20 20
NOISE NOISE NOISE
63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000 63 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
4D058520 4D058515 4D058521
RZQ100HY4A (Cooling) RZQ100HY4A (Heating) RZQ125HY4A (Cooling)
4D061464 4D061483 4D061473
RZQ125HY4A (Heating) RZQ160HY4A (Cooling) RZQ160HY4A (Heating)
4D061484 4D061482 4D061485
110 Inverter Series

EDAU28-856
Part 2
Installation of 2
Indoor / Outdoor Unit
1. Centre of gravity..................................................................................112
2. Installation of indoor unit .....................................................................115
2.1 FCQ71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
2.2 FFQ25B8 / 35B8 / 50B8 / 60B8V1B
2.4 FAQ100BVV1B (Operation / installation manual) ................................180
2.5 FBQ50B / 60B / 71BV1A (Operation / installation manual) ..................200
3. Installation of outdoor unit ...................................................................221
3.1 RKS25EB / 35EBVMA, RXS25EB / 35EBVMA
3.2 RKS50FB / 60FBVMA, RXS50FB / 60FBVMA
3.3 RXS71FBVMA (Installation manual) ....................................................237
3.4 RZQ71F / 100FV4A (Installation manual) ............................................245
3.5 RZQ100K / 125K / 160KV4A (Installation manual) ..............................264
3.6 RZQ100H / 125H / 160HY4A (Installation manual)..............................280
Installation 111
Centre of gravity EDAU28-856
1. Centre of gravity
Unit (mm)
4D056351F
RKS50FBVMA / RKS60FBVMA
Unit (mm)
4D062132
112 Installation
EDAU28-856 Centre of gravity
RXS71FBVMA
Unit (mm)
4D062131
Unit (mm)
350
440 170
140 620 350
HOLD LOCATION OF
FOUNDATION BOLT
4D046692B
Installation 113
Centre of gravity EDAU28-856

Unit (mm)
500
175
415
350
140 620
HOLD LOCATION OF
FOUNDATION BOLT
4D058487

Unit (mm)
485
390 180
HOLD LOCATION OF
140 620 FOUNDATION BOLT 350
4D061670
114 Installation
EDAU28-856 Installation of indoor unit
2. Installation of indoor unit

2.1 FCQ71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA (Operation / installation manual)
2.1.1 Names and functions of parts
2
k j
a i
g
f
l d e
m h
b
c
a Indoor unit
b Outdoor unit
Remote controller
c Depending on the system configuration, the remote
controller is not provided.
d Inlet air
e Discharge air
f Air outlet
g Air flow flap (at air outlet)
h Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
i Drain pipe
Model name (model name plate)
j
(Inside of suction grille)
Drain pumping out device(built-in)
k
Condensate removed from the room during cooling.
l Air filter (suction grille)
3P177429-3F
Installation 115
Installation of indoor unit EDAU28-856
2.1.2 Installation manual
FCQ71KVEA
FCQ100KVEA SPLIT SYSTEM
Installation manual
FCQ125KVEA Air Conditioners
FCQ140KVEA
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS ........................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE................................................................................5
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................7
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .....................................................................................8
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ..................................................................................10
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK .................................................................................................12
8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK .........................................................................................15
9. WIRING EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................17
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL .......................................................... 19
11. FIELD SETTING...........................................................................................................19
12. TEST OPERATION ......................................................................................................21
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these “SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS” carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and
explain to the customer how to operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation man-
ual. Ask the customer to store the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner is classified under “appliances not accessible to the general public”.
Meaning of WARNING and CAUTION notices.
WARNING .........Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or per-
sonal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
• Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work.
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner yourself. Improper installation may result in water leakage,
electric shocks or fire.
• Install the air conditioner in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual.
Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Install the air conditioner on a foundation strong enough to withstand the weight of the unit.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injury.
• Carry out the specified installation work after taking into account strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Failure to do so during installation work may result in the unit falling and causing accidents.
1
C : 3P177351-2D
116 Installation
• Make sure that a separate power supply circuit is provided for this unit and that all electrical work is carried
out by qualified personnel according to local laws and regulations and this installation manual.
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire.
• Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires are used, and that there is no strain on the terminal
connections or wires.
Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
• When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the
2
wires so that the terminal box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the terminal box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
• If refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant comes into contact with fire.
• After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source
of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
• Be sure to switch off the unit before touching any electrical parts.
• Be sure to earth the air conditioner.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks.
• Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
• While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping to ensure proper drainage and
insulate piping to prevent condensation.
Improper drain piping may result in indoor water leakage and property damage.
• Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televisions
or radios to prevent picture interference and noise.
(Depending on the incoming signal strength, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient to eliminate noise.)
• Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can be shorter than expected in rooms with electronic
fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
Install the indoor unit as far away from fluorescent lamps as possible.
• Do not install the air conditioner in the following locations:
1. Where there is a high concentration of mineral oil spray or vapour (e.g. a kitchen).
Plastic parts will deteriorate, parts may fall off and water leakage could result.
2. Where corrosive gas, such as sulphurous acid gas, is produced.
Corroding of copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
3. Near machinery emitting electromagnetic radiation.
Electromagnetic radiation may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of
the unit.
4. Where flammable gas may leak, where there is carbon fibre or ignitable dust suspensions in the air, or
where volatile flammables such as paint thinner or gasoline are handled.
Operating the unit in such conditions may result in fire.
2
3P177351-2D
Installation 117
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening
Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect
refrigerant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
• When opening the unit or moving it after opening, be sure to lift it by holding on to the lifting lugs without
exerting any pressure on other parts, especially, drain piping, and other resin parts.
• Decide upon a line of transport.
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft mate-
rial, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage
or scratches to the unit.
• Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
• Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.
1. PRECAUTIONS
• Be sure to read this manual before installing the indoor unit.
• When selecting installation site, refer to the paper pattern.
• This unit is suitable for installation in a household, commercial and light industrial environment.
• Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
• Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
• Where corrosive gas like sulfurous gas exists. (Copper tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
• Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
• Where machines can generate electromagnetic waves. (Control system may malfunction.)
• Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
greatly such as that in factories. Also in vehicles or vessels.
2. ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.

(3) Washer for
(5) Paper pattern for
Name (1) Drain hose (2) Metal clamp hanger (4) Clamp (6) Screw (M4)
installation
bracket
Quantity 1 pc. 1 pc. 8 pcs. 6 pcs. 1 pc. 4 pcs.
Also used as pack- For paper pattern

ing material for installation
Shape
(7) Washer Insulation for

Name Sealing pad Installation guide
fixing plate fitting
Quantity 4 pcs. 1 each 1 each 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
(10) Large (Other)
(8) for gas (13) Small • Installation

pipe manual
(11) Medium-1 (14) (15) • Operation
Shape manual
(9) for liquid
pipe
(12) Medium-2
3
3P177351-2D
118 Installation
3. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
• The optional decoration panel and remote controller are required for this indoor unit. (Refer to Table 1, 2)
(However, the remote controller is not required for the slave unit of a simultaneous operation system.)
Table 1
Unit model Optional decoration panel 2
BYCP125K-W1
FCQ71·100·125·140KVEA
Color : Fresh White
• These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from Table 2
according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 2
Remote controller
Wired type BRC1C61 / BRC1D61
Wireless type BRC7F632F
NOTE
• If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in “Table 2” on page 4, select a suitable remote con-
troller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
1. Items to be checked after completion of work

Items to be checked If not properly done, what is likely to occur Check
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed
The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.
firmly?
The unit may malfunction or the compo-
Is the outdoor unit fully installed?
nents burn out.
Is the gas leak test finished? It may result in insufficient cooling.
Is the unit fully insulated? Condensate water may drip.
Does drainage flow smoothly? Condensate water may drip.
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the compo-
to that shown on the name plate? nents burn out.
Are wiring and piping correct?
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded? It may result in electric shock.
Is wiring size according to specifications?
nents burn out.
Is something blocking the air outlet or inlet
It may result in insufficient cooling.
of either the indoor or outdoor units?
Are refrigerant piping length and additional The refrigerant charge in the system is not
refrigerant charge noted down? clear.
2. Items to be checked at time of delivery

* Also review the “1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS”
Items to be checked Check
Are the terminal box lid, air filter, suction grille attached?
Did you explain about operations while showing the instruction manual to your customer?
Did you hand the instruction manual over to your customer?
4
C : 3P177351-2D
Installation 119
Points for explanation about operations
The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items per-
taining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of
the product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described con-
tents and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.
4. NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE

〈Hold the unit by the 4 lifting lugs when opening the box and moving it, and do not exert pressure on to any
other part piping (refrigerant, drain, etc.) or plastic parts.
If the temperature or humidity inside the ceiling might rise above 30°C or RH 80%, respectively, use the high-
humidity kit (sold separately) or add extra insulation to the main unit body.
Use glass wool or polyethylene foam as insulation and make sure it is at least 10mm thick and fits inside the
ceiling opening.〉
The direction this product blows can be selected. However, a separately sold shut-off material kit is
needed in order to make the unit blow in two, three, or four (corner shut-off) directions.
(1) Select an installation location with the customer’s approval which matches the following conditions.
• A location from which cool (warm) air will reach the whole room.
• A location with no objects blocking the air passage.
• A location where drainage can be done with no problem.
• A location strong enough to support the weight of the indoor unit.
• Locations where the wall is not significantly tilted.
• A location which leaves enough room for installation and service work.
• A location where there is no risk of flammable gas leaking.
• A location where the length of the indoor-outdoor piping is no longer than the tolerated length (see the
installation manual that came with the outdoor unit for details).
[Space required for installation]
*≥1500
*≥1500
H
Air
discharge Air Air
At least 1800mm inlet discharge
from the floor. ≥1500 ≥1500
Floor surface *≥1500

*≥1500
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
Model H
FCQ71KVEA 256
FCQ100·125·140KVEA 298
5
C : 3P177351-2D
120 Installation
CAUTION
• The indoor and outdoor units and the power supply wiring and remote controller cord must be installed
at least 1m away from any televisions or radios. This is to prevent interference with picture and sound
reception. (Interference may occur even at 1m away depending on the reception quality.)
• If installing the wireless kit, the distance of the signal sent from the remote controller might be shorter if
there are fluorescent lights which are electrically started (such as with inverters, rapid starters, etc.) in 2
the room. The indoor unit should be installed as far away from fluorescent lights as possible.
(2) Ceiling height

This product can be installed in ceilings up to 3.5m high (4.2m high for the 100, 125, and 140).
If the ceiling height is 2.7m (3.2m for the 100,125, and 140) or more, field settings will have to be made with
the remote controller. See “11. FIELD SETTING” for details.
(3) Air direction
The air direction shown in Fig. 3 is an example.
Select the appropriate number of directions according to the shape of the room and the location of the unit.
(Field settings have to be made using the remote controller and the outlet vents have to be shut off if two,
three, or four (corner shut-off) directions are selected. See the shut-off materials (sold separately) instal-
lation manual for details.)
(4) Use eyebolts for installation. Check if the location for the installation is strong enough to support the weight
of the unit, reinforce it if necessary, and install using eyebolts. (The spacing of the installation is shown on
the “paper pattern for installation (5)”.)
[Air direction]
Pipes
Pipes
Pipes
All-round air Pipes

Four air direction Three air direction Two air direction
Fig. 3
6
3P177351-2D
Installation 121
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

(1) Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position.
Refrigerant
860 – 910 (Ceiling opening)
950 (Decoration panel)
780 (Suspension bolt pitch)

piping
840 (Indoor unit)
Hanger
Suspension bracket
bolt (×4) False
ceiling
710(Suspension bolt pitch)
125 – 130
840 (Indoor unit) View as seen from A
860 – 910 (Ceiling opening) Fig. 5
950 (Decoration panel)
Fig. 4
䡵 Installation is possible when ceiling opening dimensions is as follows

• When installing the unit within the frame for fixing false ceiling.
860
(Opening dimension inside
(Dimension inside frame)
Frame the flame for ceiling)

False
840
910
ceiling
≥20 860 – *910 ≥20

840 (Ceiling opening dimension) (Ceiling-panel
910
(Dimension inside frame) overlapping dimension)
Fig. 7
Fig. 6
NOTE
• Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of 910mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceiling-
panel overlapping dimension of 20mm, the spacing between the ceiling and the unit should be 35mm or
less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over 35mm, attach ceiling material to part or recover
the ceiling.
Ceiling material
≥ 35 ≥ 35
Fig. 8
7
3P177351-2D
122 Installation
(2) Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where applicable. (For existing ceilings)
• Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimensions.
• Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the side of the opening to the casing outlet,
implement the refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller (unnecessary for wireless
type) and indoor-outdoor unit casing outlet. Refer to “6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK”, “7. DRAIN
PIPING WORK” and “8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK”.
• After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling
2
level and to prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
(3) Install the suspension bolts.

<installation example>
(Use either a M8~M10 size bolt)
Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and Ceiling slab
a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field
50 – 100
Anchor
supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce Long nut or turn-buckle
the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit.
Suspension bolt
Adjust clearance (50 – 100mm) from the
ceiling before proceeding further. False ceiling
Fig. 9
NOTE
• All the above parts are field supplied.
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION

Installing optional accessories (except for the decoration panel) before installing the indoor unit is
easier. However, for existing ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before
installing the unit.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
(1) For new ceilings

(1-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
• Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to fix it securely by using a nut and
washer (3) from the upper and lower sides of the hanger bracket.
The washer fixing plate (7) will prevent the washer from falling.
Field supply
Washer (3) (accessory)
Insert
Hanger bracket
Tighten Washer fixing plate (7)
(double nuts) (accessory)
[Securing the hanger bracket]
[Securing the washer]
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
(1-2)Refer to the paper pattern for installation (5) for ceiling opening dimension.
Consult the builder or carpenter for details.
• The center of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper pattern for installation.
The center of the unit is indicated on the triangular mark to the unit bottom and on the paper pattern for
installation.
• Fix the paper pattern to the unit with screws (6) (×4).
• Ceiling height is shown on the side of the paper pattern for installation (5). Adjust the height of the unit
according to this indication.
8
3P177351-2D
Installation 123
Please perform one of the following, as the shape of the paper pattern for installation differs accord-
ing to the model.
Center of main unit Center of

ceiling opening
Center mark of
main unit Paper pattern for
installation (5)
Screw (6)
Screw (6) (accessory)
(accessory)
Fig. 12
[Installation of paper pattern for installation]
<Ceiling work>
(1-3)Adjust the unit to the right position for installation.
(Refer to “4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1)”.)
• Using the Installation guide (15) allows you to check the positions from the underside of the unit to the
lower ceiling surface.
Apply the short

side of the
cut-out section.
Lower ceiling Underside of

surface the unit
Installation guide (15)

(accessory)
(1-4)Check the unit is horizontally level.

• The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float
switch. Verify that it is level by using a level or a water-filled
vinyl tube.
CAUTION
If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may
malfunction and cause water to drip.
(1-5)Remove the washer fixing plate (7) used for preventing the Level Vinyl tube
washer from falling and tighten the upper nut.
(1-6)Remove the paper pattern for installation (5). [Maintaining horizontality]
Fig. 13
(2) For existing ceilings
(2-1)Install the indoor unit temporarily.
Perform step (1-1) in (1) For new ceilings.
(2-2)Adjust the height and position of the unit.
(Refer to “4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION-(1)” and (1-3) in (1) For new ceilings.)
(2-3)Perform steps (1-4), (1-5) in (1) For new ceilings.
9
3P177351-2D
124 Installation
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK

〈For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.〉
〈Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.〉
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can reach up to approximately 120°C, so use
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.) 2
〈Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30°C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.〉
〈Be sure to check the type of R410A refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrig-
erant will prevent normal operation of the unit.)〉
CAUTION
• Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the type of refrigerant.
• Apply ester oil or ether oil around the flare section before connecting.
• To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover
it with tape.
• Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such
as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
• Do not mix air or other gas with the specified refrigerant in the refrig-
eration cycle. Torque wrench
• Ventilate the room if refrigerant gas leaks during the work.
• The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
• Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown in the Spanner
drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the unit.
(Refer to Fig. 14) Pipe union
• Refer to “Table 3” for the dimensions of flare nut spaces.
Flare nut
Fig. 14
• When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare
section (only inside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in. Coat the flare section (only inside)
(Refer to Fig. 15) with ester or ether oil.
• Keep all the screw mounting resin parts (e.g., piping presser
plates) away from oil.
If oil adheres, the strength of the screw mounting resin parts may
drop.
Fig. 15
CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the
refrigerant to leak.
NOTE
• Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.
Table 3
Flare dimensions
Pipe size Tightening torque Flare
A (mm)
45˚±2˚
φ 9.5 (3/8”) 32.7 – 39.9 N·m 12.8 – 13.2

R0.4-0.8
90˚±2˚
φ 15.9 (5/8”) 61.8 – 75.4 N·m 19.3 – 19.7
• Refer to “Table 3” to determine the proper tightening torque.
10
C : 3P177351-2D
Installation 125
Not recommendable but in case of emergency

You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to install the unit without a torque wrench, you may
follow the installation method mentioned below.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Pipe size Further tightening angle Recommended arm length of tool
φ 9.5 (3/8”) 60 to 90 degrees Approx. 200mm
After the work is finished, make sure to check that there is no gas leak.
• Make absolutely sure to execute heat insulation works on the pipe-connecting section after checking gas
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for
fitting (8) and (9). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).) (Refer to Fig. 16)
• Wrap the sealing pad (11) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 16)
Gas Piping Insulation Procedure

Insulation for fitting (8) Wrap over from the
(accessory) base of the unit to
Piping insulation the top of the flare
Flare nut connection material (main unit) nut connection.
Turn seams up Attach to base
Main unit
Piping insulation Clamp (4) (accessory) Sealing pad
material medium-1 (11)
(Field supply) Tighten the part other
than the piping insulation (accessory)
material.
Liquid Piping Insulation Procedure

Insulation for fitting (9) Wrap the
(accessory) insulator around
Piping insulation the part from the
Flare nut connection material (main unit) root.
Gas piping
Attach to base
Turn seams up Liquid piping
Main unit
Screw mounting part
Piping insulation Clamp (4) (accessory) Sealing pad
material medium-2 (12) of piping presser plate
(Field supply) Tighten the part other (accessory) (2 locations)
than the piping insulation
material. Fig. 16
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
CAUTION TO BE TAKEN WHEN BRAZING REFRIGERANT PIPING
“Do not use flux when brazing refrigerant piping. Therefore, use the phosphor copper brazing filler metal
(BCuP-2: JIS Z 3264/B-Cu93P-710/795: ISO 3677) which does not require flux.”
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based
flux is used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the
refrigerant oil.)
11
3P177351-2D
126 Installation
• Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping, and
could cause system malfunction.
• When brazing the refrigerant piping, only begin brazing after having carried out nitrogen substitution or
while inserting nitrogen into the refrigerant piping. Once this is done, connect the indoor unit with a flared
or a flanged connection.
• Nitrogen should be set to 0.02MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
2
the piping. (Refer to Fig. 17)
Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping Taping
Part to be Hands valve
brazed
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 17
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK

(1) Rig drain piping
• As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
• Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section) than
that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25mm, outside diameter 32mm).
• Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets from
forming.
• If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
• To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5m.
Hanger bracket 1–1.5m 1/100 gradient or more
GOOD WRONG
Fig. 18-1 Fig. 18-2
CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
• Use the attached drain hose (1) and Metal clamp (2).
• Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within the
portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less than
4mm from the hose.
• Wrap the attached sealing pad (10) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
• Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water leak-
age due to dew condensation.
• Indoor drain pipe
• Drain socket
Metal Metal
clamp (2) clamp (2) Large sealing pad (10)
(accessory) (accessory)
Drain hose (1)

Tape (White)
Fig. 19 Fig. 20 ≥ 4mm
12
3P177351-2D
Installation 127
<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>

• Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 675mm.
The drain pump of this unit has a high delivery flow rate. Therefore, the higher the drain raising height is, the
lower the sound of draining will be. For this reason, a minimum drain raising height of 300mm is recommended.
• Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300mm from the unit.
Ceiling slab
Drain hose (1)
≥ 300mm 1 – 1.5m Hanger bracket
(accessory)
Level or Adjustable
tilted (≥ 675)
≥ 850
slightly up
175
Drain raising pipe
To prevent air bubbles in the Raising section
drain hose part, keep it level or Metal clamp
(accessory) (2) Drain hose (accessory) (1)
slightly tilted up. Any bubbles in
the hose might cause the unit Fig. 21
to make noise due to backflow
when the drain pump stops.
NOTE
• To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (1), do not bend or twist when install-
ing. (This may cause leakage.)
• If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.
Central drain pipe
0 – 675mm
The drain pipe should have a downward

slope of at least 1/100 to prevent
air pockets from forming.
Water accumulating in the drain
piping can cause the drain to clog.
Fig. 22
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
(2) After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED

• Add approximately 1000cc of water slowly from the air outlet and check drainage flow.
• Check drainage flow during COOL running, explained under ‘‘12. TEST OPERATION’’.
• Refer to the figure on the following after checking the draining of water, and mount the thermal insulation
material for drainage (14) and thermal insulate the drain socket.
Thermal insulation Sealing pad (Large) (10)

material for drainage (14) Be sure to lay the sealing
(accessory) material on (14).
Thermal insulation Make sure that there

material for drainage (14) is no clearance.
(accessory)
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED

CAUTION
• Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
• If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after the
test run is complete.
13
3P177351-2D
128 Installation
• Remove the terminal box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (SINGLE PHASE 50Hz 240V) to con-
nections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the terminal
block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire firmly. When carrying
out wiring work around the terminal box, make sure none of the connectors come undone. Be sure to attach
the terminal box lid before turning on the power.
• Put approximately 1000cc of water into the drain pan through the blow-off mouth on the left-hand side of the
drain socket. Make sure not to pour water over the drain pump or any electric parts including those of the 2
drain pump.
• When the power is turned on, the drain pump will operate and you can check the draining of water through
the transparent part of the drain socket. (The drain pump will stop automatically in 10 minutes.)
After checking the draining of water, mount the thermal insulation material for drainage (14) and thermal
insulate the drain socket.
• After confirming drainage (Fig.23, Fig.24), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
• Attach the terminal box lid as before.
Drain sockets
(Check the
drainage now.) Drain pump
location
At least
100mm
Service drain outlet (with rubber plug)

(Use this outlet to drain water from
Plastic watering can the drain pan.)
(Tube should be
about 100mm long.)
<Adding water through air discharge outlet>
[Method of adding water] Fig. 23
Inter-unit wiring
terminal block
Power supply
single phase 240V
Ground
wire 3 2 1
3 2 1
Terminal box lid
Fig. 24
14
3P177351-2D
Installation 129
CAUTION
Drain piping connections
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sew-
age might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK

• All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must conform to local codes.
• Use copper wire only.
• For electric wiring work, refer to also “WIRING DIAGRAM” attached to the unit body.
• For remote controller wiring details, refer to the installation manual attached to the remote controller.
• All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
• A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the entire system must be installed.
• Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for the size of power supply electric wire con-
nected to the outdoor unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring instructions.
• Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
• Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, plumbing pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
• Gas pipes: might cause explosions or fire if gas leaks.
• Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
• Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause abnormally high electric potential in the ground
during lighting storms.
• Specifications for field wire

The remote control cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
2
Wire Size (mm ) Length
Wiring the units H05VV – U4G (NOTE 1) 2.5 –
Remote controller cord Vinyl cord with sheath or cable NOTE 2 (2 wire) 0.75 – 1.25 Max. 500m *
*This will be the total extended length in the system when doing group control.
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
2. Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (Insulated thickness : 1mm or more)
Connection of wiring between units, ground wire and for the remote controller cord (Refer to Fig. 25)
• Wiring the units and ground wire
Remove the terminal box lid and connect wires of matching number to the terminal block for wiring the units
(4 P) inside. And connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing this, pull the wires inside through
the hole and fix the wires securely with the included clamp (4).
• Remote controller cords (not neccessary for slave unit of simultaneous operation system)
Remove the terminal box lid and pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the terminal block for
remote controller (4 P). (no polarity) Securely fix the remote controller cord with the included clamp (4).
• After connection, attach sealing pad (13).
• Be sure to attach it to prevent the infiltration of water from the outside.
15
3P177351-2D
130 Installation
Remote Transmission
Remote controller cord controller wiring
(weak electric)
Wiring
Inter-unit wiring
Ground wire
through-holes
Approximately Sheaths
P1 P2 F1 F2
2
7mm
Peel back
the sheath 10 – 15mm
on the power 70 – 90mm Clamp (4)
line and twist. Length of
Cut off any excess
sheath to material after
peel back tightening.
Inter-unit wiring
terminal block (4P)
Remote
controller
wiring
Wiring
through-holes
Clamping position
Inter-unit Secure the ground wire
wiring sheath and inter-unit wiring with Remote
both edges aligned.
controller
Ground wire wiring terminal
block
(Length of sheath to peel back)
Ground Clamp (4)

wire (P1 • P2)
80~100mm
Cut off any

10~15mm
3 2 1 Terminal box lid

excess
3 2 material after
1
Electrical Wiring
tightening the Diagram Nameplate
inter-unit wiring
and ground (Inside of terminal box lid)
Ground terminal wire together.
<<Inter-unit wiring (strong electric) / ground wire>>
Fig. 25
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
• When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the
wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the terminal box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
• When attaching the terminal box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
• After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (pro-
cured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the terminal box.)
• Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
16
C : 3P177351-2D
Installation 131
Processing method of wiring through-holes
Inter-unit wiring,
ground wire, or remote
controller cord Wiring through-holes
Sealing pad (Small) (13)

Putty or thermal
insulation material
(procured locally)
• Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units.
Attach insulation sleeve
Round crimp-style terminal

Fig. 26 Electric wire
When none are available, follow the instructions below.
• Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.
Connect wires of the Do not connect wires Do not connect wires

same gauge to both of the same gauge to of different gauges.
side. one side.
Fig. 27
(Looseness in the connection may cause overheating.)
• In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections, and fix the wires so
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
• Use the correct screwdriver for tightening the terminal screws. If the blade of screwdriver is too small, the
head of the screw might be damaged, and the screw will not be properly tightened.
• If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
Tightening torque (N·m)
Terminal block for remote controller 0.79 to 0.97
Terminal block for wiring the units 1.18 to 1.44
9. WIRING EXAMPLE
For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor units.
Confirm the system type.
• Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 28)
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 29)
• 2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 30)
17
3P177351-2D
132 Installation
Pair type Group control

Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply Main power supply
Main switch Main switch Main switch Main switch
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse
2
Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit Outdoor unit
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
P1 P2 P 1 P2
Remote controller
(Optional accessory)
Remote controller Fig. 29
Fig. 28
2 remote controllers control

Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
P1 P2 P1 P2
Remote Remote
controller controller
(Slave)
(Optional accessories) Fig. 30
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal symbol.
2. In case of group control, perform the remote controller wiring to the master unit when connecting to the
simultaneous operation system. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
3. For group control remote controller, choose the remote controller that suits the indoor unit which has the
most functions (as attached swing flap)
4. When controlling the simultaneous operation system with 2 remote controllers, connect it to the master
unit. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)
18
3P177351-2D
Installation 133
10. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL

Caution:
With a wireless remote controller, field setting and test operation cannot be performed without attach-
ing the decoration panel.
<If performing a test run without attaching the decoration panel, read “11. FIELD SETTING” and “12. TEST
OPERATION” first.>
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space between the unit body and decoration
panel.
11. FIELD SETTING

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
• Check that the outdoor unit has been wired properly.

Make sure the terminal box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
Field setting must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation conditions.
• Setting can be made by changing the “Mode No.”, “FIRST CODE NO.” and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• For setting procedures and instructions, see “Field settings” provided with the remote controller.
11-1 Setting ceiling height

• Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height “Table 5”.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01”.)
Table 5
FCQ - KVEA
Mode No. FIRST SECOND
100·125· Note) 1 CODE NO. CODE NO.
71 type
140 type
Standard · All
≤ 2.7 ≤ 3.2 01
Ceiling round outlet
13 (23) 0
height (m) High ceiling 1 2.7 - 3 3.2 - 3.6 02
High ceiling 2 3 - 3.5 3.6 - 4.2 03
Note:
1. “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an individual unit, set
the internal mode number in parentheses.
2. The figure of the ceiling height is for the all round outlet. For the settings for four-direction (part of corner
closed off), three-direction and two-direction outlets, see the installation manual and technical guide sup-
plied with the separately sold closure material kit.
11-2 Setting of air direction

• See the installation manual included with the sealing material of air discharge outlet kit, sold separately and
technical guide, for ceiling height settings for two and three-direction air discharge. (The SECOND CODE
NO. is factory set to “01” (all round outlet) before shipping.)
11-3 Settings for Mounting Options

• When installing an option sold separately, refer to the installation manual provided to the option.
19
C : 3P177351-2D
134 Installation
11-4 Setting air filter sign

• Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filter signs to display the time to clean air filters.
• Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to “Table 6” depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for filter contamination-light.)
Table 6 2
Spacing time of display air filter FIRST CODE SECOND
Setting Mode No.
sign (long life type) NO. CODE NO.
Air filter contamination-
Approx. 2500 hrs 01
light
0
Air filter contamination- 10 (20)
Approx. 1250 hrs
heavy 02
No Display 3
Note:
1. “Mode No.” setting is done in a batch for the group. To make or confirm settings for an individual unit, set
the internal mode number in parentheses.
2. Make settings for “No Display” in cases where no cleaning display is required, e.g., at the time of regular
maintenance servicing.
• The air conditioner is provided with a long life filter as a standard accessory. Explain to the customer the
necessity of cleaning the filter periodically along with the set time for filter cleaning for the prevention of
clogging.
When using wireless remote controllers

• When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary. Refer to
the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.
11-5 When implementing group control

• When using as a pair unit, you may start/stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
• In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote con-
troller.
• Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as possible.
Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2 Outdoor unit 3
Indoor unit 1 Indoor unit 2 Indoor unit 3
Group control remote controller

Fig. 31
Wiring Method
(1) Remove the terminal box lid. (See ‘‘8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK’’.)
(2) Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) inside the terminal box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 29 and Table 4)
11-6 Control by 2 Remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

• When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to “MAIN” and the other to “SUB”.
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, work-
ing from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to “S”. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to “M”.) (Refer to Fig. 33)
20
3P177351-2D
Installation 135
Upper part of
remote controller S
(Factory setting) M
Remote
controller
(Only one remote PC board
S
controller needs M
Lower part of to be changed if
remote controller factory settings
Insert the screwdriver here have remained
and gently work off the untoched.)
upper part of remote controller. Fig. 32 Fig. 33
Wiring Method (See ‘‘8. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK’’.)

(3) Remove the terminal box lid.
(4) Add remote controller 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the terminal
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 30 and Table 4)
12. TEST OPERATION

CAUTION
When performing field setting or test operation without attaching the decoration panel, do not
touch the drain pump. This may cause electric shock.
Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUC-
TION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.” .
• After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and electric wiring, conduct test operation
accordingly to protect the unit.
• Check that the outdoor unit has been wired properly.
• Check that the terminal box lid of the indoor unit is closed and that the outer plate and piping cover of the
outdoor unit are closed as well.
• Clean the decoration panel and interior of the indoor unit on completion of refrigerant piping, drain piping,
and electric wiring work.
• Refer to the installation manual provided to the outdoor unit, and perform the test operation of the air conditioner.
• If the decoration panel is mounted at the time of test operation, check the operation of the swing flap of the
decoration panel.
• If the interior finishing work has been still on the way on completion of test operation, explain to the cus-
tomer not to operate the air conditioner for the protection of the indoor unit until the interior finishing work
is completed.
If the air conditioner is operated, substances generated from the paint and glue of the interior finishing will
contaminate the indoor unit, thus resulting in water splashing or leakage.
• If an error occurs and the air conditioner does not operate, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
• On completion of test operation, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button to set the air condi-
tioner to “ ” mode and check that the error code is set to “00” (=normal).
If the error code is other than “00”, refer to the following troubleshooting information.
• The air conditioner will return to normal run mode if the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button is pressed
four times.
• Perform the trial operation of the air conditioner after mounting the decoration panel if the wireless remote
controller is used.
Mode change Four times
Normal operation Test run
Once
Once On
Fo ce
(4 s min.) Once ur
tim
es
Field settings Inspection
21
3P177351-2D
136 Installation
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit in
inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is “00”. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than “00”, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
NOTE
• If a malfunction is preventing operation, refer to the malfunction diagnoses below.
2
12-1 Cautions for servicing
With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
• If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner.
a malfunction shown in the table below may happened.
Remote controller display Malfunction
• Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
• Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
• Indoor PC board faulty
No display
• Wrong remote controller conection wiring
• Remote controller faulty
• Fuse faulty
88*
88 flashing • Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
*After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display “88”. This is not a
problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
■ Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the Malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referring to the table
on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit no with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
(Refer also to the operation manual attached to the wireless remote controller)
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the Malfunction code list looking for the Malfunction code which can be
found by following procedures. (NOTE 2)
(1) Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button, “ ” is displayed and “ 0 ” flashes.
(2) Press the PROGRAMMING TIME button and find the unit No. which stopped due to trouble.
Number of beeps 3 short beeps Perform all the following operations
1 short beep Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the Malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
• A long beep indicate the Malfunction code.
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
“ ” starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble his-
tory disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code “00”(normal).
The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
Caution:
Check the items in “2. Items to be checked at time of delivery” on page 4 after a test operation.
22
3P177351-2D
Installation 137
12-2 Malfunction code list

• For places where the Malfunction code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the system
continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
• Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the Malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
Code Malfunction/Remarks
A0 Safety device operates
A1 Indoor unit’s PC board faulty
A3 Drain water level abnormal
A6 Indoor fan motor overloaded, overcurrent or locked
AF Humidifier faulty
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Only the air cleaner does not function.
Type set improper
AJ
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
C4 Sensor for heat exchanger temperature is fault
C9 Sensor for suction air temperature is fault
CC Humidity sensor abnormal
Sensor for remote controller is fault
CJ The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is
possible.
E0 Action of safety device (outdoor unit)
E1 Outdoor unit’s PC board faulty
E3 High pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
E4 Low pressure abnormal (outdoor unit)
E5 Compressor motor lock malfunction
Outdoor fan motor lock malfunction
E7
Outdoor fan instantaneous overcurrent malfunction
E9 Electronic expansion valve faulty (outdoor unit)
F3 Discharge pipe temperature abnormal (outdoor unit)
H3 High pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
H4 Low pressure switch faulty (outdoor unit)
H7 Outdoor motor position signal malfunction
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
H9
Equipment operation in response to errors will vary according to model.
JA Discharge pipe pressure sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
JC Suction pipe pressure sensor faulty (outdoor unit)
J1 Pressure sensor system error (batch) (outdoor unit)
J2 Power sensor system error (outdoor unit)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3
J5 Suction pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J6
J7
J8 Liquid piping temperature sensor system error (outdoor unit)
J9 Intake temperature sensor error (outdoor unit)
23
3P177351-2D
138 Installation
L1 Inverter system error (outdoor unit)

Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
L4
Inverter cooling defect.
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
L5
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor. 2
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
L8
Possible electrical overload in the compressor or cut line in the compressor motor.
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
L9
Compressor possibly locked.
LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor unit)
P1 Open-phase (outdoor unit)
P3 P-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
Type set improper (outdoor unit)
PJ
Capacity data is wrongly preset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
U0 Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two phase of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
U2
Includes the defect in 52C.
Transmission error (indoor unit – outdoor unit)
U4
UF Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
Transmission error (indoor unit – remote controller)
U5
Transmission is improper between the indoor unit and the remote controller.
Malfunction in transmission between main and sub remote controls.
U8
(Malfunction in sub remote controller.)
Miss setting for multi system
UA Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
unit’s PC board)
UC Central control address overlapping
UJ Peripheral equipment transmission fault
24
3P177351-2D
Installation 139
2.2 FFQ25B8 / 35B8 / 50B8 / 60B8V1B (Operation / installation manual)

2.2.1 Operation manual
1
1
A 1
5
6
2
3 7
4
2 8 3 9
1 2
3 4
5 6
C : 4PW23701-1B
140 Installation
FFQ25B8V1B
FFQ35B8V1B
FFQ50B8V1B Split system air conditioners Operation manual
FFQ60B8V1B
CONTENTS Page NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF PARTS (See figure 2) 2

What to do before operation .............................................................. 1 1 Indoor unit
Important information regarding the refrigerant used ........................ 1 2 Discharged air

3 Inlet air
Names and functions of parts............................................................ 1
4 Remote controller
Operation range................................................................................. 1
5 Connection electric wire
Installation site................................................................................... 2 6 Refrigerant piping
Name and function of each switch and display on 7 Drain pipe
the remote controller.......................................................................... 2 8 Outdoor unit
Operation procedure.......................................................................... 2 9 Ground wire
Wire to ground outdoor unit to prevent electrical shocks.
Optimum operation ............................................................................ 2
Not a malfunction of the air conditioner ............................................. 2 ■ Never let the indoor unit and the remote controller get
Troubleshooting ................................................................................. 4 wet.
It may cause an electric shock or a fire.
Maintenance ...................................................................................... 4 ■ Never use flammable spray such as hair spray,
lacquer or paint near the unit.
It may cause a fire.
THANK YOU FOR PURCHASING THIS DAIKIN AIR
■ Never replace a fuse with that of a wrong ampere
CONDITIONER. CAREFULLY READ THIS OPERATION
rating or other wires when the fuse blows out.
MANUAL BEFORE USING THE AIR CONDITIONER. IT
WILL TELL YOU HOW TO USE THE UNIT PROPERLY Use of wire or copper wire may cause the unit to
AND HELP YOU IF ANY TROUBLE OCCURS. AFTER break down or cause a fire.
READING THE MANUAL, FILE IT AWAY FOR FUTURE ■ Never touch the air outlet or the horizontal blades
REFERENCE. while the swing flap is in operation.
Fingers may become caught or the unit may break down.
■ Never insert objects such as sticks into the air inlet or
outlet. It is dangerous for an object to touch the fan
WHAT TO DO BEFORE OPERATION (See figure 1)
when it is turning at high speed.
This operation manual is for the following systems with standard ■ Never remove the fan guard of the outdoor unit.
control. Before initiating operation, contact your Daikin dealer for the The rotating fan at high speed without the guard is
operation manual that corresponds to your system. very dangerous.
■ Never inspect or service the unit by yourself.
NOTE These units can be controlled by a remote controller.
Ask a qualified service person to perform this work.
Refer to the manual of the remote controller for more
information.
OPERATION RANGE
If your installation has a customized control system, ask your Daikin
dealer for the operation that corresponds to your system. If operating outside the following conditions, safety devices may
activate, rendering the air conditioner inoperable or may cause the
A Pair system indoor unit to sweat.
The setting temperature range of the remote controller is 16°C~32°C.
1 Unit with remote controller
■ Heat pump type °C °C

This system provides cooling, heating, automatic, and fan
operation modes. RKS25-35-50-60 °C DB 21~32
≤80% –10~46(*)
RXS25-35-50-60 °C WB 14~23
■ Straight cooling type
This system provides cooling, and fan operation modes.
°C °C
IMPORTANT INFORMATION REGARDING THE °C DB –10~24
RXS25-35 °C DB 10~30
REFRIGERANT USED °C WB –15~20
RXS50-60 °C DB 10~30 °C DB –14~24

This product contains fluorinated greenhouse gases covered by the °C WB –15~18
Kyoto Protocol.
(DB=dry bulb, WB=wet bulb, =cooling, =heating, =indoor,
Refrigerant type: R410A
=outdoor, °C =temperature, =humidity)
GWP(1) value: 1975
(*) For Australian models: –5~46°C
(1) GWP = global warming potential
Periodical inspections for refrigerant leaks may be required
depending on European or local legislation. Please contact your local
dealer for more information.
FFQ25~60B8V1B Operation manual

Split system air conditioners
C : 4PW23701-1B 1
Installation 141
INSTALLATION SITE OPTIMUM OPERATION

Observe the following precautions to ensure the system operates
■ Never place anything under the indoor unit that you properly.
don't want to get wet.
■ Adjust the air outlet properly and avoid direct air flow to room
The unit may sweat when the humidity is over 80% or
inhabitants.
when the drain outlet is clogged.
■ Adjust the room temperature properly for a comfortable
■ Never place other heating equipment directly beneath
environment. Avoid excessive heating or cooling.
the indoor unit. Subject to deformation caused by
heat. ■ Prevent direct sunlight from entering a room during cooling
operation by using curtains or blinds.
■ Do not place TV, radio, stereo, etc. within 1 meter from
the indoor unit and remote controller. ■ Keep doors and windows closed. If the doors and windows
Doing so may cause interference in the picture or remain open, room air will flow out and decrease the effect of
sound. cooling and heating.
■ Never place objects near the air inlet and the air outlet of the
■ Do not place objects in direct proximity of the outdoor unit and unit. It may retard effectiveness or cause operation to stop.
do not let leaves and other debris accumulate around the unit.
■ Turn off the main power supply switch when not using for long
Leaves are a hotbed for small animals which can enter the unit.
periods of time. Electricity is consumed as long as the switch is
Once in the unit, such animals can cause malfunctions, smoke
on. Turn off the main power supply switch in order to save
or fire when making contact with electrical parts.
energy. Turn on the main power supply switch 6 hours before
restarting operation in order to ensure smooth operation. (Refer
to "Maintenance" on page 4.)
NAME AND FUNCTION OF EACH SWITCH AND
■ When the display shows " " (TIME TO CLEAN AIR
DISPLAY ON THE REMOTE CONTROLLER
FILTER), have a qualified service person to clean the filters.
(Refer to "Maintenance" on page 4.)
Refer to the operation manual delivered with the remote
controller.
NOT A MALFUNCTION OF THE AIR CONDITIONER
OPERATION PROCEDURE The following symptoms do not indicate air conditioner malfunction.
The system does not operate
■ If a function that is not available is selected, the ■ The system does not restart immediately after the ON/OFF
message NOT AVAILABLE will appear. button is pressed.
If the OPERATION lamp lights, the system is in its normal
■ Operating procedure varies with heat pump type and
operating condition.
straight cooling type. Contact your Daikin dealer to
It does not restart immediately because one of its safety devices
confirm your system type.
actuates to prevent the system from being overloaded.
■ To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch The system will turn on again automatically after three minutes.
6 hours before operation.
■ The system does not restart immediately when the
■ If the main power supply is turned off during TEMPERATURE SETTING button is returned to its former
operation, operation will restart automatically after the position after pushing.
power turns back on again. It does not restart immediately because one of its safety devices
actuates to prevent the system from being overloaded.
The system will turn on again automatically after three minutes.
NOTE Set the temperature within the ranges mentioned
under "Operation range" on page 1. ■ The system does not start when the display shows " "
(EXTERNAL CONTROL ICON) and it flashes for a few seconds
after pressing an operation button.
Precautions for group control system or two remote This is because the system is controlled or disabled by another
controller control system controller with a higher priority.
When the display flashes, it indicates that the system cannot be
This system provides two other control systems beside individual controlled by this indoor unit.
control (one remote controller controls one indoor unit) system. ■ The system does not start immediately after the power supply is
Confirm the following if your unit is of the following control system turned on.
type. Wait one minute until the micro computer is prepared for
■ Group control system operation.
One remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
All indoor units are equally set.
■ Two remote controller control system
Two remote controllers control one indoor unit (In case of group
control system, one group of indoor units). The unit is
individually operated.
NOTE Contact your Daikin dealer in case of changing the

combination or setting of group control and two remote
controller control systems.
Operation manual FFQ25~60B8V1B

2 Split system air conditioners
4PW23701-1B
142 Installation
■ The outdoor unit has stopped. Noise of air conditioners

This is because the room temperature has reached the set ■ A ringing sound is heard after the unit is started. This sound is
temperature. The unit switches to fan operation. generated by the tempearture regulator operation. It will quiet
" " (EXTERNAL CONTROL ICON) is displayed on the down after about a minute.
remote controller and the actual operation is different from the ■ A continuous low "hissing" sound is heard when the system is in
remote controller setting. COOLING or DEFROST OPERATION.
For multi split models, the micro computer executes the following This is the sound of refrigerant gas flowing through both indoor
control depending on the operation mode of other indoor units.
- Before you start to operate, the other indoor unit(s) is (are)
and outdoor units. 2
■ A "hissing" sound which is heard at the start or immediately after
already operating. When the operation mode of this unit is
the stop of operation or which is heard at the start or
different from your choice, the indoor unit of your room may
immediately after the stop of DEFROST OPERATION.
be put in waiting condition. (Fan: Stop, Horizontal flap:
This is the noise of refrigerant caused by flow stop and flow
Horizontal position)
change.
Operation mode ■ A continuous low "swishing" sound is heard when the system is
Your room Other room(s) in COOLING OPERATION or at a stop.
Cooling Dry Fan only Heating The noise is heard when the drain pump is in operation.
Cooling O O O W ■ A "squeaking" sound is heard when the system is in operation or
Dry O O O W after the stop of operation.
Expansion and contraction of plastic parts caused by
Fan only O O O W
temperature change makes this noise.
Heating W W W O
Dust from the units
O: your unit can operate
W: your unit in waiting mode ■ Dust may blow out from the unit after starting operation from
long resting time. Dust absorbed by the unit blows out.
- When the total cooling capacity of all indoor units which are
operating is beyond the capacity limit of the outdoor unit, The units give off odours
your indoor unit will be put in waiting condition. (Fan and ■ The unit absorbs the smell of rooms, furniture, cigarettes, etc.,
horizontal flap: Same as setting: (cooling only model only)) and then emits them.
- After cooling mode operation of the unit of your room, when
other unit(s) start to operate, the unit of your room may The liquid crystal display of the remote controller shows " "
operate as follows: Fan: L tab, Horizontal flap: Horizontal ■ Happens immediately after the main power supply switch is
position. turned on.
■ The fan speed is different from the setting. Pressing the fan Shows that the remote controller is in normal condition.
speed contol button does not change the fan speed. Continues temporarily.
When the room temperature reaches the set temperature in
heating mode, the capacity supply from the outdoor unit has
stopped and the indoor unit operates in fan only mode (L tab). In
case of multi split, the indoor unit alternately operates fan stop
and fan only mode (L tab).
This is to prevent the cool air from being blown directly onto
anyone present in the room.
Air blow direction is not as specified
■ Actual air blow direction is not as shown on the remote
controller.
■ Automatic swing setting does not work.
Refer to the manual of the remote controller.
White mist comes out of a unit
■ When humidity is high during cooling operation (In oily or dusty
places).
If the inside of an indoor unit is extremely contaminated, the
temperature distribution inside a room becomes uneven. It is
necessary to clean the inside of the indoor unit. Ask your Daikin
dealer for details on cleaning the unit. This operation requires a
qualified service person.
■ When the system is changed over to HEATING OPERATION
after DEFROST OPERATION.
Moisture generated by DEFROST becomes steam and exits.

4PW23701-1B 3
Installation 143
TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE
If one of the following malfunctions occurs, take the measures shown IMPORTANT
below and contact your Daikin dealer. ■ ONLY A QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSON IS ALLOWED TO
The system must be repaired by a qualified service person. PERFORM MAINTENANCE.
■ If a safety device such as a fuse, a breaker, or an earth leakage ■ BEFORE OBTAINING ACCESS TO TERMINAL DEVICES, ALL
breaker frequently actuates, or ON/OFF switch does not POWER SUPPLY CIRCUITS MUST BE INTERRUPTED.
properly work. ■ DO NOT USE WATER OR AIR OF 50°C OR HIGHER FOR
Measure: Turn off the main power switch. CLEANING AIR FILTERS AND OUTSIDE PANELS.
■ If water leaks from unit. ■ WHEN CLEANING THE HEAT EXCHANGER, BE SURE TO
Measure: Stop the operation. REMOVE THE SWITCHBOX, FAN MOTOR AND DRAIN PUMP.
WATER OR DETERGENT MAY DETERIORATE THE
■ If the display " " (INSPECTION), "UNIT No.", and the INSULATION OF ELECTRIC COMPONENTS AND RESULT IN
OPERATION lamp flashes and the "MALFUNCTION CODE" BURN-OUT OF THESE COMPONENTS.
appears.
Measure: Notify your Daikin dealer and inform him/her of the See figure 2
display. 1 Indoor unit
If the system does not operate properly, except for the above 2 Discharged air
mentioned case, and none of the above mentioned malfunctions are 3 Inlet air
evident, investigate the system according to the following
4 Remote controller
procedures.
5 Connection electric wire
If the system does not operate at all.
6 Refrigerant piping
■ Check if there is a power failure.
7 Drain pipe
Wait until power is restored. If power failure occurs during
operation, the system automatically restarts immediately after 8 Outdoor unit
the power supply recovers. 9 Ground wire
Wire to ground outdoor unit to prevent electrical shocks.
■ Check if the fuse has blown or breaker has been tripped.
Change the fuse or set the breaker.
How to clean the air filter
If the system stops operating after operation is complete.
■ Check if the air inlet or outlet of outdoor or indoor unit is blocked
Clean the air filter when the display shows " " (TIME TO
by obstacles.
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated. CLEAN AIR FILTER).
■ Check if the air filter is clogged. Increase the frequency of cleaning if the unit is installed in a room
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air filter. where the air is extremely contaminated.
The system operates but it does not sufficiently cool or heat. (As a yardstick for yourself, consider cleaning the filter once a half
■ If the air inlet or outlet of the indoor or the outdoor unit is blocked year.)
with obstacles. If dirt becomes impossible to clean, change the air filter. (Air filter for
Remove the obstacle and make it well-ventilated. exchange is optional.)
■ If the air filter is clogged. 1. Open the suction grill
Ask a qualified service person to clean the air filter. Push both knobs simultaneously and carefully lower the grille.
■ If the set temperature is not proper. (Refer to the manual of the (Identical procedure for closing.) (See figure 3)
remote controller) 2. Remove the air filters
■ If the FAN SPEED CONTROL button is set to LOW SPEED. Pull the hook of the air filter out diagonally downward and remove the
(Refer to the manual of the remote controller) filter. (See figure 4)
■ If the air flow angle is not proper. (Refer to the manual of the 3. Clean the air filter
remote controller) Use a vacuum cleaner or wash the air filter with water.
When the air filter is very dirty, use a soft brush and neutral
■ If the doors or the windows are open. Shut doors or windows to detergent.
prevent wind from coming in.
■ If direct sunlight enters the room (when cooling).
Use curtains or blinds.
■ When there are too many inhabitants in the room. Cooling effect
decreases if heat gain of the room is too large.
■ If the heat source of the room is excessive (when cooling). Remove water and dry in the shade.
Cooling effect decreases if heat gain of the room is too large. 4. Fix the air filter
Attach the air filter to the suction grill by hanging it to the projected
portion above the suction grill.
Press the bottom of the air filter against the projections on the bottom
of the grille to snap the air filter into its place. (See figure 5)
5. Shut the air inlet grill
Refer to item No. 1.
6. After turning power on, press the FILTER SIGN RESET button
The "TIME TO CLEAN AIR FILTER" display disappears.
(For details, refer to the operation manual of the outdoor unit.)
NOTE Do not remove the air filter except when cleaning.

Unnecessary handling may damage the filter.
Operation manual FFQ25~60B8V1B

4 Split system air conditioners
4PW23701-1B
144 Installation
How to clean the air outlet and outside panels Disposal requirements
■ Clean with a soft cloth. Dismantling of the unit, treatment of the refrigerant, of oil and of other
■ When it is difficult to remove stains, use water or neutral parts must be done in accordance with relevant local and national
detergent. legislation.
■ When the blade is extremely contaminated, remove it as below Your air conditioning product is marked with this symbol.
and clean it. This means that electrical and electronic products shall
NOTE ■ Do not use gasoline, benzene, thinner, polishing

not be mixed with unsorted household waste. 2
powder nor liquid insecticide. It may cause Do not try to dismantle the system yourself: the dismantling of the air
discolouring or warping. conditioning system, treatment of the refrigerant, of oil and of other
■ Do not let the indoor unit get wet. It may cause parts must be done by a qualified installer in accordance with
electric shock or fire. relevant local and national legislation.
Air conditioners must be treated at a specialized treatment facility for
How to clean the suction grill re-use, recycling and recovery. By ensuring this product is disposed
of correctly, you will help to prevent potential negative consequences
1. Open the suction grill for the environment and human health. Please contact the installer or
Push both knobs simultaneously and carefully lower the grille. local authority for more information.
(Identical procedure for closing.) (See figure 3)
Batteries must be removed from the remote controller and disposed
2. Detach the suction grill
of separately in accordance with relevant local and national
Open the suction grill 45 degrees and lift it upward. (See figure 6) legislation.
3. Detach the air filter
See the figure in item No. 2 in chapter "How to clean the air filter" on
page 4.
4. Clean the suction grill
Wash it with a soft brush and neutral
detergent, and dry thoroughly.
NOTE When the suction grill is very dirty, use a typical

kitchen cleaner and let it sit for about 10 minutes.
Than, wash it with water.
5. Fix the air filter

See the figure in item No. 4 in chapter "How to clean the air filter" on
page 4.
6. Re-attach the suction grill
See item No. 2.
7. Close the suction grill
See item No. 1.
Start-up after a long stop

■ Confirm the following.
- Check that the air inlet and outlet are not blocked. Remove
any obstacle.
- Check if the earth is connected.
■ Clean the air filter and outside panels.
- After cleaning the air filter, make sure to attach it.
■ Turn on the main power supply switch.
- The control panel display lights when the power is turned on.
- To protect the unit, turn on the main power switch at least
6 hours before operation.
What to do when stopping the system for a long period

■ Turn on FAN OPERATION for a half day and dry the unit.
- Refer to the manual of the remote controller.
■ Cut off the power supply.
- When the main power switch is turned on, some wattage is
being consumed even if the system is not operating.
- The remote controller display is turned off when the main
power switch is turned off.

4PW23701-1B 5
Installation 145

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1x 1x 8x 1x 4x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 1x
1
3 4 5
2
1 2 3
50~100
1 3 1
1
2
5 4
2 3
4
≤45 ≤45
2 3 4 5
7 8
5
295
2
1
3
4
1
585~660
2
≥1500
700
2 1 2
575
533
≥1500* ≥1500*
≥2500
6 2
533 4 8
575 3
585~660 2
9
≥1500*
≥1500* 700 1
585~660* 2
1
1
8
2 2
180
7
≥1500*
≥1500* ≤20 ≤20
6 7 9
12
0
3 4 5 6
1
2
10 2 13
≥100
3
≥100
11 12 13
16
4 15
1
≤300 1-1.5 m 2 S
2 M
205 ≤545
1
≤750
3 S
M
6 5 4 3
14 15 16
4PW23700-1A
146 Installation
18 19
1
17 2
1 2 3
2
1 1 2 3
P1 P2
P1 P2
6
2
18
20 21
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
3 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
7 8 8 5
L N 4
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
6 6 6
17 20 21
22
3 4
A
D 1 2
12
10~
15
mm
13
7
14 15 8
12
9
5 6
B
13
10~15 mm C
7 10 11
22
C : 4PW23700-1A
Installation 147
FFQ25B8V1B
FFQ35B8V1B
FFQ50B8V1B
Split System air conditioners Installation manual
FFQ60B8V1B
CONTENTS Page Precautions
Before installation.............................................................................. 1 ■ Do not install or operate the unit in rooms mentioned below.
- Places with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapour or spray like in
Selecting installation site................................................................... 2
kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
Preparations before installation......................................................... 2 - Where corrosive gas like sulphurous gas exists. (Copper
tubing and brazed spots may corrode.)
Indoor unit installation ....................................................................... 3
- Where volatile flammable gas like thinner or gasoline is used.
Refrigerant piping work ..................................................................... 3 - Where machines generating electromagnetic waves exist.
Drain piping work .............................................................................. 4 (Control system may malfunction.)
- Where the air contains high levels of salt such as air near the
Electric wiring work ........................................................................... 5 ocean and where voltage fluctuates a lot (e.g. in factories).
Wiring example and how to set the remote controller ....................... 5 Also in vehicles or vessels.
Wiring example ................................................................................. 6 ■ When selecting the installation site, use the supplied paper
pattern for installation.
Field setting....................................................................................... 7
■ Do not install accessories on the casing directly. Drilling holes in
Installation of the decoration panel ................................................... 7 the casing may damage electrical wires and consequently cause
fire.
Test operation.................................................................................... 7
Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included with your unit.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY BEFORE
See figure 1
INSTALLATION. KEEP THIS MANUAL IN A HANDY
PLACE FOR FUTURE REFERENCE. 1 Drain hose
IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR ATTACHMENT OF 2 Metal clamp
EQUIPMENT OR ACCESSORIES COULD RESULT IN 3 Washer for hanger bracket
ELECTRIC SHOCK, SHORT-CIRCUIT, LEAKS, FIRE OR
4 Paper pattern for installation
OTHER DAMAGE TO THE EQUIPMENT. BE SURE ONLY
TO USE ACCESSORIES MADE BY DAIKIN WHICH ARE 5 Srews (M5) for paper pattern for installation
SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED FOR USE WITH THE 6 Insulation for gas pipe fitting
EQUIPMENT AND HAVE THEM INSTALLED BY A 7 Insulation for liquid pipe fitting
PROFESSIONAL.
8 Large sealing pad
IF UNSURE OF INSTALLATION PROCEDURES OR USE, 9 Small sealing pad
ALWAYS CONTACT YOUR DAIKIN DEALER FOR
10 Sealing material
ADVICE AND INFORMATION.
11 Installation manual and operation manual
BEFORE INSTALLATION Optional accessories
■ When moving the unit while removing it from the carton box, be ■ There are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless.
sure to lift it by holding on to the four lifting lugs without exerting Select a remote controller according to customers request and
any pressure on other parts, especially on the swing flap, the install in an appropriate place.
refrigerant piping, drain piping, and other resin parts. Refer to catalogues and technical literature for selecting a
suitable remote controller.
■ Leave the unit inside its packaging until you reach the
installation site. Where unpacking is unavoidable, use a sling of ■ A decoration panel is also required for this indoor unit.
soft material or protective plates together with a rope when
lifting, this to avoid damage or scratches to the unit.
■ Especially, do not unfasten the packing case (top) guarding the
switch box until suspending the unit.
■ Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not
described in this manual.
■ Caution concerning refrigerant series R410A:
The connectable outdoor units must be designed exclusively for
R410A.
Installation manual FFQ25~60B8V1B

1 Split System air conditioners
C : 4PW23700-1A
148 Installation
For the following items, take special care during 3 Air flow directions
construction and check after installation is finished Select the air flow directions best suited to the room and point of
installation. (For air discharge in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary
Tick ✓ to make field settings by means of the remote controller and to
when close the air outlet(s). Refer to the installation manual of the
checked optional blocking pad kit and to "Field setting" on page 7. (See
■ Is the indoor unit fixed firmly? figure 2) ( : air flow direction)
■
Is the gas leak test finished? 1 Air discharge in 4 directions 2
It may result in insufficient cooling. 2 Air discharge in 3 directions
■ Is the unit fully insulated? 3 Air discharge in 2 directions
Condensate water may drip.
■ Does drainage flow smoothly? 4 Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the
Condensate water may drip. ceiling is strong enough to support the weight of the indoor
■ Does the power supply voltage correspond to that shown on the unit. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing
name plate? the unit.
The unit may malfunction or components may burn out.
(The installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for
■ Are wiring and piping correct? installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring reinforcing.)
The unit may malfunction or components may burn out.
Space required for installation see figure 6 ( : air flow
■ Is the unit safely grounded? direction)
Dangerous at electric leakage.
■ Is the wiring size according to specifications? 1 Air inlet
The unit may malfunction or components may burn out. 2 Air outlet
■ Is nothing blocking the air outlet or inlet of either the indoor or
outdoor units?
It may result in insufficient cooling. NOTE Leave 200 mm or more space where marked with *, on
■ Are refrigerant piping length and additional refrigerant charge sides where the air outlet is closed.
noted down?
The refrigerant charge in the system might not be clear.
Notes to the installer PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION

■ Read this manual carefully to ensure correct installation. Be 1 Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt
sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system position. (See figure 7)
and show him/her the enclosed operation manual.
1 Decoration panel dimensions
■ Explain to the customer what system is installed on the site. Be
sure to fill out the appropriate installation specifications in the 2 Ceiling opening dimensions
chapter "What to do before operation" of the outdoor unit 3 Indoor unit dimensions
operation manual. 4 Suspension bolt pitch dimensions
5 Refrigerant piping
6 Suspension bolt (x4)
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE 7 False ceiling
8 Hanger bracket
When the conditions in the ceiling are exceeding 30°C and a relative
humidity of 80%, or when fresh air is inducted into the ceiling, an
additional insulation is required (minimum 10 mm thickness, NOTE Installation is possible with a ceiling dimension of
polyethylene foam). 660 mm (marked with *). However, to achieve a ceiling-
For this unit you can select different air flow directions. It is necessary panel overlapping dimension of 20 mm, the spacing
to purchase an optional blocking pad kit to discharge the air in 2 or between the ceiling and the unit should be 45 mm or
3 directions. less. If the spacing between ceiling and the unit is over
45 mm, attach sealing material in the part marked
1 Select an installation site where the following conditions or recover the ceiling.
are fulfilled and that meets your customer's approval.
(See figure 3)
• Where optimum air distribution can be ensured.
• Where nothing blocks air passage. 1 Sealing material
• Where condensate water can be properly drained. 2 False ceiling
• Where the false ceiling is not noticeably on an incline.
• Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be
2 Make the ceiling opening needed for installation where
ensured.
applicable. (For existing ceilings.)
• Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within
the allowable limit. (Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor - Refer to the paper pattern for installation for the ceiling
unit.) opening dimensions.
• Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and - Create the ceiling opening required for installation. From the
transmission wiring at least 1 meter away from televisions and side of the opening to the casing outlet, implement the
radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those refrigerant and drain piping and wiring for remote controller
electrical appliances. (Noise may be generated depending on the (unnecessary for wireless type). Refer to each piping or
conditions under which the electric wave is generated, even if wiring section.
1 meter is kept.) - After making an opening in the ceiling, it may be necessary
to reinforce ceiling beams to keep the ceiling level and to
2 Ceiling height prevent it from vibrating. Consult the builder for details.
Install this unit where the height of bottom panel is more than
2.5 m so that the user cannot easily touch.
FFQ25~60B8V1B Installation manual

Split System air conditioners
4PW23700-1A 2
Installation 149
3 Install the suspension bolts. (Use either a M8~M10 size bolt.) REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK
Use anchors for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken
anchors or other field supplied parts for new ceilings to reinforce
the ceiling in order to bear the weight of the unit. Adjust All field piping must be provided by a licensed refrigeration
clearance from the ceiling before proceeding further. technician and must comply with the relevant local and
Installation example. (See figure 4) national codes.
1 Ceiling slab ■ For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit, refer to the installation
2 Anchor manual supplied with the outdoor unit.
3 Long nut or turn-buckle ■ Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the
4 Suspension bolt
gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, this can sometimes
result in water leakage.
5 False ceiling
(When using a heat pump, the temperature of the gas piping can
reach up to approximately 120°C. Use insulation which is
NOTE ■ All the above parts are field supplied. sufficiently resistant.)
■ For other installation than standard installation, ■ Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the
contact your Daikin dealer for details. refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30°C or RH 80%,
reinforce the refrigerant insulation (20 mm or thicker).
Condensation may form on the surface of the insulating
material.
INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ■ Before rigging tubes, check which type of refrigerant is used.
When installing optional accessories (except for the decoration ■ Use a pipe cutter and flare suitable for the used refrigerant.
panel), read also the installation manual of the optional accessories. ■ Apply ether oil or ester oil around the flare portions before
Depending on the field conditions, it may be easier to install optional connecting.
accessories before the indoor unit is installed. However, for existing ■ To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating
ceilings, install fresh air inlet component kit and branch duct before the tube, either pinch the end, or cover it with tape.
installing the unit. ■ Use copper alloy seamless pipes (ISO 1337).
1 Install the indoor unit temporarily. ■ The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
- Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to ■ Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together when
fix it securely by using a nut and washer from the upper and connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the unit.
lower sides of the hanger bracket.
1 Torque wrench
- Securing the hanger bracket (See figure 5)
2 Flare nut
1 Nut (field supply) 3 Piping union
2 Hanger bracket 4 Spanner
3 Washer (supplied with the unit)
4 Tighten (double nut)
1 2 3 4
2 Fix the paper pattern for installation. (For new ceilings only.)
- The paper pattern for installation corresponds with the ■ Do not mix anything other than the specified refrigerant, such as
measurements of the ceiling opening. Consult the builder for air, etc.., inside the refrigerant circuit.
details. ■ Refer to the table below for the dimensions of flare nuts and the
- The centre of the ceiling opening is indicated on the paper appropriate tightening torque. (Overtightening may damage the
pattern for installation. The centre of the unit is indicated on flare and cause leaks.)
the paper pattern for installation.
Flare dimension A
- After removing the packaging material from the paper pattern Pipe gauge Tightening torque (mm) Flare shape
for installation, attach the paper pattern for installation to the
14.2~17.2 N•m
unit with the attached screws as shown in figure 8. Ø6.4 8.7~9.1 90°±2
(144~176 kgf•cm)
45 ±
° 2
1 Paper pattern for installation (supplied with the unit) 32.7~39.9 N•m A
Ø9.5 12.8~13.2
(333~407 kgf•cm)
2 Screws (supplied with the unit) R0.4~0.8
49.5~60.3 N•m
Ø12.7 16.2~16.6
3 Adjust the unit to the right position for installation. (504~616 kgf•cm)
(See "Preparations before installation" on page 2.)

NOTE Not recommended but in case of emergency.
4 Check if the unit is horizontally levelled. You must use a torque wrench but if you are obliged to
- Do not install the unit tilted. The indoor unit is equipped with a install the unit without a torque wrench, you may follow
built-in drain pump and float switch. (If the unit is tilted the installation method mentioned below.
against condensate flow, the float switch may malfunction After the work is finished, make sure to check that
and cause water to drip.) there is no gas leak.
- Check if the unit is levelled at all four corners with a water
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a
level or a water-filled vinyl tube as shown in figure 9.
spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
1 Water level suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten
2 Vinyl tube
the flare nut within the angle shown below.
5 Remove the paper pattern for installation. (For new ceilings Further tightening Recommended arm
only.) Pipe size angle length of tool
Ø6.4 60~90° ±150 mm
Ø9.5 60~90° ±200 mm
Ø12.7 30~60° ±250 mm

4PW23700-1A
150 Installation
■ When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare (only inside) • Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2
with ether oil or ester oil and initially tighten by hand 3 or spots to prevent any possible water leakage due to dew
4 turns before tightening firmly. condensation.
Coat the flare section (only inside) with ester oil or ether oil. • Indoor drain pipe
• Drain socket
• Wrap the supplied sealing pad over the clamp and
drain hose to insulate. 1
1 Metal clamp (supplied with the unit)

2
2
2 Large sealing pad (supplied with the unit)
■ Check the pipe connector for gas leaks, then insulate it as ≤4 mm
shown in figure 10.
1 Liquid pipe How to perform piping (See figure 14)

2 Gas pipe 1 Ceiling slab
3 Insulation for fitting of liquid line (supplied with the unit) 2 Hanger bracket
4 Insulation for fitting of gas line (supplied with the unit) 3 Drain raising pipe
5 Clamps (use 2 clamps per insulation) 4 Raising section
6 Small sealing pad (supplied with the unit) 5 Drain hose (supplied with the unit)
6 Metal clamp (supplied with the unit)
■ Wrap the sealing pad only around the insulation for the joints on
the gas piping side.
Precautions
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the
piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping ■ Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 545 mm.
may cause condensation or burns if touched. ■ Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit
and no more than 300 mm from the unit.
■ If the refrigerant gas leaks during the work, ventilate the area. A
toxic gas is emitted by the refrigerant gas being exposed to a NOTE ■ The incline of attached drain hose should be
fire. 75 mm or less so that the drain socket does not
■ Finally make sure there is no refrigerant gas leak. A toxic gas have to stand additional force.
may be released by the refrigerant gas leaking indoor and being ■ To ensure a downward slope of 1:100, install
exposed to flames from an area heater, cooking stove, etc. hanging bars every 1 to 1.5 m.
■ If unifying multiple drain pipes, install the pipes as
shown in figure 11. Select converging drain pipes
DRAIN PIPING WORK whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity
of the unit.
Rig the drain piping as shown in figure and take measures against 1 T-joint converging drain pipes
condensation. Improperly rigged piping could lead to leaks and
eventually wet furniture and belongings.
1 After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows
smoothly.
1-1.5 m 1 ■ Open the water inlet lid, add approximately 2 l of water
2 gradually and check the drainage flow.
Method of adding water. See figure 12.
1 Hanging bar 1 Drain pipe
2 ≥1/100 gradient 2 Service drain outlet with rubber plug. Use this outlet to drain
water from the drain pan.
1 Install the drain pipes.
3 Plastic container for pouring
• Keep piping as short as possible and slope it downwards so that
air may not remain trapped inside the pipe.
• Keep pipe size equal to or greater than that of the connecting ■ Drain piping connections
pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 20 mm, outside diameter Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes
26 mm). that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might
• Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode
tighten the clamp securely within the portion of a grey tape. the heat exchanger.
• Tighten the clamp until the screw head is less then 4 mm from the ■ Keep in mind that it will become the cause of getting
hose. drain pipe blocked if water collects on drain pipe.
1 Metal clamp
(supplied with the unit) 1 When electric wiring work is finished
2
2 Grey tape 3
(field supply) Check drainage flow during COOL running, explained in "Test
3 Drain hose operation" on page 7.
(supplied with the unit)
• Insulate the drain hose inside the building.

• If the drain hose cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, fit the hose
with drain raising piping (field supply).

C : 4PW23700-1A 4
Installation 151
Specifications for field wire

When electric wiring work is not finished
■ Remove the switch box lid and connect the power supply to Wire Size (mm2) Length
the terminals.
Between (1) (2)
See figure 17. H05VV-U4G 2,5 —
indoor units
Unit-Remote Vinyl cord with sheath
1 Switch box lid 0.75~1.25 Max. 500 m(4)
controller or cable (2 wires)(3)
2 Remove the switch box lid (take off 2 screws)
Wiring to ground Ground wire conform
2.0 —
3 Power supply terminal block terminal with local regulations
(1) Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection.
4 DO NOT CONNECT
(2) Run transmission wiring between the indoor and outdoor units through a conduit
The drain pump will not work in this case. to protect against external forces, and feed the conduit through the wall together
with refrigerant piping.
■ After confirming drainage, turn off the power and disconnect (3) For European and Asian market: Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (insulated
thickness: 1 mm or more)
the single phase power supply. For Australian regular: Shield wire (insulated thickness: 1 mm or more)
(4) This length shall be the total extended length in the system of the group control.
■ Note that the fan also starts rotating.
■ Attach the switch box lid as before.
WIRING EXAMPLE AND HOW TO SET THE
REMOTE CONTROLLER
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK
How to connect wiring (See figure 22)
General instructions
A Wiring remote controller cord
■ All field supplied parts and materials and electric works must B Wiring between units
conform to local codes.
C How to connect power supply terminal block (4P) with ground wire
■ Use copper wire only.
D How to attach sealing material
■ Follow the 'Wiring diagram' attached to the unit body to wire the 1 Control box lid
outdoor unit, indoor units and the remote controller. For details
2 Wiring diagram label (on the backside of the control box lid)
on hooking up the remote controller, refer to the "Installation
manual of the remote controller". 3 Remote controller cord (Ground the shield part of the shielded
wire.)
■ All wiring must be performed by an authorized electrician.
4 Terminal block for remote controller (6P)
■ A circuit breaker capable of shutting down power supply to the
5 Wiring between units
entire system must be installed.
6 Power supply terminal block
■ Note that the operation will restart automatically if the main
power supply is turned off and then turned back on again. 7 Big clamp (field supply)
■ Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit for 8 Small clamp (field supply)
the size of power supply electric wire connected to the outdoor 9 Clamp material
unit, the capacity of the circuit breaker and switch, and wiring 10 Outdoor unit
instructions.
11 Indoor unit
■ Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
12 Sealing material (supplied with the unit)
■ Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, water pipes, 13 Wiring to outside
lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
14 Outside
• Water pipes: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used. 15 Inside
• Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: might cause

■ Wiring between units and ground wire
abnormally high electric potential in the ground during lightning
Remove the control box lid and connect wires of matching
storms.
number to the power supply terminal block (4P) inside. (See C).
And connect the ground wire to the terminal block. In doing this,
Electrical characteristics pull the wires inside through the hole and fix the wires securely
with a field supplied clamp. (See B).
■ Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp and power
NOTE For details, refer to "Electrical data".
supply terminal block. (Use the figure as a guide and allow at
least 80 mm for removing the sheath.)
■ Pull the wires inside through the hole and connect to the
terminal block for remote controller (6P). (See A). (no polarity)
Securely fix the remote controller cord with a field supplied
clamp.
■ Give enough slack to the wires between the clamp and the
terminal block for the remote controller.
■ After connection, attach sealing material. (See D).
■ Be sure to attach the sealing material to prevent the infiltration of
water, as well as of any insects or other small creatures. Other-
wise a short circuit may occur inside the control box. (See D).

4PW23700-1A
152 Installation
PRECAUTIONS WIRING EXAMPLE

1 Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power
supply terminal board. For the wiring of outdoor units, refer to the installation manual
attached to the outdoor units.
■ Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power
supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection may cause Confirm the system type:
overheating.) ■ Pair type or multi system: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor
■ When connecting wires of the same gauge, connect them
according to the figure. ■
unit (standard system). (See figure 18)
Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor
2
units (All indoor units operate according to the remote
controller). (See figure 20)
■ 2 remote controller control: 2 remote controllers control 1
indoor unit. (See figure 21)
Use the specified electric wire. Connect the wire securely to the Figures 18, 20 and 21
terminal. Lock the wire down without applying excessive force to
1 Main power supply
the terminal. (Tightening torque: 1.31 N•m±10%).
2 Main switch
2 Keep total current of crossover wiring between indoor units less 3 Fuse
than 12 A. Branch the line outside the terminal board of the unit
4 Outdoor unit
in accordance with electrical equipment standards, when using
two power wiring of a gauge greater than 2 mm 2 (Ø1.6). 5 Indoor unit
6 Remote controller (optional accessories)
The branch must be sheathed in order to provide an equal or
greater degree of insulation as power supply wiring itself. 7 Master indoor unit
8 Slave indoor unit
3 Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same grounding
terminal. Looseness in the connection may deteriorate the
protection. NOTE It is not necessary to designate indoor unit address
when using group control. The address is auto-
4 Remote controller cords and wires connecting the units should matically set when the power is activated.
be located at least 50 mm away from power supply wiring. Not
following this guideline may result in malfunction due to PRECAUTIONS
electrical noise.
1 All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wiring is
5 For the remote controller wiring, refer to the "Installation manual polarized and must match the terminal symbol.
of the remote controller" supplied with the remote controller.
2 In case of group control, perform the remote controller wiring to
6 Never connect the power supply wiring to the terminal board for the master unit when connecting to the simultaneous operation
transmission wiring. This mistake could damage the entire system. system (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary).
7 Use only specified wires and tightly connect wires to the 3 For group control remote controller, choose the remote
terminals. Be careful that wires do not place external stress on controller that suits the indoor unit which has the most functions
the terminals. Keep wiring in neat order so that they do not (as attached swing flap).
obstruct other equipment such as popping open the service
4 Do not ground the equipment on gas pipes, water pipes,
cover. Make sure the cover closes tight. Incomplete connections
lightning rods or crossground with telephones. Improper ground-
could result in overheating, and in the worst case, electric shock
ing could result in electric shock.
or fire.
5 In case a shielding wire is to be used, connect a shielded portion
with the of a remote controller terminal board. (Also, connect the
ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)

C : 4PW23700-1A 6
Installation 153
FIELD SETTING INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL

Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance Read the chapter "Test operation" on page 7 before making a test run
with the installation condition. without attaching the decoration panel.
■ Setting can be made by changing the "Mode number", "FIRST Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
CODE No." and "SECOND CODE No.".
After installing the decoration panel, ensure that there is no space
■ For setting and operation, refer to "Field setting" in the
between the unit body and decoration panel. Otherwise air may leak
installation manual of the remote controller.
through the gap and cause dewdrop. (See figure 15)
Setting air discharge direction

For changing air discharge direction (2 or 3 directions), refer to the
TEST OPERATION
option handbook of the optional blocking pad kit. (SECOND CODE
Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
No. is factory set to "01" for air discharge in 4 directions.)
Refer to "For the following items, take special care during
construction and check after installation is finished" on page 2.
Settings for options
After finishing the construction of refrigerant piping, drain piping, and
For settings of options, see the installation instructions provided with electric wiring, conduct test operation accordingly to protect the unit.
the option. TEST OPERATION AFTER INSTALLING DECORATION PANEL
1 Open the gas side stop valve.
Setting air filter sign
2 Open the liquid side stop valve.
Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal air filter signs to
display the time to clean the air filter. 3 Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours.
Change the SECOND CODE No. Depending on the amount of dirt or
4 Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start
dust in the room. (SECOND CODE No. is factory set to "01" for air
operation by pushing ON/OFF button.
filter contamination-light)
Air Filter contamination 5 Press Inspection/Test Operation button 4 times (2 times for
wireless remote controller) and operate at Test Operation mode
Display
Setting interval Mode n° 1st code n° 2nd code n°
for 3 minutes.
Light ±2500 hrs 10 (20) 0 01 6 Push air flow direction adjust button to make sure the unit is in
Heavy ±1250 hrs 10 (20) 0 02 operation.
When using wireless remote controllers it is necessary to use 7 Press Inspection/Test Operation button and operate normally.
address setting. Refer to the installation manual attached to the
wireless remote controller for the setting instructions. 8 Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
TEST OPERATION BEFORE INSTALLING DECORATION PANEL
Control by 2 Remote Controllers (Controlling 1 indoor (See NOTE 3. on page 8)
unit by 2 remote controllers) 1 Open the gas side stop valve.
When using 2 remote controllers, one must be set to "MAIN" and the 2 Open the liquid side stop valve.
other to "SUB".
3 Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours.
Main/sub changeover 4 Set to cooling operation with the wired remote controller and
start operation by pushing ON/OFF button. "A7" appears on the
1 Insert a wedge-head screwdriver into the recess between the
display.
upper and lower part of the remote controller and, working from
the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (See figure 13)
5 Press Inspection/Test Operation button on the remote controller
(The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper part of and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
the remote controller.)
6 Press Inspection/Test Operation button and operate normally.
2 Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote
controller PC boards to "S". (See figure 16) 7 Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
(Leave the switch of the other remote controller set to "M".)
8 Turn off the main power supply after operation.
1 Remote controller PC board
PRECAUTIONS
2 Factory setting
3 Only one remote controller needs to be changed 1 Refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit in
case of Individual Operation System type.
2 Conduct test operation after installing decoration panel if the

wireless remote controller is used.

4PW23700-1A
154 Installation

(Operation / installation manual)
2
k
f a
e
e
i
g
d h
d
j
b
d
c e
f
a Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
• The external appearance of the outdoor unit varies
depending on its capacity class.
b The outdoor unit shown in the figure is for refer-
ence to indicate features.
Contact your Daikin Dealer and verify which out-
door unit you have.
c Remote controller
d Inlet air
e Discharged air
f Air outlet
i Drain pipe
Suction grille
j
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Ground wire
k Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent elec-
trical shocks.
3PN07753-3E
3PN07753-4E
Installation 155
FHQ50BVV1B
FHQ60BVV1B SPLIT SYSTEM
FHQ71BVV1B Air Conditioner
FHQ100BVV1B Installation manual
FHQ125BVV1B
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...............................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ..............................................................................................3
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE................................................................................5
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................6
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION .....................................................................................8
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK ....................................................................................9
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK .................................................................................................13
8. WIRING EXAMPLE ......................................................................................................15
9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK .........................................................................................16
10. FIELD SETTINGS ........................................................................................................19
11. TEST OPERATION ......................................................................................................21
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read these “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term “appliances not accesible to the general public”.
WARNING .........Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or per-
sonal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
English 1
C : 3PN06588-3G
156 Installation
An insufficient power supply capacity or improper electrical construction may lead to electric shocks or fire. 2
wires so that the control box lid can be securely fastened.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
CAUTION
the unit.
2 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 157
• When moving the unit while removing it from the carton box, be sure to lift it by holding on to the
four lifting lugs without exerting any pressure on other parts, especially swing flap, the refrigerant
piping, drain piping, and other resin parts.
• Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
• The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is com-
pleted. Do not discard them!
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid dam-
age or scratches to the unit.
• For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
• Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
2-1 ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with your unit.

3) Washer for 5) Paper pattern
Name 1) Drain hose 2) Clamp 4) Clamp
hanger bracket for installation
Quan-
1 pc. 1 pc. 8 pcs. 6 pcs. 1 pc.
tity
Shape
Name Insulation for fitting Sealing pad

Quan-
1 each. 1 each.
tity (Other)
6) For gas pipe 8) Large
Operation manual
Installation manual
Shape
7) For liquid pipe 9) Small
2-2 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

• The remote controller are required for this indoor unit “Table 1” on page 3.
• These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from
“Table 1” on page 3 according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
Table 1
Remote controller type Cooling only type Heat pump type
Wired type BRC1C517, BRC1D527, BRC1D528, BRC1C61
Wireless type BRC7E66, BRC7EA66 BRC7E63W, BRC7EA63W
English 3
3PN06588-3G
158 Installation
NOTE
• If you wish to use a remote controller that is not listed in “Table 1” on page 3, select a suitable remote con-
troller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED. 2
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Are the indoor and outdoor unit fixed firmly? The units may drop, vibrate or make noise.
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded? Dangerous at electric leakage.
nents burn out.
b. Items to be checked at time of delivery

∗ Also review the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”
c. Points for explanation about operations
The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items pertaining
to possibillties for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the instruction manual.
2-3 NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating different
functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while looking at the
manual.
4 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 159

(1) Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets your cus-
tomer’s approval.
• Where nothing blocks air passage.
• Where condensate can be properly drained.
• Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
• Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
• Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
NOTE
• If there is space left over in the ∗ section, opening it up 200 mm will make servicing easier.
∗≥30 ∗≥30 Air outlet
≥300
2500 or higher
Required service Air inlet from the floor
space
Obstruction For installation
Floor in high places
(Length : mm)
• Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the instal-
lation manual for the outdoor unit.)
• Install the indoor and outdoor units, power cord and connecting wires at least 1 meter away from televi-
sions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 meter may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the
noise.)
(2) Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to support the
weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcing.)
(3) This product may be installed on ceilings up to 3.5 m in height. However, if the ceiling is higher
than 2.7 m, the remote control will have to be set locally. (Refer to “10. FIELD SETTINGS” on page
19)
English 5
3PN06588-3G
160 Installation

(1) Relation of holes for indoor unit, suspension bolt position, piping and wiring.
A
B
C 2
D
160
185
85
E
F G
135
210
160
Front view
680
False ceiling view
260
Top side drain
piping hole
Left side piping hole Rear side piping hole
Top gas piping hole
Suspension
Air outlet bolt (×4)
Top liquid piping hole
(Length : mm)
Model A B C D E F G
Type 35, 45, 50 960 920 390 375 310 400 375
Type 60, 71 1160 1120 490 475 410 500 475
Type 100 1400 1360 610 595 530 620 595
Type 125 1590 1550 705 690 625 715 690
(2) Make holes for suspension bolts, refrigerant and drain piping, and wiring.
• Refer to the paper pattern for installation.
• Select the location for each of holes and open the holes in the ceiling.
(3) Remove the parts from the indoor unit.

(3-1)Detach the suction grille.
• Slide the locking knobs (×2) on the suction grille inward (direction of arrows) and lift upwards.
(Refer to Fig. 1)
• With the suction grille open, remove the suction grille forward, holding on to the rear tabs on the suction
grille. (Refer to Fig. 2)
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
(3-2)Remove the dressing boards (left and right). Fig. 3

• After removing the securing screws for the Accessories
dressing boards (one each), pull them forward Dressing board securing
(in the direction of the arrow) and remove screw (M4)
them. (Refer to Fig. 3)
• Take out the accessories.
Dressing board
6 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 161
(3-3)Remove the hanger brackets.

• Loosen the 2 bolts (M8) used to attach the hanger brackets which are on each side (4 places left and
right) to within 10 mm. (Refer to Fig. 4. 5)
• After removing the securing screws (M5) for the hanger brackets which are on the rear side, pull the
hanger brackets back (in the direction of the arrow), and remove them. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
Hanger bracket
Length of loosening fixing screw (M5)
should be less than Indoor unit
10 mm ≤10 Hanger bracket
setting bolt (M8)
Hanger bracket Hanger bracket
(4) Attach the suspension bolts. (Use suspension bolts which are W3/8 or M8-M10 in size.)
• Adjust the distance of the suspension bolts from the ceiling in advance. (Refer to Fig. 6)
NOTE
• Use a hole-in anchor for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert, sunken anchor or other field supplied parts
for new ceilings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit. Adjust clearance from the ceiling
before proceeding further.
Fig. 6
Ceiling slab
Anchor
25-55
Suspension bolt
False ceiling
(Length : mm)
All the above parts are field supplied.
English 7
3PN06588-3G
162 Installation

It may be easier to attach accessory parts before installing the indoor unit. Therefore, please also
read the instruction manuals which are provided with the accessory parts.
As for the parts to be used for installation work, be sure to use the provided accessories and specified parts
designated by our company.
2
(1) Secure the hanger brackets to the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 7)
NOTE
• To ensure they are safely secured, use the included washers, and secure them with double nuts to make sure.
(2) Lift the indoor unit’s main body, insert the bolts (M8) for the hanger brackets into the attachment
part on the hanger brackets, while sliding the main body from the front. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(3) Fasten the bolts for the hanger brackets (M8) securely in 4 places, left and right. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(4) Replace the screws for the hanger brackets which had been removed (M5) securely in 2 places left
and right. This is necessary to prevent any forward and back slide in the main body of the indoor
unit. (Refer to Fig. 8)
Fig. 7 Fig. 8 Hanger bracket
Nut (Field supplied)

Washer (3) (attached)
Attachment
part
Double nuts (Field supplied) Hanger bracket
setting bolt (M8)
Hanger bracket
Hanger bracket
fixing screw (M5)
(5) When hanging the indoor unit main body, be sure to use a level or a plastic tube with water in it to
make sure the drain piping is set either level or slightly tilted, in order to ensure proper drainage.
(Refer to Fig. 9)
Fig. 9
A A.B
≤ 1˚ ≤ 1˚
B
≤ 1˚
A.When the drain piping is tilted to the right, or to the right and back.
Place it level, or tilt it slightly to the right or the back. (Within 1°.)
B.When the drain piping is tilted to the left, or to the left and back.
Place it level, or tilt it slightly to the left or the back. (Within 1°.)
CAUTION
Setting the unit at an angle opposite to the drain piping might cause a water leakage.
8 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 163

〈For refrigerant piping of outdoor units, see the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.〉
〈Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping.
Otherwise, a water leakage can result sometimes.〉
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
〈Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed
30°C or RH80 %, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensation may form on the
surface of the insulating material.〉
〈Before refrigerant piping work, check which type of refrigerant is used. Proper operation is not pos-
sible if the types of refrigerant are not the same.〉
CAUTION
• To prevent dust, moisuture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
• Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
• The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant.
• Use copper alloy seamless pipes (ISO 1337). Fig. 10
• Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as
shown in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes Torque wrench
to/from the unit. (Refer to Fig. 10) Piping union
• When connecting the flare nut, coat the flare section (only
inside) with ester oil or ether oil, rotate three or Flare nut
four times first, then screw in. (Refer to Fig. 11)
Spanner
NOTE
• Use the flare nut included with the unit main body. Fig. 11
Coat the flare section (only inside)
CAUTION
with ester oil or ether oil.
Do not let oil get on the screw holders on the dressing board.
Oil can weaken the screw holders.
Table 2
Flare dimensions A (mm)
Type of refrigerant R410A
Applicable model Flare
FHQ
Pipe size Tightening torque
6.4(1/4”) 14.2-17.2 N • m 8.7 – 9.1
0
45 ±2
0
9.5(3/8”) 32.7-39.9 N • m 12.8 – 13.2

R0.4-0.8
0
90 ±0.5
12.7(1/2”) 49.5-60.3 N • m 16.2 – 16.6

0
15.9(5/8”) 61.8-75.4 N • m 19.3 – 19.7

19.1(3/4”) 97.2-118.8 N • m
CAUTION
Overtightening may damage the flare and cause a refrigerant leakage.
English 9
C : 3PN06588-3G
164 Installation
follow the installation method mentioned below.
2
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque
suddenly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
φ6.4 (1/4”) 60 to 90 degrees Approx. 150mm
CAUTION
(Flux has extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping systems. For instance, if the chlorine based flux is
used, it will cause pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will damage the refrigerant oil.)
• Before brazing local refrigerant piping, nitrogen gas shall be blown through the piping to expel air from the
piping.
If you brazing is done without nitrogen gas blowing, a large amount of oxide film develops inside the piping,
and could cause system malfunction.
• Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
Refrigerant piping
Part to be Taping
brazed hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 12
10 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 165
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fit-
ting (6) and (7). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (4).)
(Refer to Fig. 13)
• Wrap the sealing pad (9) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side.
(Refer to Fig. 13)
CAUTION
• Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit. Any exposed piping
may cause condensation or burns if touched.
Fig. 13 Procedure for thermal insulation of gas-side piping

Insulating material for joints (6)
(accessory) Wind around the
Piping insulation pipe, beginning at
Flare nut connection material the base.
Orient so that the end of (main unit) Small seal material
the wrapped insulation Attach to base (9) (accessory)
material is facing up
Main unit
Piping insulation material Clamp (4)
(Locally procured) (accessory)
Insulation for gas pipe (6) (attached)
Gas piping
Liquid piping
Insulation for liquid pipe (7) (attached)
Clamp (4) (attached) (× 4)

Attach to the bottom
(For both gas piping and liquid piping)
Procedure for thermal insulation of liquid-side piping

Insulating material for
joints (7)(accessory)
Flare nut connection
Orient so that the end of Piping insulation material (main unit)
the wrapped insulation
material is facing up Attach to base
Main unit
Piping insulation material
Clamp (4) (accessory)
(Locally procured)
English 11
3PN06588-3G
166 Installation
(1) For piping facing back.

• Remove the rear penetration lid and set the piping. (Refer to Fig. 14.16)
(2) For piping facing up.
• When setting the piping to face up, the L-shaped branch piping kit sold separately is required.
• Removing the top penetration lid and use the L-shaped branch piping kit sold separately to set the piping.
(Refer to Fig. 14.15) 2
(3) For piping facing right.
• Cut out a slit hole on the dressing board (right) and set the piping. (Refer to Fig. 16)
Fig. 14 Fig. 15
Top plate
Cut out
Upward-facing
refrigerant piping
Rear L-shaped branch piping
penetration lid kit (Optional accessories)
Top penetration lid
Cut out
Fig. 17
Fig. 16 Thermistor lead line
Top penetration
lid clamp section Swing motor
Right-facing Rear-facing
refrigerant lead line
refrigerant piping
piping
Rear right-facing
drain piping
Right-facing drain piping
Dressing board (right)
removable part
If only setting the drain piping to
face right, cut this section only.
• When piping is complete, cut the removed penetration lid into the shape of the piping using scissors and attach.
As when before removing the top penetration lid, secure the lead lines for the swing motor and thermistor
by passing them through the clamp section on the top penetration lid. (Refer to Fig. 14.17)
• When doing this, block any gaps between the piping penetration lid and the pipes using putty to prevent
dust from entering the indoor unit.
12 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 167

(1) Carry out the drain piping.
• Make sure piping provides proper drainage.
• You can select whether to bring the drain piping our from the rear right, right, rear left, or left. For rear right-
facing and right-facing situations, refer to “6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK” on page 9 for rear left-facing
and left-facing situations. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Fig. 18
Rear side (metal plate) Rear left-facing drain piping

removable part
Left dressing board removable part
Left-facing drain piping
• When setting piping facing left, move the rubber stopper and insulation which are attached to the drain pipe
connection hole on the left side of the indoor unit to the right-side drain pipe connection hole.
When doing this, insert the rubber stopper all the way in to prevent a water leakage.
• Make sure the pipe diameter is the same or bigger than the branch piping. (vinyl-chloride piping, nominal
diameter 20 mm, external diameter 26 mm)
• Make sure the piping is short, has at least a 1/100 slope, and can prevent air pockets from forming.
(Refer to Fig. 19)
Fig. 19
Good Wrong Do not lift Make sure there

Tilt down is no slack
Make sure it is
not in the water
CAUTION
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.
• Be sure to use the included drain hose (1) and clamp (2).
Also, insert the drain hose completely into the drain socket, and securely attach the clamp bracket inside
the gray tape area on the inserted tip of the drain hose. (Refer to Fig. 20)
Screw the screws on the clamp bracket until there is 4 mm left. (Pay attention to the direction of the attach-
ment to prevent the clamp bracket from coming into contact with the suction grille.)
(Refer to Fig. 21)
English 13
3PN06588-3G
168 Installation
Fig. 20 Clamp (2) (attached) Fig. 22
Taping area (Gray) Drain hose (1) (attached)

Wrong
2
Clamp (2)
(attached)
Fig. 21
Sealing pad (8)
(attached)
≤4
Sealing
pad (8)
≤4
(attached) Clamp (2)

(attached) (Length : mm)
< Facing rear right or right > < Facing rear left or left >
• Insulate the clamp bracket and drain hose from the bottom using the included sealing pad (8).
(Refer to Fig. 21)
• Be sure to insulate all drain piping running indoors.
• Do not allow any slack to gather in the drain hose inside the indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 22)
(Slack in the drain hose can cause the suction grille to break.)
(2) Check to make sure the drain flows smoothly after piping is complete.
• Slowly pour 600 ml of drain-checking water into the drain pan through the air outlet.
Plastic container
for pouring Air outlet
Make sure not to splash the water.

100 mm
or more
Central drain pipe

Set a downward slope of 1/100 or
greater to ensure that air does
not accumulate.
Water accumulating in the drain piping can

cause the drain to clog.
CAUTION
Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of ammonia. The ammonia in the sew-
age might enter the indoor unit through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
14 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 169
8. WIRING EXAMPLE
• Pair or Multi system: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit. (standard system) (Refer to Fig. 23)
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units. (All indoor units operate according to the
remote controller) (Refer to Fig. 25)
• Two remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 26)
Fig. 23
Pair or Multi system

Main power supply
Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit
Remote controller
P1 P2
(Optional accessories)
Fig. 25 Fig. 26
Group control Two remote controllers control
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
P1 P2
P 1 P2 P 1 P2 P1 P 2
Indoor unit
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
P1 P2
Remote controller (Optional accessories) P1 P2 P1 P2
Remote Remote
controller 1 controller 2
(Optional (Optional
accessories) accessories)
English 15
C : 3PN06588-3G
170 Installation
NOTE
4. When controlling the simultaneous operation system with 2 remote controllers, connect it to the master
2
unit. (wiring to the slave unit is unnecessary)

• For electric wiring work, refer to also “8. WIRING EXAMPLE” on page 15 attached to the unit body.
• Do not connect the ground wire to gas pipes, water pipes, lightning rods, or telephone ground wires.
• Water pipes: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
Table 3
2
H05VV - U4G
Wiring between units 2.5 -
(NOTE 1, 3)
Vinyl cord with sheath or cable Max. 500 m
Remote controller cord 0.75 - 1.25
(2 wires) (NOTE 2) (NOTE 3)
NOTE
1. Shows only in case of protected pipes. Use H07RN-F in case of no protection. (Sheath thickness: 1mm or more)
2. Use double insulated wire for remote controller (Sheath thickness: 1mm or more) or run wires through a
wall or conduit so that the user cannot come in contact with them.
3. This length shall be the total extended length in the system of the group control.
CAUTION
• Even if the top or rear penetration lid is removed, pull the remote controller cord and the wiring between
units inside the unit using conduits for each, so that the wiring does not come into contact with the opening
section of the metal casing.
• Pass conduits through the wall and secure along with the refrigerant piping in order to prevent external
pressure being applied to the remote controller cord and wiring between units.
• Prevent dust from entering into the unit by filling the gap between the conduits and the penetration lid (top
or rear) with corking or putty.
• Arrange the wires and fix a lid firmly so that the lid does not float during wiring work.
• Do not clamp remote controller cord together with wiring between units together. Doing so may cause mal-
function.
• Remote controller cord and wiring between units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric wires.
Not following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
16 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 171
Connection of wiring between units and for the remote control cord (Refer to Fig. 27)
• Wiring between units
Holding the control box lid, loosen the two securing screws, remove the control box lid, match up the phases
on the power source terminal block inside (3P), and make the connections.
After this is done, use the attached clamp (4) to bind wiring between units to the anchor point.
(Refer to Fig. 28)
• Remote controller cord: The simultaneous operation multi sub-unit is not required. (Refer to Fig. 27.29)
Connect to the remote control terminal block (2P). (There is no polarity.) After this is done, use the attached
clamp (4) to bind remote controller cord to the anchor point. (Refer to Fig. 28)
Attaching the suction grille and the dressing boards

• Once wiring is complete, firmly attach the dressing side board by reversing the steps taken to remove the
suction grille.
Fig. 27
Remote control terminal block (2P) Fig. 28
Power supply terminal block (3P) Rear penetration lid
Control box Ground terminal Conduits
Seal with caulking
material or putty
Liquid pipe
Gas pipe
Drain hose
Remote controller cord Wiring between units
Control box lid fixation Wiring between units (If wiring the slave
screw unit, connect to master unit)
Clamp (4) (attached) How to connect power supply terminal
Fig. 28 Fastener block (3P)
Fig. 29
Wiring between
units After securing the
clamp material
P1 P2
to the bracket,
cut off any extra
Clamp (4) material.
(attached) Remote control
Remote controller cord terminal block (2P)
Fastener Remote controller cord
English 17
3PN06588-3G
172 Installation
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminals.
Tightening torque for the terminal screws.

• If the terminal screws are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
• Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws. 2
Terminal Size Tightening torque
Remote controller terminal block (2P) M3.5 0.79 - 0.97 N•m
Power supply terminal block (3P) M4 1.18 - 1.44 N•m
Ground terminal M4 1.18 - 1.44 N•m
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring

Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal block.
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instructions.
(Refer to Fig. 30)
• Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 31)
• When connecting wires of the same gauge, connect them according to. (Refer to Fig. 31)
that external forces are not applied to the terminals.
Fig. 30 Attach insulation sleeve
Round crimp-style terminal

Electric wire
Fig. 31
Connect wires of the Do not connect wires Do not connect wires
same gauge to both of the same gauge to of different gauges.
side. (GOOD) one side. (WRONG) (WRONG)
Good Wrong Wrong
18 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 173
10. FIELD SETTINGS

(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Field settings must be made from the remote controller and in accordance with installation condi-
tions.
• Settings can be made by changing the “Mode No.”, “FIRST CODE NO.” and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• The “Field Settings” included with the remote control lists the order of the settings and method of operation.
10-1 Setting ceiling height

• Select the SECOND CODE NO. that corresponds to the ceiling height “Table 4”.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for a ceiling height of less than 2.7m .)
Table 4
Ceiling height (m) Mode No. FIRST CODE NO. SECOND CODE NO.
Less than 2.7 m 01
13 (23) 0
2.7 to 3.5 02
10-2 Settings for options

• For settings for options, see the installation instructions provided with the option.
10-3 Setting air filter sign

• Remote controllers are equiped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air filters.
• Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to “Table 5” depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for air filter contamination-light.)
Table 5
Setting Mode No.
Approx. 2500 hrs 01
light
10 (20) 0
Approx. 1250 hrs 02
heavy
English 19
C : 3PN06588-3G
174 Installation
10-4 When implementing group control

• When using as a pair unit or as a master unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous start/
stop (group) control up to 16 unit with the remote controller.
• In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote con-
troller.
• Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc.) in the group as possible.
2
Outdoor unit 1 Outdoor unit 2 Outdoor unit 3
Group control remote controller
Wiring Method (See “9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK” on page 16.)

(1) Remove the control box lid.
(2) Cross-wire the remote control terminal block (P1 P2) inside the control box. (There is no polarity.)
(Refer to Fig. 25 on page 15 and Table 3 on page 16)
NOTE
• When combining with a simultaneous operation multi-type, be sure only to connect the wiring to the master
unit.
20 English
C : 3PN06588-3G
Installation 175
10-5 Two remote controllers control (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1) Insert a screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and, work-
ing from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper
part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 32)
(2) Turn the main/sub changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC boards to “S”. (Leave the
switch of the other remote controller set to “M”.) (Refer to Fig. 33)
Fig. 32 Upper part of Fig. 33

remote controller
S
(Factory setting) M
Remote
controller
(Only one remote PC board
Lower part of controller needs
S
M
remote controller to be changed if
Insert the screwdriver
here and gently work factory settings
have remained
off the upper part of
untouched.)
remote controller.
Wiring Method (See “9.ELECTRIC WIRING WORK” on page16.)

(3) Remove the control box lid
(4) Add remote controller 2 to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2) in the control box.
(There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 26 on page 15 and Table 3 on page 16)
NOTE
When combining with a simultaneous operation multi-type, be sure only to connect the wiring to the master
unit.
11. TEST OPERATION

(1) Make sure the control box lids are closed on the indoor and outdoor units.
(2) Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUC-
TION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.” on page 4.
11-1 TEST OPERATION

1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours. (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling only)
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button ( ).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button 4 times ( ) (2 times for wireless remote controller) and
TEST
operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.

6. Push AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button ( ) to make sure the unit is in operation.
7. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( TEST) and operate normally.
8. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
English 21
C : 3PN06588-3G
176 Installation
PRECAUTIONS
1. Refer to “11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION” if the unit does not operate properly.
2. After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION run button once to put the unit
in inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is “00”. (=normal)
If the code reads anything other than “00”, refer to “11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION”.
NOTE
2
11-2 HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR MALFUNCTION
With the power on, it is possible to monitor the type of malfunction by looking at the malfunction code
displayed in the remote controller.
If nothing is displayed in the remote controller, check the following items before attempting a diagnosis based
on the malfunction code, as they might be a cause.
• Disconnected or incorrect wiring (between power supply and the outdoor unit, between the outdoor and
indoor units, and between the indoor unit and the remote controller)
• Burnt out indoor or outdoor unit fuse
• “88 ” will be displayed for a few seconds on the remote controller immediately after the power is turned on.
This display indicates that the remote controller is being checked to see whether it is ok or not, and does
not indicate a malfunction.
Diagnose with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1. With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the malfunction code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referning to the table
on the malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor unit No. with
the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2. With the wireless remote controller.
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diagnose
the fault contents with the table on the malfunction code list looking for the malfunction code which can be
Number of beeps3 short beeps .............. Perform all the following operations
1 short beep ................ Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep ................. No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the malfunction code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper code.
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the malfunction code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower code.
• A long beep indicate the malfunction code.
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote controller,
“ ” starts flashing.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble his-
tory disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code “00”(normal).
22 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 177
11-3 Malfunciton code

• For places where the malfunction code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the system
• Depending on the type of indoor or outdoor unit, the malfunction code may or may not be displayed.
A5 Freeze-up protector “or stopped by high pressure control”
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Type set improper
AJ
Capacity data is wrongly proset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC.
C4 Sensor (R2T) for heat exchanger temperature is fault
CJ
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.
E3 High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
E6 Compressor motor lock by over current (outdoor)
E7
Outdoor fan instantneous overcurrent malfunction
E8 Input overcurrent (outdoor unit)
EA Cooling/heating switch malfunction (outdoor)
H6 Faulty position detection sensor (outdoor unit)
H8 CT abnormality (outdoor unit)
H9 Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J6 Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J8 Liquid piping thermistor malfunction (heating) (outdoor)
J9 Gas piping thermistor malfunction (cooling) (outdoor)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor)
L4
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor)
L5
Possible earth fault or short circuit in the compressor motor.
Electric thermal (outdoor)
L8
Stall prevention (outdoor)
L9
English 23
3PN06588-3G
178 Installation
LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor)

P1 Open-phase or main circuit low voltage (outdoor)
P3 PC-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
PJ
Capacity data is wrongly proset. Or there is nothing programmed in the data hold IC. 2
U0 Suction pipe temperature abnormal or refrigerant shortage
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction
U2
Incorrect wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
U4
UF If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly
wired. Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring.
(The compressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation inde-
pendent of the remote controller operation.)
U5
U8
(Malfunction in sub remote control.)
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main
UA
unit’s PC board)
Incorrect combination with indoor unit and outdoor unit
24 English
3PN06588-3G
Installation 179
2.4 FAQ100BVV1B (Operation / installation manual)

j
d
a
h
f e
g i
b
d
c
e
f
a Indoor unit
b Outdoor unit
c Remote controller
d Inlet air
e Discharged air
f Air outlet
i Drain pipe
Air inlet
j
The built-in air filter removes dust and dirt.
Ground wire
k Wire to ground from the outdoor unit to prevent elec-
trical shocks.
3P184442-7B
180 Installation
SPLIT SYSTEM Air

FAQ100BVV1B Installation manual
Conditioner
CONTENTS 2
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .................................................................................... 1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION .................................................................................... 2
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE ..................................................................... 4
4. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 5
5. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK .......................................................................... 7
6. DRAIN PIPING WORK ......................................................................................... 9
7. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ............................................................................... 10
8. WIRING EXAMPLE ............................................................................................ 13
9. FIELD SETTING................................................................................................. 14
10. TEST OPERATION ............................................................................................ 16
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please read these “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and be
sure to install it correctly.
After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual. Ask the customer to store
the installation manual along with the operation manual for future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term “appliances not accessible to the general public”.
WARNING ...........Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION ........... Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or
personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
WARNING
1 English
C : 3P184443-2B
Installation 181
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or overheating terminals.
Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
the unit.
Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Use a sling of soft mate-
rial, where unpacking is unavoidable or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid damage
or scratches to the unit.
• Refer to the installation manual of the outdoor unit for items not described in this manual.
• Installation should only be carried out after checking in advance the type of refrigerant to be used. (Using
the wrong refrigerant will prevent the unit from functioning properly.)
• Do not dispose of any parts necessary for installation until the installation is complete.
1. PRECAUTIONS
English 2
3P184443-2B
182 Installation

• Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deterio-
rate.)
• Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates 2
2. ACCESSORIES
Check the following accessories are included with the unit.
1) Installation Insulation for fitting 4) Insulation 5) Paper pattern

Name
panel (for refrigerant pipe) tape for installation
Quantity 1 1each 2 1 (Other)
• Operation
2) For liquid pipe
manual
• Installation
Shape manual
6) Screw×12
3) For gas pipe
Box Indoor unit and installation panel
Accesories (Attached to the rear side of indoor unit.)

Where to locate accessories
3. OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
• The remote controller are required for this indoor unit.
• These are two types of remote controllers: wired and wireless. Select a remote controller from
Table 1 according to customer request and install in an appropriate place.
(For installation, follow the Installation manual included with the remote controllers.)
Table 1
Remote controller Model
Wired type BRC1D527, BRC1D528, BRC1C61
FAQ type Heat pump type BRC7C510W, BRC7CA510W
Wireless type
Cooling only type BRC7C511W, BRC7CA511W
NOTE
• If the customer wishes to use a remote controller that is not listed above, select a suitable remote
controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
3 English
C : 3P184443-2B
Installation 183
CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
1. Items to be checked after completion of work

Is the indoor unit fixed firmly? The unit may drop, vibrate or make noise.
Does the power supply voltage correspond The unit may malfunction or the components
to that shown on the name plate? burn out.
The unit may malfunction or the components
burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded? Dangerous at electric leakage.
The unit may malfunction or the components
burn out.
2. Items to be checked at time of delivery *Also review the “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”
Points for explanation about operations

The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the instruction manual are the items per-
taining to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the
product. Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents
and also ask your customers to read the instruction manual.
4. NOTE TO THE INSTALLER

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters, operating dif-
ferent functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out operations themselves while
looking at the manual.

1. Select an installation site where the following conditions are satisfied and that meets
with your customer’s approval.
• In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible
dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
• Where the wall is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
• Where sufficient clearance for installation and maintenance can be ensured.
• Where nothing blocks the air passage.
• Where wall surface is not particularly inclined.
• Where not exposed to combustible gases.
• Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit (Refer to the
installation manual of the outdoor unit.)
English 4
3P184443-2B
184 Installation
[ CAUTION ]
Only use the included parts or parts which match the specifications when installing the unit.
• Install the indoor unit no less than 2.5 m above the floor. Where unavoidably lower, take what
measures are necessary to keep hands out of the air outlet.
≥ 50 ≥ 50
2
≥ 50
≥ 250
Air inlet
For installation
2500 or higher
in high places
from the floor
Air outlet
Obstruction
Required space for installation or servicing
Floor
2. Use the installation panel for installation.
Consider whether the location where the unit will be mounted can support its weight, and if necessary,
strengthen by adding supporting boards or beams before mounting. Make sure that any reinforcement
is strong enough to withstand vibration and loud noise. (The mounting pitch is listed on the mounting
pattern paper, so refer to it when considering whether strengthening is necessary or not.)
3. The indoor unit may not be directly installed on the wall.

Use the attached installation panel before installing the unit.

1. Detach the installation panel from the indoor unit.
• The installation panel is attached to the rear of the unit.
To detach, remove the screws from the bottom of the panel. ( Refer to Fig. 1 )
1) Installation
panel
Screws
Fig. 1
2. Attach the installation panel to the wall, using the paper pattern for installation.
(a)Check the position of the drill hole for the piping through-hole using the included pattern paper.
• Keep approximately 50 mm between the ceiling and the unit.
(b)Temporarily tack the mounting board, and use a level to make sure that it is either level or slightly
tipped down on the side of the drainage pipe.
(c)Secure the mounting board to the wall with either a screw or a bolt.
• If using the attached wood screws, fix 4 screws to each the left and right sides (total of 8 or more).
• If using bolts, attach 2 M8 bolts to each the left and right sides (total of 4).
• If installing the unit on a concrete wall, attach the panel with a field supplied anchor (M8).
5 English
3P184443-2B
Installation 185
3. Make a through hole in the wall.

• Piping can be led out from the left, right or rear sides. ( Refer to Fig. 2 )
• The drain hole is on the right side.
• Select the piping route and open a through hole in the wall (φ80). Ensure the hole slopes gradually
downward to the outside. Also, make sure the piping trap can be gotten from the exit (the end).
Back side Piping direction
Top side
Front side
Fig. 2
4. Cut an opening in the left or right side panel for

piping. ( Refer to Fig. 3 )
Ex. For right side piping connections
Cut along
perforrated line.
5. Hang the indoor unit securely from the hook on
the installation panel.
(Refer to Fig. 4 and 5) Cutting possible up to this point.
Hole where to Fig. 3
hook indoor unit
Hook
Wall
1) Installation panel
Fig. 4 Fig. 5
• If running pipes from the left side or using embedded pipes, remove the bottom panel to make work
easier.
CAUTION
Install the unit so that it is level or slanted to the right, and so that it is not tilted forward. Slanting to
the left or tilting forward will impede proper water discharge and cause leaking.
Do not hold the horizontal blades when lifting the unit. (This may cause damage to the blades.)
English 6
3P184443-2B
186 Installation
[ How to detach side and bottom panels ]

• Remove the screws in the side panel and pull the side panel outward (A). Then, while pushing
upwards (B), slide the panel towards the front of the unit (C). (Same for both left and right sides)
( Refer to Fig. 6 and 7 )
Left side panel

Right side panel
2
(C) (B) Wall
Side panel screw (A)

Fig. 6
(A) (E)
Left side (D) Approx. 45˚
panel Bottom panel
Top side
Fig. 8
Right side
Fig. 7 panel
(C)
• After detaching the side panels, turn the bottom panel downward (D) about 45°, and pull it outward
(E). ( Refer to Fig. 8 )

• See the installation manual for the outdoor unit for details on how to connect the refrigerant piping.
• Be sure to insulate both the gas piping as well as the liquid piping.
• Not doing so may cause leaks. (Use insulation material which can fully resist the 120°C temperature that
the gas piping can sometimes reach when using a heat pump.)
• If the temperature and humidity of the branch piping could possibly exceed 30°C or RH80%, reinforce the
refrigerant insulation (20mm or thicker). Condensation may form on the surface of the insulation.
• Installation should only be carried out after checking in advance the type of refrigerant to be used. (Using
the wrong refrigerant will prevent the unit from functioning properly.)
CAUTION
• To prevent dust, moisuture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end
or cover it with tape.
• Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant
circuit, such as air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room
thoroughly right away.
• Use copper alloy seamless pipes ( ISO 1337 ).
• The outdoor unit is charged with refrigerant. Spanner
• Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, Torque wrench
when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the unit. Flare nut
( Refer to Fig. 9 )
• Refer to the Table 2 for flare dimensions and tightening Piping union
torque.
Fig. 9
NOTE
• Use the flare nut included with the unit main body.
CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.
7 English
3P184443-2B
Installation 187
• When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil Coat the flare section (only inside)
or ether oil to the flare section (only inside), with ester oil or ether oil.
and spin 3-4 times before screwing in.
(Refer to Fig. 10 )
Table 2 Fig. 10
Flare dimensions A (mm)
Type of refrigerant R410A
Flare
Applicable model
FAQ
Pipe size Tightening torque
˚
45˚±2
φ9.5(3/8”) 32.7-39.9 N • m 12.8 – 13.2
90˚±0.5˚
R0.4-0.8
φ15.9(5/8”) 61.8-75.4 N • m 19.3 – 19.7
A
φ19.1(3/4”) 97.2-118.8 N • m
For reference
If a torque wrench is not available, use the following method as a rule of thumb.
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque sud-
denly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
Table 3
• After piping work is done, check all the pipe connections to ensure no nitrogen or other gases are leaking.
• After checking for gas leaks in the pipe connections, insulate them as shown in Fig. 11 and 12.
(Install so that no pipes are exposed, as this may cause leaking.)
Liquid pipe Start wrapping tape here.
Gas pipe
2) 3) Wrap fitting with
provided insulation
Seal ends with vinyl tape. Use provided insulation tape.
(procure in the field.)
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
English 8
C : 3P184443-2B
188 Installation
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
1. Do not overlap insulation for fitting. (Refer to Fig. 11)
2. Tape the liquid and gas pipe together from the bend up to where they enter the unit. (Refer to Fig. 12)
3. Wrap the drain hose inside the unit with insulation tape, but sepa-
rate it from the refrigerant pipe. If wrapped together, both pipes may Liquid pipe
not fit inside the unit. (only when running pipes from the left side) Gas pipe
4. When running pipes from the left side, keep pipes and the drain
Drain hose
2
hose as shown on Fig. 13.
5. Do not bend the liquid pipe within 200 mm of the flare nut, to prevent
from damaging the pipe.
6. Make sure the relay connector for the fan motor does not become
disengaged during piping work. Fig. 13
7. When doing this, block any gaps between the side panel and the
pipes using putty to prevent dust from entering the indoor unit.
CAUTION
piping.
• Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting nitrogen into
Refrigerant piping
Part to be Taping
brazed hands valve
Nitrogen
Nitrogen
Fig. 14

1. Connect drain piping.
• Be sure to secure reliable drainage for the drain piping.
• Make sure the pipes are short and lead down, to prevent the formation of air pockets.
CAUTION
Water accumulating in the drain piping can cause the drain to clog.
9 English
3P184443-2B
Installation 189
• Use particular caution when carrying out the steps in the Fig. 15.
The drain hose must lead down.
WRONG GOOD WRONG
Drain pipe Drain pipe
Leading
down
WRONG
The original edge must not be placed beneath the water.
Fig. 15
• When extending the drain pipes, use commercially available extension hose, and be sure to insulate
the extended part of the drain hose which is indoors. (Refer to Fig. 16)
• Use the same pipe diameter as the connection piping (hard vinyl chloride piping, nominal
diameter 20) or higher.
• Use commercially available hard vinyl chloride joints (nominal diameter 20) when connecting hard
vinyl chloride piping (nominal diameter 20) directly to drain hoses attached to the indoor unit,
such as embedded pipes. (Refer to Fig. 17)
Commercially available hard vinyl
Drain hose extension
chloride joint (nominal diameter 20)
Indoor unit drain hose Insulation tape

2) 3) Insulation pipe Drain hose attached Hard vinyl chloride piping
(procured locally) to the indoor unit (nominal diameter 20)
Fig. 16
Fig. 17
2. Attach all pipes so as to ensure thorough drainage.

• After connecting all pipes, carry out a drain check by opening the
front panel, removing the air filter, pouring some water into the
drain pan, and making sure the water drains out of the hose
smoothly. ( Refer to Fig. 18 )
[ CAUTION ]
• Do not connect the drain piping directly to sewage pipes that smell of
ammonia. The ammonia in the sewage might enter the indoor unit
through the drain pipes and corrode the heat exchanger.
Fig. 18

• For electric wiring work, refer also to “WIRING DIAGRAM” attached to the unit body.
English 10
3P184443-2B
190 Installation

• Gas pipes: could explode and cause fires if there was a gas leak.
• Plumbing pipes: no grounding effect if hard vinyl pipes are used.
• Telephone ground wires or lightning rods: the ground potential could rise dangerously high if hit by light-
ning.
2
The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 4 when preparing one.
Table 4
2
H05VV-U4G
Wiring the units 2.5 –
(NOTE 1)
Vinyl cord with sheath or cable (2 wire)
Remote controller cord 0.75 - 1.25 Max. 500m
(NOTE 2)
NOTE
2. Insulated thickness: 1 mm or more
〈Method of wiring units and connecting remote controller cords〉

• Wiring the units connections
See “INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION” and detach the right side panel. Next, remove screw (A) and slide
front cover to the right (B) and detach.
When detached, you can see the terminal boards. Feed wires through the clamp and connect to the termi-
nal board.
• Remote controller cord connections (not necessary for slave unit of simultaneous operation system)
Feed wires through the clamp and connect to the terminal board for transmission wiring. (no polarity)
Right side panel Power supply terminal board Remote controller cord
Clamp band
(A) (Remote controller cord)
Wiring the units

(B)
Clamp band (Wiring the units)
Air discharge outlet Front cover
Terminal board for the remote
Power supply Ground Terminal board controller
terminal board terminal for the remote
P1 P2 controller Clamp band
(Remote controller cord)
1 2 3
Remote controller
cord Clamp band (Wiring the units)
Wiring the units Clamp band (Wiring the units)
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
• Do not clamp remote controller cords together with wiring the units. Doing so may cause malfunction.
• Remote controller cords and wiring the units should be located at least 50 mm from other electric wires. Not
following this guideline may result in malfunction due to electrical noise.
11 English
3P184443-2B
Installation 191
CAUTION
When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material and clamp firmly to prevent outside pressure
being exerted on the wiring connections.
When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not cause the control box lid to stick up, then
close the cover firmly.
When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (pro-
cured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside.
(If any do get in, they can cause short circuits in the control box.)
Outside of the unit, separate low-voltage wires (remote controller cords) by a minimum of 50 mm from high-
voltage wires (inter-unit lines, ground lines, and other electrical lines) to avoid routing the two through the
same locations. Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
[ Precautions for wiring ]

2 power wires of different diameters cannot be connected to the power terminal block.
(Slack in the power wiring may cause abnormal heating.)
Use sleeve-insulated round pressure terminals for connections to the power terminal block.
If none are available, connect wires of the same diameter to both sides, as shown in the figure.
Insulating sleeve
Round pressure
terminal
Power wire
Connect same-thickness It is forbidden to It is forbidden to
wiring to both sides. connect the two connect wiring of
wires to one side. different thicknesses.
GOOD WRONG WRONG
Fig. 19
Follow the instructions are right if the wiring may get very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
• For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect firmly, then secure using the included clamping
material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the terminal board.
• Use the correct size of screwdriver when tightening the terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head
will strip the screw heads and make proper tightening impossible.
• Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
• For the tightening torque of the terminal screws, refer to the table below.
Tightening torque (N·m)

Remote controller wiring terminal block 0.79~0.97
Inter-unit wiring terminal block 1.18~1.44
Ground terminal 1.44~1.94
English 12
3P184443-2B
192 Installation
8. WIRING EXAMPLE
• Pair type: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit (standard system).
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units
(All indoor units operate according to the remote controller).
2
• 2 remote controller control: 2 remote controller control 1 indoor unit.
Pair type
Main power supply

Main switch
Fuse
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3
P1 P2
Indoor unit Remote

P1 P2
controller
Group control 2 remote controller control
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit Remote

controller
P1 P2
Remote controller (Optional accessories) Remote (Optional
controller P P 1 2 P1 P2
accessories)
(Optional
accessories)
NOTE
1. All transmission wiring except for the remote controller wires is polarized and must match the terminal
symbol.
most functions (as attached swing flap).
4. For simultaneous operation system, connect the remote controller cord to the master unit.
13 English
C : 3P184443-2B
Installation 193
9. FIELD SETTING
Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.
• Setting can be made by changing the “Mode No.”, “FIRST CODE NO.”, and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• For setting and operation, refer to the “FIELD SETTING” in the installation manual of the remote controller.
1. Setting air filter sign

• Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean
air filters.
• Change the SECOND CODE NO. according to Table 5 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the
room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for filter contamination-light)
Table 5
Spacing time of display air FIRST SECOND
Setting Mode No.
filter sign CODE NO. CODE NO.
Air filter
Approx. 200 hrs. 01
contamination-light
10 (20) 0
Air filter
Approx. 100 hrs. 02
contamination-heavy
2. Setting air flow rate increase mode

• It is possible to raise set air flow (HIGH and LOW) from the field. Change the SECOND CODE NO. as
shown in Table 6 to suit your needs.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for standard.)
Table 6
Setting Mode No. FIRST CODE NO. SECOND CODE NO.
Standard 01
A little increase 13(23) 0 02
Increase 03
〈When using wireless remote controllers〉
• When using wireless remote controllers, wireless remote controller address setting is necessary.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the wireless remote controller for setting instructions.
English 14
C : 3P184443-2B
194 Installation
3. CONTROL BY 2 REMOTE CONTROLLERS

(Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
1. Insert a wedge-head screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower parts of remote con-
troller and, working from the 2 positions, remove carefully the upper part. (Refer to Fig. 20) 2
(The remote controller PC board is attached to the upper part of the remote controller.)
2. Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC board to “S”.
(Leave the switch of the other remote controller set to “M”.) (Refer to Fig. 21)
15 English
C : 3P184443-2B
Installation 195
Upper part of Factory setting S

M
remote controller
Remote
controller
S
M PC board
Lower part of
remote controller
Insert the screwdriver here and gently Only one remote controller
work off the upper part of remote controller. needs to be changed
if factory settings have
Fig. 20 remained untouched. Fig. 21
10. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CON-
STRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED” .
1. HOW TO TEST OPERATION

1 Open the gas side stop valve.
2 Open the liquid side stop valve.
3 Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling
only).
4 Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button
( ).
5 Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( TEST ) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller)
and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.
6 Push AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST button ( ) to make sure the unit is in operation.
7 Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( TEST ) and operate normally.
8 Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
PRECAUTIONS
• Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
• After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the unit
in inspection mode, and make sure the malfunction code is “00” (=normal).
2. HOW TO DIAGNOSE FOR PROBLEMS

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller or the LED’s on the PC
board of the indoor unit.
䡵Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
1 With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the error code are
indicated on the liquid crystal display . In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by referning to
the table on the Error code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the indoor
unit no with the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
2 With the wireless remote controller.
When the operation stops due to trouble. the display on the indoor unit flashes. In such a case, diag-
nose the fault contents with the table on the Error code list looking for the error code which can be
English 16
3P184443-2B
196 Installation
Number of beeps 3 short beeps..........Perform all the following operations
1 short beep............Perform (3) and (6)
1 long beep .............No trouble
(3) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and upper figure of the error code flashes.
(4) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes 2 short beeps and find the upper
code. 2
(5) Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button and lower figure of the error code flashes.
(6) Continue pressing the PROGRAMMING TIME button unit it makes a long beep and find the lower
code.
• A long beep indicate the error code.
䡵Trouble shooting with the LEDs on the PC board (Refer to Table 9 )
The following checking can be made with the service monitor LEDs (green). (Normal when flashing)
: LED on : LED off : LED flashing
: Not used for trouble shooting
Table 9
Microcomputer Transmission
Details
normal monitor normal monitor
HAP(H1P) HBP(H2P) FAQ
Indoor unit is normal Diagnose the outdoor unit
Miswiring between the indoor and outdoor units
If the outdoor unit HAP(H1P) does not light, diagnose the outdoor unit.
If it is flashed, it is due to either miswiring or malfunction of the indoor
or outdoor unit PC board assembly. (NOTE 4)
Malfunction of the indoor unit PC board (NOTE 5)

Abnormal power supply, malfunction of PC board assembly or
disconnection between the indoor and outdoor units (NOTE 5)
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote
controller, “ ” starts flashing.
2. Keep down the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trouble
history disappears, after the trouble code goes on and off twice, followed by the code “00”(normal).
3. Depending on the model or the conditions, it may carry out an emergency shut-down.
4. If the HBP(H2P) is off, the branch wiring between each of the indoor and outdoor units may either be
incorrectly connected or broken. Before taking any of the diagnostic steps listed above, check the
branch wiring.
If the HBP(H2P) is off on an inverter, there is a possibility that the fuse on the outdoor unit’s PC board
is burnt out.
5. Cut off the power and wait for 5 seconds or longer. Turn on the power again and see if the LED is in
the same state again.
17 English
C : 3P184443-2B
Installation 197
3. Malfunction code
• For places where the error code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the system
Swing flap motor locked
A7
Only the air flow direction can not be controlled.
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Type set improper
AJ
C4 Sensor for heat exchanger lamp is fault
C9 Sensor for suction air lamp is fault
CJ The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possi-
ble.
E1 Outdoor unit’s PC board faulty (outdoor unit)
E3 High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit)
E5 Compressor motor lock malfunction (outdoor unit)
E7
Outdoor fan instantneous overcurrent malfunction (outdoor unit)
H7 Outdoor motor position signal malfunction (outdoor unit)
Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
H9
(NOTE 3)
Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3
(NOTE 3)
J6
(NOTE 3)
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor unit)
L4
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor unit)
L5
Electric thermal (outdoor unit)
L8
Stall prevention (outdoor unit)
L9
English 18
3P184443-2B
198 Installation
LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor unit)
P1 Open-phase (outdoor unit)
P3 PC board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor unit)
PJ
Type set improper (outdoor unit) 2
U0 Suction pipe temperature abnormal
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two of the L1,L2 and L3 leads.
Power source voltage malfunction (outdoor unit)
U2
Includes the defect in K1M.
Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board mounted
U4 on the indoor and the outdoor units.
UF If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired.
Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The com-
pressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of the
remote controller operation.)
U5
U8
UA Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main unit’s
PC board)
19 English
3P184443-2B
Installation 199
2.5 FBQ50B / 60B / 71BV1A (Operation / installation manual)

f h a
e
d c
a Indoor unit
b Remote controller
c Inlet air
d Discharge air
e Refrigerant piping, connection electric wire
f Drain pipe
g Inlet grille
Drain pumping out device (built-in)
h
Drains water removed from the room during cooling.
3P156215-7K
200 Installation
FBQ50BV1A
FBQ60BV1A SPLIT SYSTEM Air Conditioner Installation manual
FBQ71BV1A
2
CONTENTS
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS .........................................................................................1
2. BEFORE INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................2
3. SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE.................................................................................5
4. PREPARATIONS BEFORE INSTALLATION ..................................................................6
5. INDOOR UNIT INSTALLATION ......................................................................................6
6. REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK .....................................................................................7
7. DRAIN PIPING WORK ..................................................................................................10
8. INSTALLING THE DUCT ..............................................................................................12
9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK ..........................................................................................12
10. WIRING EXAMPLE .......................................................................................................15
11. FIELD SETTING............................................................................................................16
12. TEST OPERATION .......................................................................................................17
1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Please read these “SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS” carefully before installing air conditioning equipment and
be sure to install it correctly. After completing the installation, make sure that the unit operates properly during
the start-up operation. Please instruct the customer on how to operate the unit and keep it maintained.
Also, inform customers that they should store this installation manual along with the operation manual for
future reference.
This air conditioner comes under the term “appliances not accessible to the general public”.
Meaning of warning and caution symbols.
WARNING .........Failure to observe a warning may result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION ..........Failure to observe a caution may result in injury or damage to the equipment.
WARNING
• Ask your dealer or qualified personnel to carry out installation work. Do not try to install the air conditioner
yourself.
• Perform installation work in accordance with this installation manual.
Failure to use the specified parts may result in water leakage, electric shocks, fire or the unit falling.
A foundation of insufficient strength may result in the equipment falling and causing injuries.
• Carry out the specified installation work after considering strong winds, typhoons or earthquakes.
Improper installation work may result in the equipment falling and causing accidents.
1
3P156215-8K
Installation 201
• Make sure that all wiring is secured, the specified wires and used, and no external forces act on the terminal
Improper connections or installation may result in fire.
Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or the terminals overheating.
• If the refrigerant gas leaks during installation, ventilate the area immediately.
Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas comes into contact with fire.
• After completing the installation work, check that the refrigerant gas does not leak.
• Before touching electrical parts, turn off the unit.
• Be sure to establish an earth.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire.
Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.
• Do not directly touch the refrigerant that leaks from the refrigerant piping connection.
CAUTION
• While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping in order to ensure proper
drainage and insulate piping in order to prevent condensate.
Improper drain piping may result in water leakage and property damage.
• Install the indoor and outdoor units, power supply wiring and connecting wiring at least 1 m away from tele-
visions or radios in order to prevent image interference or noise.
(Depending on the radio waves, a distance of 1 m may not be sufficient enough to eliminate the noise.)
• Remote controller (wireless kit) transmitting distance can result shorter than expected in rooms with elec-
tronic fluorescent lamps (inverter or rapid start types).
(a)where a mineral oil mist or an oil spray or vapor is produced, for example in a kitchen
Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall off or result in water leakage.
(b)where corrosive gas, such as sulfurous acid gas, is produced
Corroding copper pipes or soldered parts may result in refrigerant leakage.
(c) near machinery emitting electromagnetic waves
Electromagnetic waves may disturb the operation of the control system and result in a malfunction of the
equipment.
(d)where flammable gases may leak, where there are carbon fiber or ignitable dust suspensions in the air,
or where volatile flammables such as thinner or gasoline are handled.
• Do not exert pressure on the resin parts when opening the unit or when moving it after opening.
• Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before installing the unit. (Using an incorrect refrigerant
will prevent normal operation of the unit.)
• The accessories needed for installation must be retained in your custody until the installation work is com-
pleted. Do not discard them!
• Leave the unit inside its packaging while moving, until reaching the installation site. Where unpacking is
unavoidable, use a sling of soft material or protective plates together with a rope when lifting, to avoid dam-
age or scratches to the unit.
• For the installation of an outdoor unit, refer to the installation manual attached to the outdoor unit.
2
3P156215-8K
202 Installation
• Do not use the unit in locations with high salt content in the air such as beachfront property, locations where
the voltage fluctuates such as factories, or in automobiles or marine vessels.
1. Precautions
2
• Laden with mineral oil, or filled with oil vapor or spray like in kitchens. (Plastic parts may deteriorate.)
• Where the air contains high levels of salt such as that near the ocean and where voltage fluctuates
• The unit should be installed at least 2.5m from the floor.
2. Accessories
Check if the following accessories are included with your unit.
Insulation for
Name (1) Metal clamp (2) Chain (3) Drain hose Sealing pad
fitting
Quantity 1 pc. 1 set 1 pc. 1 each 1 each
(4) For gas pipe (6) Large
Shape
FBQ50BV1A 2 pcs.
FBQ60 · 71BV1A 3 pcs. (5) For liquid pipe (7) Middle
(8) Washer for (12) Duct compan-

Name hanger Clamp (11) Screw for chains ion flange con-
bracket nection screw
Quantity 8 pcs. 4 pcs. 2 pcs. 1 set 1 set
(9) Large (10) Small
Shape
FBQ50BV1A 4 pcs. FBQ50BV1A 8 pcs.

FBQ60 · 71BV1A 6 pcs. FBQ60 · 71BV1A 12 pcs.
(13) Small sealing

Name
pad
Quantity 2 pcs. (Other)
• Operation manual
• Installation manual
Shape
3
3P156215-8K
Installation 203
3. Optional accessories
• For this indoor unit, the optional remote controller is necessary.
• Remote controller
Remote controller BRC1C61
NOTE
• If the customer wishes to use a remote controller that is not listed on the table, select a suitable remote
controller after consulting catalogs and technical materials.
FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CONSTRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER
INSTALLATION IS FINISHED.
a. Items to be checked after completion of work
Are the indoor unit and outdoor unit fixed
firmly?
nents burn out.
Is the unit safely grounded? It may result in electric shock.
nents burn out.
b. Items to be checked at time of delivery

∗Also review the “1. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS”
Did you explain about operations while showing the operation manual to your customer?
Did you hand the operation manual over to your customer?
c. Points for explanation about operations

The items with WARNING and CAUTION marks in the operation manual are the items pertaining
to possibilities for bodily injury and material damage in addition to the general usage of the product.
Accordingly, it is necessary that you make a full explanation about the described contents and also ask
your customers to read the operation manual.
4. Note to the installer

Be sure to instruct customers how to properly operate the unit (especially cleaning filters <field supplied
parts>, operating different functions, and adjusting the temperature) by having them carry out opera-
tions themselves while looking at the manual.
4
3P156215-8K
204 Installation

Please attach additional thermal insulation material to the unit body when it is believed that the relative humid-
ity in the ceiling exceeds 80%. Use glass wool, polyethylene foam, or similar with a thickness of 10 mm or
more as thermal insulation material. (After attaching additional thermal insulation material, manufacture’s
label should appear.)
2
1. Select an installation site where the following conditions are fulfilled and that meets
your customer’s approval.
• In the upper space (including the back of the ceiling) of the indoor unit where there is no possible
dripping of water from the refrigerant pipe, drain pipe, water pipe, etc.
• Where nothing blocks air passage.
• Where the ceiling is strong enough to bear the indoor unit weight.
• Where sufficient clearance for maintenance and service can be ensured.
• Where there is no risk of flammable gas leakage.
• Where piping between indoor and outdoor units is possible within the allowable limit. (Refer to the
installation manual for the outdoor unit.)
CAUTION
• Keep indoor unit, outdoor unit, power supply wiring and transmission wiring at least 1 m away from televi-
sions and radios. This is to prevent image interference and noise in those electrical appliances.
(Noise may be generated depending on the conditions under which the electric wave is generated, even if
1 m is kept.)
Drain pipe
Power supply
wiring port
Liquid pipe
300
space (*)
or more
or more
Mainte-
nance
2500 or more
Gas pipe Transmission wiring port

Maintenance
300
space
Maintenance drain hose
Floor surface
(*) If the ceiling is removable, this maintenance space don't need. (Length : mm)
2. Use suspension bolts for installation. Check whether the ceiling is strong enough to
support the weight of the unit or not. If there is a risk, reinforce the ceiling before
installing the unit.
(Installation pitch is marked on the paper pattern for installation. Refer to it to check for points requiring
reinforcement.)
5
3P156215-8K
Installation 205
1. Relation of ceiling opening to unit and suspension bolt position. (Refer to Fig. 1)
• Install the inspection opening on the control
box side where maintenance and inspection
of the control box.
Suspension bolt pitch

Install the inspection opening also in the
lower part of the unit.
(Length : mm)
A
B
Model A B C Indoor unit
FBQ50BV1A 700 750 400×400
FBQ60 · 71BV1A 1000 1050 600×600
145 630 Inspection opening

size C
Pipe
Suspension Control box
bolt pitch
Suspension bolt (×4)
800
Fig. 1
2. The fan speed for this indoor unit is preset to provide standard external static pressure.
• If higher or lower external static pressure is required, reset the external static pressure by changing
the initial setting from the remote controller. Refer to the section entitled “11. FIELD SETTING”.
3. Install the suspension bolts. (Refer to Fig. 2)

<Installation example>
(Use M10 size bolt for the suspension bolt)
Use anchors for existing ceilings, and a sunken insert, Ceiling slab
sunken anchor or other field supplied parts for new ceil- Anchor
ings to reinforce the ceiling to bear the weight of the unit. Long nut or
turn-buckle
NOTE Suspension bolt
Indoor unit
• All the above parts are field supplied.
Fig. 2

<When installing optional accessories, read also the installation manual for optional accessories.
Depending on the field conditions, it may be easier to install optional accessories before the indoor
unit is installed.>
Be sure to use the furnished accessories or ones that match the specifications when installing.
1. Install the indoor unit temporarily. Field supply

• Attach the hanger bracket to the suspension bolt. Be sure to
(8)Washer for hanger
fix it securely by using a nut and washer (8) from the upper
bracket (attached)
and lower sides of the hanger bracket. (Refer to Fig. 3)
Tighten (double nuts)

Fig. 3
[PRECAUTION]
Since the unit uses a plastic drain pan, prevent welding spatter and other foreign substances from
entering the outlet hole during installation.
6
3P156215-8K
206 Installation
2. Check the unit is horizontally level. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Level
2
Fig. 4 Vinyl tube

CAUTION
• The indoor unit is equipped with a built-in drain pump and float switch. Verify that it is level by using a level
or a water-filled vinyl tube.
(If the unit is tilted against condensate flow, the float switch may malfunction and cause water to drip.)
3. Tighten the upper nut.
4. Fix the attached chains.

• Make sure to install the chains as shown Bottom plate
below.
(2) Chain (attached)

Bottom frame
(11) Screw for chains
(attached)
Fig. 5
CAUTION
Otherwise, the bottom plate may fall off.
5. Setting up the attached chains.

• Fix the chains with the machine screws at the hole position of the bottom plate and the bottom frame.
(2 or 3 positions)

¢For refrigerant piping of outdoor unit, see the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit.²
¢Execute heat insulation work completely on both sides of the gas piping and the liquid piping. Otherwise, a
water leakage can result sometimes.²
insulation which is sufficiently resistant.)
¢Also, in cases where the temperature and humidity of the refrigerant piping sections might exceed 30°C or
RH80%, reinforce the refrigerant insulation. (20 mm or thicker) Condensate may form on the surface of the
insulating material.²
¢Be sure to check the type of refrigerant to be used before doing any work. (Using an incorrect refrigerant will
prevent normal operation of the unit.)²
7
3P156215-8K
Installation 207
CAUTION
• To prevent dust, moisture or other foreign matter from infiltrating the tube, either pinch the end or cover it
with tape.
• Do not allow anything other than the designated refrigerant to get mixed into the refrigerant circuit, such as
air, etc. If any refrigerant gas leaks while working on the unit, ventilate the room thoroughly right away.
• Be sure to use both a spanner and torque wrench together, as shown

Torque wrench
in the drawing, when connecting or disconnecting pipes to/from the
unit. (Refer to Fig. 6)
• When connecting the flare nut, apply ester oil or ether oil to the flare Spanner
section (only inside), and spin 3-4 times before screwing in.
(Refer to Fig. 7) Pipe union
Flare nut
Fig. 6
NOTE
• Use the flare nut included with the unit main body. Coat the flare section (only inside)
Table 1 Fig. 7
Pipe size Tightening torque Flare dimensions A (mm) Flare
φ 6.4
˚
14.2 – 17.2N · m 8.7 – 9.1
45˚± 2
φ 12.7 49.5 – 60.3N · m 16.2 – 16.6 R0.4-0.8
90˚± 2˚
φ 15.9 61.8 – 75.4N · m 19.3 – 19.7 A
CAUTION
Over-tightening the flare nut may break it and/or cause the refrigerant to leak.

follow the installation method mentioned below
When you keep on tightening the flare nut with a spanner, there is a point where the tightening torque sud-
denly increases. From that position, further tighten the flare nut the angle shown below:
8
C : 3P156215-8K
208 Installation
leakage by thoroughly studying the following figure and using the attached heat insulating materials for fit-
ting (4) and (5). (Fasten both ends with the clamps (9).) (Refer to Fig. 8)
• Wrap the sealing pad (7) only around the insulation for the joints on the gas piping side. (Refer to Fig. 8)
(7) Middle sealing pad (attached)
(Wrap from the bottom up) (4) Insulation for fitting (attached) 2
(for gas line)
Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Attach to the bottom (5)Insulation for fitting (attached)
(For both gas piping (for liquid line)
and liquid piping) (9) Clamp (attached) (×4)
Fig. 8
CAUTION
For local insulation, be sure to insulate local piping all the way into the pipe connections inside the machine.
Exposed piping may cause condensation or burns on contact.
CAUTION
piping.
2
• Nitrogen should be set to 0.02 MPa (0.2 kg/cm ) with a pressure-reducing valve if brazing while inserting
nitrogen into the piping. (Refer to Fig. 9)
Refrigerant piping Taping
Part to be
hands valve
brazed
Nitrogen
Nitrogen Fig. 9
9
3P156215-8K
Installation 209
1. Rig drain piping (Refer to Fig. 10, Fig. 11)

• As for drain work, perform piping in such a manner that water can be drained properly.
As for drain piping, the connection can be made from three different directions.
• Employ a pipe with either the same diameter or with the diameter larger (excluding the raising section)
than that of the connecting pipe (PVC pipe, nominal diameter 25 mm, outside diameter 32 mm).
• Keep the drain pipe short and sloping downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100 to prevent air pockets
from forming.
• If the drain pipe cannot be sufficiently set on a slope, execute the drain raising piping.
• To keep the drain pipe from sagging, space hanging wires every 1 to 1.5 m.
Hanger bracket 1~1.5 m 1/100 gradient or more
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
CAUTION
Water pooling in the drainage piping can cause the drain to clog.
• Use the attached drain hose (3) and Metal clamp (1).
• Insert the drain hose into the drain socket up to the base, and tighten the Metal clamp securely within
the portion of a white tape of the hose-inserted tip. Tighten the Metal clamp until the screw head is less
than 4 mm from the hose.
• Wrap the attached sealing pad (6) over the Metal clamp and drain hose to insulate.
• Make sure that heat insulation work is executed on the following 2 spots to prevent any possible water
leakage due to dew condensation.
• Indoor drain pipe
• Drain socket
Metal clamp (1) Metal clamp (1) Large sealing pad (6)
(attached) (attached) (attached)
Bring the seam

Drain hose (3) of the sealer to
Tape (White) the top
4 mm
Fig. 12 Fig. 13
<PRECAUTIONS FOR DRAIN RAISING PIPING>
• Install the drain raising pipes at a height of less than 250 mm.
• Install the drain raising pipes at a right angle to the indoor unit and no more than 300 mm from the unit.
Ceiling slab
Less 300 mm 1~1.5 m Hanging bar

(1) Clamp (Attached with unit)
Adjustable range
(0~250 mm)
Drain raising pipe

(Part to be product in the field)
Drain hose
(3) Drain hose (Attached with unit)
Horizontal or up-grade
The drain hose must be horizontally positioned or have a slight up-grade.

If the air accumulates inside the hose and the drain pump is at a
standstill, the drain may flow back and generate an abnormal sound.
Fig. 14
10
3P156215-8K
210 Installation
NOTE
• To ensure no excessive pressure is applied to the included drain hose (3), do not bend or twist when
installing. (This may cause leakage.)
• If converging multiple drain pipes, install according to the procedure shown below.
Multiple drain piping
2
0~250 mm
Keep the drain pipe short and sloping

downwards at a gradient of at least 1/100
to prevent air pockets from forming.
Water pooling in the drain piping
can cause the drain to clog.
Fig. 15
Select converging drain pipes whose gauge is suitable for the operating capacity of the unit.
2. After piping work is finished, check if drainage flows smoothly.

• Open the water inlet lid, add approximately 1 L of water gradually and check drainage flow.
(Refer to Fig. 16)
Water inlet
Portable pump
Water inlet lid
Refrigerant pipes Close

Drain outlet for maintenance Open
(with rubber plug) Bucket
Fig. 16
NOTE
• Use the drain outlet for maintenance to drain water from the drain pan.
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS FINISHED

• Check drainage flow during cool running, explained in the section entitled. “12. TEST OPERATION”
WHEN ELECTRIC WIRING WORK IS NOT FINISHED

CAUTION
• Electrical wiring work should be done by a certified electrician.
• If someone who does not have the proper qualifications performs the work, perform the following after
test run is complete.
• Remove the control box lid. Connect the single phase power supply (Single plase 50 Hz 220-240V) to
connections No.1 and No.2 on the terminal block for wiring the units. Do not connect to No.3 of the ter-
minal block for wiring the units. (The drain pump will not operate.) Connect the ground wire firmly.
When carrying out wiring work around the control box, make sure none of the connectors come
undone. Be sure to attach the control box before turning on the power.
• After confirming drainage (Fig. 16, Fig. 17), turn off the power and remove the power supply.
• Attach the control box lid as before.
Terminal block for wiring
1 2 3
Control box Single phase power supply

Fig. 17
11
3P156215-8K
Installation 211
8. INSTALLING THE DUCT

Connect the duct supplied in the field.
Air inlet side
• Attach the duct and intake-side flange.
• Wrap the intake-side flange and duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to prevent
air escaping.
CAUTION
Be sure to attach an air filter <field supply> inside the air passage on the intake side. (Use an air filter
whose dust collecting efficiency is at least 50% in a gravimetric technique.)
Flange Flange Insulation material

Main unit
(Field supply)
Aluminum tape
(Field supply)
Aluminum tape
(Field supply)
Air inlet side Air outlet side
Air outlet side

• Connect the duct according to the air inside of the outlet-side flange.
• Wrap the outlet-side flange and the duct connection area with aluminum tape or something similar to pre-
vent air escaping.
CAUTION
• Be sure to insulate the duct to prevent condensation from forming. (Material: glass wool or polyethylene
foam, 25 mm thick)
• Use electric insulation between the duct and the wall when using metal ducts to pass metal laths of the net
or fence shape or metal plating into wooden buildings.

• For electric wiring work, see also the “wiring diagram” attached to the control box lid.
• Be sure to ground the air conditioner
• Plumbing: no grounding effect if hard vinyl piping is used.
• Install a wiring interrupter or ground-fault circuit interrupter for the power wiring.
• Make sure the earth resistance is no greater than 100 Ω.

The remote controller cord should be procured locally. Refer to the Table 2 when preparing one.
12
3P156215-8K
212 Installation
Table 2
2
Wiring the units H05VV - U4G (NOTE 1, 2) 2.5 —
Remote controller cord Shield wire (2 wires) (NOTE 3) 0.75 - 1.25 Max. 300 m (NOTE. 4)
2
NOTE
2. Run transmission wiring between the indoor and outdoor units through a conduit to protect against exter-
nal forces, and feed the conduit through the wall together with refrigerant piping.
3. Use double insulation wire for remote controller (sheath thickness: ≥1 mm) or run wires through a wall or
conduit so that the user can not come in contact with them.
4. This length shall be the total extended length in the system of the group control.
PRECAUTION
Connection of wiring units, ground wire and remote controller cord. (Refer to Fig. 18 and 19)
• Wiring the units and ground for the wire
Remove the control box lid and pull out the control box. (Refer to Fig. 18)
Next, pull the wires inside through the rubber bush A and connect them to their respective terminals on the
terminal block for wiring the units (4P) inside. Also, connect the ground wire to the ground terminal. In doing
this, pull the wiring through the rubber bush A and fix it in place with the clamp.
• Remote controller cord
Connect the cord to the terminal block for remote controller (2P) (no polarity). In doing this, pull the wiring
through the rubber bush B and fix it in place with the clamp.
Rubber bush B
Rubber bush A CAUTION
*Wiring the units • After wiring, adhere the attached
small sealing pad (13) around the
*Do not clamp remote wires as shown below.
controller cords together with (Be sure to adhere it to avoid
wires connecting the units. water from outside unit.)
Doing so may cause
malfunction. Note) No gap are allowed.
(Between rubber bush
and sealing material.)
Rubber bush
*Remote controller cord A
Wire
Control box
Inside unit Outside unit

WIRING DIAGRAM Small sealing pad (13)
Control box lid (Adhere it around the wire)
Fig. 18
[ How to adhere it ]
Note) In case of two wires or more,
adhere sealing material to
each wire separately.
13
3P156215-8K
Installation 213
Control box Motor lead wire

Terminal block for
wiring the units
Grounding terminal for Clamp material Wiring the
the remote controller units
123
Ground the shield Ground
part of shield wire. wire
Refer to NOTE of (10) Clamp (attached)
“10. WIRING EXAMPLE”
Grounding
terminal Clamp material
Remote
C-cup P1 P2
controller
Shield part cord
washer
(10) Clamp (attached)
Indoor PC board Terminal block for remote controller
Arrow view A
Fig. 19
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
CAUTION
• When clamping wiring, use the included clamping material to prevent outside pressure being exerted on the
wiring connections and clamp firmly. When doing the wiring, make sure the wiring is neat and does not
cause the control box lid to stick up, then close the cover firmly.
• When attaching the control box lid, make sure you do not pinch any wires.
• After all the wiring connections are done, fill in any gaps in the through holes with putty or insulation (pro-
cured locally) to prevent small animals and insects from entering the unit from outside. (If any do get in, they
could cause short circuits in the control box.)
• Outside the machine, separate the weak wiring (remote controller cord) and strong wiring (interunit,
ground, and other power wiring) at least 50 mm so that they do not pass through the same place together.
Proximity may cause electrical interference, malfunctions, and breakage.
• Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal. (Looseness in the connection
may cause overheating.) (Refer to Fig. 20)
• Observe the notes when wiring to the terminal block for wiring the units.
(Use a round crimp-style terminal with insulation sleeve for connection to the terminal block for wiring the
units. In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, connect wires of the same gauge to the both
side as shown in Fig. 20.)
Round crimp-style Connect wires of the Do not connect wires Do not connect
same gauge to both of the same gauge to wires of different
terminal side. (GOOD) one side. (WRONG) gauges. (WRONG)
Attach insulation Electric wire

sleeve
Fig. 20
Follow the instructions below if the wiring gets very hot due to slack in the power wiring.
that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
• If the terminal screw are tightened too hard, screws might be damaged.
• Refer to the table below for the tightening torque of the terminal screws.
14
3P156215-8K
214 Installation
Tightening torque (N · m)
Terminal block for remote controller 0.79 to 0.97
Terminal block for wiring the units 1.18 to 1.44
Ground terminal 1.44 to 1.94
2
10. WIRING EXAMPLE

For the wiring of outdoor unit, refer to the installation manuals attached to the outdoor unit.
• 1 remote controller control: 1 remote controller controls 1 indoor unit (standard system). (Refer to Fig. 21)
• Group control: 1 remote controller controls up to 16 indoor units.
(All indoor units operate according to the remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 22)
• 2 remote controllers control: 2 remote controllers control 1 indoor unit. (Refer to Fig. 23)
Fig. 21
1 remote controller control
Outdoor unit
1 2 3
Indoor unit
1 2 3
P1 P2
(NOTE. 2)
Remote controller (NOTE. 2)
P1 P2
.
Fig. 22 Fig. 23
Group control 2 remote controllers control

1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
Indoor unit
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
P1 P2
P 1 P2 P 1 P2 P1 P2
(NOTE. 2) (NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2) (NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2) (NOTE. 2) P1 P2 P1 P2 (NOTE. 2)
(NOTE. 2) P 1 P2
(NOTE. 2) (NOTE. 2)
Remote controllers
Remote controller
NOTE
2. Connect a shielded portion with the grounding terminal for remote controller inside the control box. (Also,
connect the ground for the remote control to a grounded metal part.)
15
3P156215-8K
Installation 215
11. FIELD SETTING

<Field setting must be made from the remote controller in accordance with the installation condition.>
• Setting can be made by changing the “Mode No.”, “FIRST CODE NO.” and “SECOND CODE NO.”.
• For setting procedures and instructions, refer to the “FIELD SETTING” in the installation manual of the
remote controller.
1. Setting external static pressure

• Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 3 depending on the resistance of the connecting duct.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” normal.)
Table 3
External static pressure Mode No. FIRST CODE NO. SECOND CODE NO.
Normal: 49Pa (5 mmH2O) 01
High static pressure:
02
88 Pa (9 mmH2O) 13 (23) 6
Low static pressure: 20Pa
03
(2 mmH2O)
2. Setting with installing optional accessories

• Refer to the installation manual of the optional accessories for the optional accessories installation.
3. Setting air filter sign <Filter : Field supplied parts>

• Remote controllers are equipped with liquid crystal display air filer signs to display the time to clean air
filters.
• Change the SECOND CODE No. according to Table 4 depending on the amount of dirt or dust in the room.
(SECOND CODE NO. is factory set to “01” for filter contamination-light)
Table 4
Setting Mode No.
Air filter
Approx. 2500 hrs 01
contamination-light
10 (20) 0
Air filter
Approx. 1250 hrs 02
contamination-heavy
4. When implementing group control

• When using as a pair unit or as a parent unit for simultaneous operation multi, you may simultaneous
start/stop (group) control up to 16 units with the remote controller.
• In this case, all the indoor units in the group will operate in accordance with the group control remote
controller.
• Select a remote controller which matches as many of the functions (swing flap, etc) in the group as
possible.
Group control remote control

Fig. 24
Wiring Method
(1)Remove the control box lids. (See ‘‘9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK’’.)
(2)Cross-wire the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) inside the control box. (There is no
polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 22 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 13)
5. Control by 2 remote controllers (Controlling 1 indoor unit by 2 remote controllers)

16
3P156215-8K
216 Installation
MAIN/SUB CHANGEOVER
(1)Insert a screwdriver into the recess between the upper and lower part of remote controller and,
working from the 2 positions, pry off the upper part. (The remote controller PC board is attached to
the upper part of remote controller.) (Refer to Fig. 25)
(2)Turn the MAIN/SUB changeover switch on one of the two remote controller PC board to “S”.
(Leave the switch of the other remote controller set to “M”.) (Refer to Fig. 26) 2
Upper part of remote controller S
M
(Factory setting)
Remote controller
S PC board
M
Lower part of
remote
controller (Only one remote controller
needs to be changed
Insert the screwdriver here and gently if factory settings have
work off the upper part of remote controller. remained untouched.)
Fig. 25 Fig. 26
Wiring Method (See ‘‘9. ELECTRIC WIRING WORK’’ on page 12)

(3)Remove the control box lids.
(4)Add remote control 2 (slave) to the terminal block for remote controller (P1, P2) in the control
box. (There is no polarity.) (Refer to Fig. 23 on page 15 and Table 2 on page 13)
12. TEST OPERATION

Refer to the section of “FOR THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, TAKE SPECIAL CARE DURING CON-
STRUCTION AND CHECK AFTER INSTALLATION IS FINISHED” .
1. How to test operation

1. Open the gas side stop valve.
2. Open the liquid side stop valve.
3. Electrify crank case heater for 6 hours (Not required in case of a unit exclusively designed for cooling only).
4. Set to cooling operation with the remote controller and start operation by pushing ON/OFF button ( ).
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( ) 4 times (2 times for wireless remote controller)
TEST
and operate at Test Operation mode for 3 minutes.

6. Press INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button ( ) and operate normally.
TEST
7. Confirm function of unit according to the operation manual.
PRECAUTIONS
• Refer to the diagnoses below if the unit does not operate properly.
• After completing the test run, press the INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION button once to put the
unit in inspection mode, and make sure the Malfunction code is “00” (=normal).
NOTE
2. Cautions for servicing

With the power on. Troubles can be monitored on the remote controller.
• If the air conditioner does not operate normally after installing the air conditioner, a malfunction shown
in the table below may happened.
17
3P156215-8K
Installation 217
Remote control display Malfunction

• Power supply trouble or Open phase connection
No display
• Wrong remote control connection wiring
• Remote control faulty
• Fuse faulty
88∗
88 flashing • Wrong wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
∗ After turning on the power, the maximum is 90 seconds, although it will only display “88”. This is not
a problem, and it will be set for 90 seconds.
Trouble shooting with the display on the liquid crystal display remote controller.
With the wired remote controller. (NOTE 1)
When the operation stops due to trouble, operation lamp flashed, and “ ” and the Malfunction
code are indicated on the liquid crystal display. In such a case, diagnose the fault contents by refering
to the table on the Malfunction code list it case of group control, the unit No. is displayed so that the
indoor unit no with the trouble can be recognized. (NOTE 2)
NOTE
1. In case wired remote controller. Press the INSPECTION /TEST OPERATION button on remote con-
troller, “ ” starts flashing and changes the inspection mode.
2. Keep pressing the ON/OFF button for 5 seconds or longer in the inspection mode and the above trou-
ble history disappears, after the Malfunction code goes on and off twice, followed by the code
“00”(normal). The display changes from the inspection mode to the normal mode.
CAUTION
If the interior finish work is not completed yet at the time when the commissioning of the system is
finished, instruct the user not to operate the unit until the interior finish work is completed for protec-
tion of the indoor unit. If the unit is operated before the interior finish work is completed, the indoor
unit may be contaminated by substances generated from paint and adhesives used during the inte-
rior finish work and cause a splash or a water leak.
3. Malfunction code
• For places where the malfunction code is left blank, the “ ” indication is not displayed. Though the
system continues operating, be sure to inspect the system and make repairs as necessary.
A5 Freeze-up protector “or stopped by high pressure control”
Air cleaner faulty
AH
Type set improper
AJ
18
3P156215-8K
218 Installation

CJ
The remote controller thermistor does not function, but the system thermo run is possible.
E3 High pressure abnormal(outdoor unit) 2
E6 Compressor motor lock by over current (outdoor)
E7
Outdoor fan instantneous overcurrent malfunction
E8 Input overcurrent (outdoor unit)
EA Cooling/heating switch malfunction (outdoor)
F6 High pressure control (in cooling)
H6 Faulty position detection sensor (outdoor unit)
H8 CT abnormality (outdoor unit)
H9 Outdoor air thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J3 Discharge pipe thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J6 Heat exchanger thermistor faulty (outdoor unit)
J8 Liquid piping thermistor malfunction (heating) (outdoor)
J9 Gas piping thermistor malfunction (cooling) (outdoor)
L3 Electrical parts heat fault
Overheated heat-radiating fin (outdoor)
L4
Instantaneous overcurrent (outdoor)
L5
Electric thermal (outdoor)
L8
Stall prevention (outdoor)
L9
LC Transmission malfunction between the outdoor control units’ inverters (outdoor)
P1 Open-phase or main circuit low voltage (outdoor)
P3 PC-board temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
P4 Heat-radiating fin temperature sensor malfunction (outdoor)
PJ
U0 Suction pipe temperature abnormal or refrigerant shortage
Reverse phase
U1
Reverse two of the L1,L2and L3 leads.
19
3P156215-8K
Installation 219
Power source voltage malfunction

U2
Incorrect wiring between indoor and outdoor units or malfunction of the PC board
U4 mounted on the indoor and the outdoor units.
UF If UF is shown, the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units is not properly wired.
Therefore, immediately disconnect the power supply and correct the wiring. (The com-
pressor and the fan mounted on the outdoor unit may start operation independent of
the remote controller operation.)
U5
U8
Setting is wrong for selector switch of multi-system. (see switch SS2 on the main unit’s
UA
PC board)
Incorrect combination with indoor unit and outdoor unit
20
3P156215-8K
220 Installation
EDAU28-856 Installation of outdoor unit
3. Installation of outdoor unit

3.1 RKS25EB / 35EBVMA, RXS25EB / 35EBVMA (Installation manual)
3P208365-6A M07B057
DAIKIN AIR CONDITIONER 2
Two-dimensional bar code
is a code for manufacturing.
Safety Precautions
• Read these Safety Precautions carefully to ensure correct installation.
• This manual classifies the precautions into WARNING and CAUTION.
Be sure to follow all the precautions below: they are all important for ensuring safety.
WARNING Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION Failure to follow any of CAUTION may result in grave consequences in some cases.
• The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual:
Be sure to observe this instruction. Be sure to establish an earth connection. Never attempt.
• After completing installation, test the unit to check for installation errors. Give the user adequate instructions
concerning the use and cleaning of the unit according to the Operation Manual.
WARNING
• Installation should be left to the dealer or another professional. Improper installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
• Install the air conditioner according to the instructions given in this manual. Incomplete installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
• Be sure to use the supplied or specified installation parts. Use of other parts may cause the unit to come to lose, water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
• Install the air conditioner on a solid base that can support the weight of the unit. An inadequate base or incomplete installation may cause injury in the event the unit falls off the base.
• Electrical work should be carried out in accordance with the installation manual and the national electrical wiring
rules or code of practice. Insufficient capacity or incomplete electrical work may cause electrical shock or fire.
• Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit. Never use a power supply shared by another appliance.
• For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord. Do not
put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit.(Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
• Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units.
Firmly clamp the interconnecting wires so their terminals receive no external stresses. Incomplete connections or clamping may cause terminal overheating or fire.
• After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the
electrical covers or panels. Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire.
• When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified
refrigerant (R410A), such as air. (Any presence of air or other foreign substance in the refrigerant circuit causes an abnormal pressure rise or rupture, resulting in injury.)
• If any refrigerant has leaked out during the installation work, ventilate the room.
(The refrigerant produces a toxic gas if exposed to flames.)
• After all installation is complete, check to make sure that no refrigerant is leaking out.
• During pump-down, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still running and the stop valve is open during
pump-down, air will be sucked in when the refrigerant piping is removed, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
• During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor.
If the compressor is not attached and the stop valve is open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing
abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
• Be sure to establish an earth. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire. A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
• Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.
CAUTION
• Do not install the air conditioner in a place where there is danger of exposure to inflammable gas leakage.
If the gas leaks and builds up around the unit, it may catch fire.
• Establish drain piping according to the instructions of this manual. Inadequate piping may cause flooding.
• Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench.
If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.
• Make sure to provide for adequate measures in order to prevent that the outdoor unit be used as a shelter by small animals.
Small animals making contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions, smoke or fire. Please instruct the customer to keep the area around the unit clean.
3P208365-6A
Installation 221
Installation of outdoor unit EDAU28-856
Accessories
Accessories supplied with the outdoor unit:
(B) Drain plug (Heat pump-Models)
(A) Installation manual 1 1
There is on the bottom packing case.
Precautions for Selecting the Location

1) Choose a place solid enough to bear the weight and vibration of the unit, where the operation noise will
not be amplified.
2) Choose a location where the hot air discharged from the unit or the operation noise will not cause a
nuisance to the neighbors of the user.
3) Avoid places near a bedroom and the like, so that the operation noise will cause no trouble.
4) There must be sufficient spaces for carrying the unit into and out of the site.
5) There must be sufficient space for air passage and no obstructions around the air inlet and the air outlet.
6) The site must be free from the possibility of flammable gas leakage in a nearby place.
7) Install units, power cords and inter-unit cables at least 3 meter away from television and radio sets. This is
to prevent interference to images and sounds. (Noises may be heard even if they are more than 3 meter
away depending on radio wave conditions.)
8) In coastal areas or other places with salty atmosphere of sulfate gas, corrosion may shorten the life of the
air conditioner.
9) Since drain flows out of the outdoor unit, do not place under the unit anything which must be kept away
from moisture.
NOTE
Cannot be installed hanging from ceiling or stacked.
CAUTION
When operating the air conditioner in a low outdoor ambient
temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described
below. Construct a large canopy.
1) To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its Construct a pedestal.
suction side facing the wall.
2) Never install the outdoor unit at a site where the suction
side may be exposed directly to wind. Install the unit high enough off
3) To prevent exposure to wind, it is recommended to install a the ground to prevent burying in
snow.
baffle plate on the air discharge side of the outdoor unit.
4) In heavy snowfall areas, select an installation site where the
snow will not affect the unit.
Precautions on Installation
• Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the unit will not cause any operating vibration
or noise after installed.
• In accordance with the foundation drawing, fix the unit securely by means of the foundation bolts. (Prepare
four sets of M8 or M10 foundation bolts, nuts and washers each which are available on the market.)
• It is best to screw in the foundation bolts until their
length are 20mm from the foundation surface.
20
3P208365-6A
222 Installation
Outdoor Unit Installation Drawings
Wrap the insulation pipe with

the finishing tape from bottom
to top.
2
Max. allowable length 20m
Max. allowable height 15m
Additional refrigerant
required for refrigerant
20g/m
pipe exceeding
10m in length.
Gas pipe O.D. 9.5mm
Liquid pipe O.D. 6.4mm
* Be sure to add the proper amount of additional refrigerant.
Failure to do so may result in reduced performance.
** When connecting the FVXS indoor unit, the shortest piping
length should be no less than around 2.5m.
Stop valve cover

250mm from wa How to remove the stop valve cover.
ll
Remove the screw on the
stop valve cover.
Slide the lid downward
to remove it.
How to attach the stop valve cover.
Insert the upper part of the
stop valve cover into the
e
tres -hol
outdoor unit to install.

Foo 11
cen t bolt
3
Tighten the screws.
(Foot b 574
In sites with poor drainage, use olt-hole Allow space for piping
centre 105.5
block bases for outdoor unit. s) and electrical servicing.
(From
Adjust foot height until the unit unit’s s
is leveled. Otherwise, water ide)
leakage or pooling of water may Where there is a danger of the unit
occur. falling, use foot bolts, or wires.
Unit: mm
Installation Guidelines
• Where a wall or other obstacle is in the path of outdoor unit’s intake or exhaust airflow, follow the
installation guidelines below.
• For any of the below installation patterns, the wall height on the exhaust side should be 1200mm or less.
Wall facing one side Walls facing two sides Walls facing three sides
More than 50 More than 100 More than 150

More than 150
More
than 100
1200 More than 300
or less More than 50
More than 50 More than 50 Top view
Side view Top view Unit: mm
3P208365-6A
Installation 223
Outdoor Unit Installation (1)

1. Installing outdoor unit.
1) When installing the outdoor unit, refer to “Precautions for Selecting the Location” and the “Outdoor
Unit Installation Drawings”.
2) If drain work is necessary, follow the procedures below.
2. Drain work (Heat pump-models).
1) Use drain plug for drainage. Drain-water hole
2) If the drain port is covered by a mounting base or floor surface, place
additional foot bases of at least 30mm in height under the outdoor unit’s feet. Bottom frame
3) In cold areas, do not use a drain hose with the outdoor unit. Drain plug
(Otherwise, drain water may freeze, impairing heating performance.) Hose (available commercially,
inner dia. 16mm)
3. Flaring the pipe end.

(Cut exactly at
1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter. right angles.) Remove burrs
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface
Flaring
facing downward so that the chips do Set exactly at the position shown below.
not enter the pipe. A Flare tool for R410A Conventional flare tool
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe. Clutch-type Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)
Die A 0-0.5mm 1.0-1.5mm 1.5-2.0mm
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made. Check
Flare’s inner The pipe end must
surface must be evenly flared in
be flaw-free. a perfect circle.
Make sure that the

flare nut is fitted.
WARNING
1) Do not use mineral oil on flared part.
2) Prevent mineral oil from getting into the system as this would reduce the lifetime of the units.
3) Never use piping which has been used for previous installations. Only use parts which are delivered with the unit.
4) Do never install a drier to this R410A unit in order to guarantee its lifetime.
5) The drying material may dissolve and damage the system.
6) Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
4. Refrigerant piping.
CAUTION
1) Use the flare nut fixed to the main unit. (To prevent cracking of the flare nut by aged deterioration.)
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil
for R410A.)
3) Use torque wrenches when tightening the flare nuts to prevent damage to the flare nuts and gas leakage.
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully
with the torque wrenches.
[Apply oil] [Tighten]
Do not apply refrigeration
Apply refrigeration oil only to the Torque wrench
oil to the outer surface.
inner surface of the flare.
Flare nut
Spanner
Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare Piping union

nut avoid tightening with over torque. Flare nut
Flare nut tightening torque Valve cap tightening torque

Gas side Liquid side Gas side Liquid side
3/8 inch 1/4 inch 3/8 inch 1/4 inch
32.7-39.9N • m 14.2-17.2N • m 21.6-27.4N • m 21.6-27.4N • m
(330-407kgf • cm) (144-175kgf • cm) (220-280kgf • cm) (220-280kgf • cm)
Service port cap 10.8-14.7N • m

tightening torque (110-150kgf • cm)
C : 3P208365-6A
224 Installation

5. Purging air and checking gas leakage.
• When piping work is completed, it is necessary to purge the air and check for gas leakage.
WARNING 2
1) Do not mix any substance other than the specified refrigerant (R410A) into the refrigeration cycle.
2) When refrigerant gas leaks occur, ventilate the room as soon and as much as possible.
3) R410A, as well as other refrigerants, should always be recovered and never be released directly into the
environment.
4) Use a vacuum pump for R410A exclusively. Using the same vacuum pump for different refrigerants
may damage the vacuum pump or the unit.
Compound Pressure
• If using additional refrigerant, perform air purging from the refrigerant pressure gauge meter
pipes and indoor unit using a vacuum pump, then charge additional Gauge
manifold
refrigerant. Liquid
• Use a hexagonal wrench (4mm) to operate the stop valve rod. Valve caps
stop
valve
High-
• All refrigerant pipe joints should be tightened with a torque wrench at Low-pressure
pressure
valve
the specified tightening torque. valve
Charging
hoses
Vacuum pump Service port

Gas stop valve
1) Connect projection side of charging hose (which comes from gauge manifold) to gas stop valve’s service port.
2) Fully open gauge manifold’s low-pressure valve (Lo) and completely close its high-pressure valve (Hi).
(High-pressure valve subsequently requires no operation.)
3) Do vacuum pumping and make sure that the compound pressure gauge reads – 0.1MPa (– 76cmHg)*1.
4) Close gauge manifold’s low-pressure valve (Lo) and stop vacuum pump.
(Keep this state for a few minutes to make sure that the compound pressure gauge pointer does not swing back.)*2.
5) Remove covers from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
6) Turn the liquid stop valve’s rod 90 degrees counterclockwise with a hexagonal wrench to open valve.
Close it after 5 seconds, and check for gas leakage.
Using soapy water, check for gas leakage from indoor unit’s flare and outdoor unit’s flare and valve rods.
After the check is complete, wipe all soapy water off.
7) Disconnect charging hose from gas stop valve’s service port, then fully open liquid and gas stop valves.
(Do not attempt to turn valve rod beyond its stop.)
8) Tighten valve caps and service port caps for the liquid and gas stop valves with a torque wrench at the specified torques.
*1. Pipe length vs. vacuum pump run time

Pipe length Up to 15 metres More than 15 metres
Run time Not less than 10 min. Not less than 15 min.
*2. If the compound pressure gauge pointer swings back, refrigerant may have water content or a loose pipe
joint may exists. Check all pipe joints and retighten nuts as needed, then repeat steps 2) through 4).
3P208365-6A
Installation 225

6. Refilling the refrigerant.
Filling a cylinder with an Filling other cylinders
Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the machine attached siphon
nameplate. Stand the cylinder upright when filling. Turn the cylinder
upside-down when
Precautions when adding R410A There is a siphon pipe inside, filling.
so the cylinder need not be
Fill from the liquid pipe in liquid form. upside-down to fill with liquid.
It is a mixed refrigerant, so adding it in gas form may cause the
refrigerant composition to change, preventing normal operation.
1) Before filling, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not. (It should have something like “liquid
filling siphon attached” displayed on it.)
• Be sure to use the R410A tools to ensure pressure and to prevent foreign objects entering.
7. Refrigerant piping work.

7-1 Cautions on pipe handling. Be sure to
Wall
1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture. place a cap.
Rain
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for bending. If no flare cap is
available, cover the
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40mm or larger.) flare mouth with
tape to keep dirt or
water out.
7-2 Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.
When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
1) Insulation material: Polyethylene foam
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/(mh •˚C))
Inter-unit wiring
Refrigerant gas pipe’s surface temperature reaches 110˚C max.
Gas pipe
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature. Liquid pipe
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation
dimensions as below.
Gas pipe Liquid pipe
Gas side Liquid side
thermal insulation thermal insulation Gas pipe Liquid pipe
insulation insulation
O.D. 9.5mm O.D. 6.4mm I.D. 12-15mm I.D. 8-10mm
Finishing tape Drain hose
Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 10mm Min.
3) Use separate thermal insulation pipes for gas and liquid refrigerant pipes.
Pump Down Operation

In order to protect the environment, be sure to pump down when relocating or disposing of the unit.
1) Remove the valve cap from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve. Hexagonal
wrench
2) Carry out forced cooling operation. Liquid stop
valve
3) After five to ten minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a hexagonal wrench. Close
4) After two to three minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop forced cooling operation.
Gas stop
valve
Valve cap
How to force cooling operation mode

n Using the indoor unit operation/stop button
Press the indoor unit operation/stop button for at least five seconds. (Operation will start.)
• Forced cooling operation will stop automatically after around 15 minutes.
To force a test run to stop, press the indoor unit operation/stop button.
n Using the main unit’s remote controller
1) Press the “operation/stop” button. (Operation will start.)
2) Press the temperature button and the “operation select” button at the same time.
3) Press the “operation select” button twice. ( will be displayed and the unit will enter test run mode.)
4) Press the “operation select” button to return the operation mode to cooling.
• Test run mode will stop automatically after around 30 minutes. To force a test run to stop, press the operation/stop button.
CAUTION
1) When pressing the switch, do not touch the terminal block. It has a high voltage, so doing so may cause electric shock.
2) After closing the liquid stop valve, close the gas stop valve within three minutes, then stop the forced operation.
3P208365-6A
226 Installation
Wiring
WARNING
1) Do not use tapped wires, stranded wires, extensioncords, or starburst connections, as they may cause
overheating, electrical shock, or fire. 2
2) Do not use locally purchased electrical parts inside the product. (Do not branch the power for the drain
pump, etc., from the terminal block.) Doing so may cause electric shock or fire.
3) Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. (One that can handle higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an earth leakage breaker capable
handling harmonics in order to prevent malfunctioning of the earth leakage breaker itself.)
4) Use an all-pole disconnection type breaker with at least 3mm between the contact point gaps.
• Do not turn ON the safety breaker until all work is completed.

1) Strip the insulation from the wire (20mm). Firmly fix the wires with
the terminal screws.
2) Connect the connection wires between the Outdoor unit
indoor and outdoor units so that the terminal When wire length exceeds 10m,
1 23 LN
numbers match. Tighten the terminal screws use 2.0mm diameter wires.
Use 2.0mm diameter wires.
securely. We recommend a flathead
1
screwdriver be used to tighten the screws. Indoor 2
3
Safety Earth leakage
Power supply
unit breaker circuit breaker 50Hz 220V-240V
60Hz 220V-230V
Firmly fix the wires with H05VV
Safety breaker
the terminal screws. Earth RX(K)S
10A
RYN
RXG 15A
1 2 3 Power supply
1 2 3
terminal block
Shape wires so
that the service
lid and stop
valve cover fit
securely.
Firmly secure wire retainer so

Use the specified wire type and wire terminations will not receive
connect it securely. external stress.
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power

supply terminal board.
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring. Round crimp-style
Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power terminal
supply terminal board. In case it cannot be used due to Stranded Wire
unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instruction.
CAUTION
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal board using a single core wire, be sure to perform curling.
Problems with the work may cause heat and fires.
Excessive strip length

Strip wire end may cause electrical
to this point. shock or leakage.
Good Wrong
Stripping wire at terminal block
3) Pull the wire and make sure that it does not disconnect. Then fix the wire in place with a wire stop.
3P208365-6A
Installation 227
Test Run and Final Check

1. Trial operation and testing.
1-1 Measure the supply voltage and make sure that it falls in the specified range.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in eitr cooling or heating mode.
n For heat pump
• In cooling mode, select the lowest programmable temperature; in heating mode, select the highest
programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation may be disabled in either mode depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26˚C to 28˚C in cooling mode,
20˚C to 24˚C in heating mode).
3) For protection, the unit disables restart operation for 3 minutes after it is turned off.
n For cooling only
• Select the lowest programmable temperature.
1) Trial operation in cooling mode may be disabled depending on the room temperature.
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26˚C to 28˚C).
1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
• The air conditioner requires a small amount of power in its standby mode. If the system is not to be used for
some time after installation, shut off the circuit breaker to eliminate unnecessary power consumption.
• If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the original
operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2. Test items.
Symptom
Test items Check
(diagnostic display on RC)
Indoor and outdoor units are installed properly on

Fall, vibration, noise
solid bases.
No refrigerant gas leaks. Incomplete cooling/heating function
Refrigerant gas and liquid pipes and indoor drain

Water leakage
hose extension are thermally insulated.
Draining line is properly installed. Water leakage

System is properly earthed. Electrical leakage
The specified wires are used for interconnecting

Inoperative or burn damage
wire connections.
Indoor or outdoor unit’s air intake or exhaust has

clear path of air. Incomplete cooling/heating function
Stop valves are opened.
Indoor unit properly receives remote controller

Inoperative
commands.
3P208365-6A
228 Installation
3.2 RKS50FB / 60FBVMA, RXS50FB / 60FBVMA (Installation manual)
3P192027-7C M06B260B
DAIKIN AIR CONDITIONER 2
Safety Precautions
• Read these Safety Precautions carefully to ensure correct installation.
• This manual classifies the precautions into WARNING and CAUTION.
Be sure to follow all the precautions below: they are all important for ensuring safety.
WARNING Failure to follow any of WARNING is likely to result in such grave consequences as death or serious injury.
CAUTION Failure to follow any of CAUTION may result in grave consequences in some cases.
• The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual:
Be sure to observe this instruction. Be sure to establish an earth connection. Never attempt.
• After completing installation, test the unit to check for installation errors. Give the user adequate instructions
concerning the use and cleaning of the unit according to the Operation Manual.
WARNING
• Installation should be left to the dealer or another professional. Improper installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
• Install the air conditioner according to the instructions given in this manual. Incomplete installation may cause water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
• Be sure to use the supplied or specified installation parts. Use of other parts may cause the unit to come to lose, water leakage, electrical shock, or fire.
• Install the air conditioner on a solid base that can support the weight of the unit. An inadequate base or incomplete installation may cause injury in the event the unit falls off the base.
• Electrical work should be carried out in accordance with the installation manual and the national electrical wiring
rules or code of practice. Insufficient capacity or incomplete electrical work may cause electrical shock or fire.
• Be sure to use a dedicated power circuit. Never use a power supply shared by another appliance.
• For wiring, use a cable length enough to cover the entire distance with no connection. Do not use an extension cord.
Do not put other loads on the power supply, use a dedicated power circuit. (Failure to do so may cause abnormal heat, electric shock or fire.)
• Use the specified types of wires for electrical connections between the indoor and outdoor units. When installing
wiring for the outdoor unit, after cutting the wires for each connection point, a length of 3mm or longer is required.
Firmly clamp the interconnecting wires so their terminals receive no external stresses. Incomplete connections or clamping may cause terminal overheating or fire.
• After connecting interconnecting and supply wiring be sure to shape the cables so that they do not put undue force on the electrical covers or panels.
Install covers over the wires. Incomplete cover installation may cause terminal overheating, electrical shock, or fire. When electrical appliances are connected in Y formation,
if the power supply is damaged in some way, to avoid danger the power supply must be replaced by the maker or by someone with an equivalent certification.
• When installing or relocating the system, be sure to keep the refrigerant circuit free from substances other than the specified
refrigerant (R410A), such as air. (Any presence of air or other foreign substance in the refrigerant circuit causes an abnormal pressure rise or rupture, resulting in injury.)
• If any refrigerant has leaked out during the installation work, ventilate the room.
• After all installation is complete, check to make sure that no refrigerant is leaking out.
• During pump-down, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still running and the stop valve is open during
pump-down, air will be sucked in when the refrigerant piping is removed, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
• During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor. If the compressor is not attached and the stop valve is
open during pump-down, air will be sucked in when the compressor is run, causing abnormal pressure in the freezer cycle which will lead to breakage and even injury.
• Be sure to establish an earth. Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, arrester, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock, or fire. A high surge current from lightning or other sources may cause damage to the air conditioner.
• Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks, or fire.
CAUTION
• Do not install the air conditioner in a place where there is danger of exposure to inflammable gas leakage.
If the gas leaks and builds up around the unit, it may catch fire.
• Establish drain piping according to the instructions of this manual. Inadequate piping may cause flooding.
• Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench. If the flare nut is tightened too hard, the flare nut may crack after a long time and cause refrigerant leakage.
3P192027-7C
Installation 229
Accessories
(B) Drain plug (Heat pump-Models)
There is on the bottom packing case.

not be amplified.
air conditioner.
from moisture.
NOTE
CAUTION
temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described below.
1) To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its
Construct a large canopy.
Construct a pedestal.
2) Never install the outdoor unit at a site where the suction side
may be exposed directly to wind.
3) To prevent exposure to wind, it is recommended to install a Install the unit high enough off the
baffle plate on the air discharge side of the outdoor unit. ground to prevent burying in snow.
• It is best to screw in the foundation bolts until their length are 20mm from the foundation surface.
20
3P192027-7C
230 Installation

Wrap the insulation
pipe with the finishing
Model 50/60 class

tape from bottom to top.
2
Max. allowable length 30m
Min. allowable length 1.5m
Additional refrigerant
required for refrigerant 20g/m
pipe exceeding 10m
in length.
Gas pipe O.D. 12.7mm
Liquid pipe O.D. 6.4mm
CAUTION
Set the piping length
from 1.5m to 30m.
Service lid
Stop valve cover
250m
m from
wall
In sites with poor drainage, m

use block bases for outdoor 0m ole
33 lt-h Allow space for piping
unit.
t bo )
Adjust foot height until the oo es and electrical servicing.
580m
m (F entr
unit is leveled. Otherwise, (Foot c
bo lt-hole 120mm
water leakage or pooling of centre Where there is a danger of
s)
water may occur. (From the unit falling, use foot bolts,
unit’s
side) or wires.
Wall facing one side Walls facing two sides

More than 100 More than 350
More than 350
More
than 100
1200
or less
Top view
Side view
Walls facing three sides
More than
100
More
More than 50 than 350
Top view Unit: mm
C : 3P192027-7C
Installation 231

1) When installing the outdoor unit, refer to “Precautions for Selecting the Location” and the “Outdoor
Unit Installation Drawings”.
2. Drain work.
1) Use drain plug for drainage. Drain-water hole
2) If the drain port is covered by a mounting base or floor surface, place
additional foot bases of at least 30mm in height under the outdoor unit’s feet. Bottom frame
3) In cold areas, do not use a drain hose with the outdoor unit. Drain plug
(Otherwise, drain water may freeze, impairing heating performance.) Hose (available commercially,
inner dia. 16mm)
3. Flaring the pipe end.

(Cut exactly at
1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter. right angles.) Remove burrs
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface
Flaring
facing downward so that the chips do Set exactly at the position shown below.
not enter the pipe. A Flare tool for R410A Conventional flare tool
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe. Clutch-type Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)
Die A 0-0.5mm 1.0-1.5mm 1.5-2.0mm
4) Flare the pipe.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made. Check
surface must be evenly flared in
be flaw-free. a perfect circle.
Make sure that the

WARNING
CAUTION
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil
for R410A.)
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully
with the torque wrenches.
Do not apply refrigeration
Apply refrigeration oil only to Torque wrench
oil to the outer surface.
the inner surface of the flare.
Flare nut
Spanner
Do not apply refrigeration oil to the flare Piping union

nut avoid tightening with over torque. Flare nut
Flare nut tightening torque Valve cap tightening torque

Gas side Liquid side Gas side Liquid side
1/2 inch 5/8 inch 1/4 inch 1/2 inch 5/8 inch 1/4 inch
49.5-60.3N • m 61.8-75.4N • m 14.2-17.2N • m 48.1-59.7N • m 44.1-53.9N • m 21.6-27.4N • m
(505-615kgf • cm) (630-770kgf • cm) (144-175kgf • cm) (490-610kgf • cm) (450-550kgf • cm) (220-280kgf • cm)
10.8-14.7N • m
Service port cap tightening torque
(110-150kgf • cm)
C : 3P192027-7C
232 Installation

WARNING 2
2) When refrigerant gas leaks occur, ventilate the room as soon and as much as possible.
3) R410A, as well as other refrigerants, should always be recovered and never be released directly into the environment.
• If using additional refrigerant, perform air purging from the refrigerant Compound
pressure gauge
Pressure meter
pipes and indoor unit using a vacuum pump, then charge additional
Gauge
refrigerant. manifold
• Use a hexagonal wrench (4mm) to operate the stop valve rod. High-pressure Liquid
valve Valve caps
• All refrigerant pipe joints should be tightened with a torque wrench at Low-pressure
stop
valve
the specified tightening torque. valve
Charging
hoses
Gas
stop
Vacuum pump Service port valve
5) Remove valve caps from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
8) Tighten valve caps and service port cap for the liquid and gas stop valves with a torque wrench at the specified torques.

3P192027-7C
Installation 233

Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the machine nameplate.
Precautions when adding R410A Filling a cylinder with an Filling other cylinders
attached siphon
Fill from the liquid pipe in liquid form. Stand the cylinder upright Turn the cylinder
It is a mixed refrigerant, so adding it in gas form may cause the when filling. upside-down when filling.
refrigerant composition to change, preventing normal operation. There is a siphon pipe
inside, so the cylinder
1) Before filling, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not. need not be upside-
(It should have something like “liquid filling siphon attached” displayed on it.) down to fill with liquid.
7. Refrigerant piping work.

7-1 Cautions on pipe handling. Be sure to
Wall
place a cap.
1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture.
Rain
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for bending. If no flare cap is
available, cover the
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40mm or larger.) flare mouth with
water out.
7-2 Selection of copper and heat insulation materials.
When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following:
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/mh˚C)
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature.
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation dimensions as below. Inter-unit wiring
Gas pipe thermal Gas pipe

Gas side Liquid pipe
insulation Liquid pipe
Liquid side thermal insulation
50/60 class 50/60 class

Gas pipe Liquid pipe
insulation insulation
Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 10mm Min.
Finishing tape Drain hose
Pump Down Operation

1) Remove the valve caps from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
Hexagonal wrench
2) Carry out forced cooling operation.
3) After five to ten minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a
hexagonal wrench. Close
4) After two to three minutes, close the gas stop valve and
stop forced cooling operation.
Liquid stop valve
Forced cooling operation
1) Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) to begin forced cooling. Gas stop valve Valve cap
Service port
Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) again to stop forced cooling.
S102
S2
LED-A
A B CD
ON
SW4
Forced
operation
switch
SW1
C : 3P192027-7C
234 Installation
Wiring
WARNING
3) Be sure to install an earth leak detector. (One that can handle higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an earth leak detector capable handling
harmonics in order to prevent malfunctioning of the earth leak detector itself.)
• Do not turn ON the safety breaker until all work is completed. Firmly fix the wires with
Outdoor unit
1) Strip the insulation from the wire (20mm).
1 23 LN
2) Connect the connection wires between When wire length exceeds 10m,
use 2.0mm diameter wires.
the indoor and outdoor units so that the
terminal numbers match. Tighten the 1 Power supply
Indoor 2 Safety FVM
Earth leakage 50Hz 220V-240V :
terminal screws securely. We recommend unit 3 breaker
circuit breaker 60Hz 220V-230V
F(A)VMA
20A FBVMA
a flathead screwdriver be used to tighten 50Hz 220V-240V : FV1A
Firmly fix the wires with 60245 IEC57
the screws. the terminal screws. (H05RN)
Earth
Power supply terminal block
L N
1 2 3
Firmly secure wire retainer Shape wires so that the

Use the specified wire type so wire terminations will not service lid and stop
and connect it securely. receive external stress. valve cover fit securely.
Observe the notes mentioned below when wiring to the power supply terminal board.
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring.
Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power Round
crimp-style
supply terminal board. In case it cannot be used due to terminal Electric
unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the following instruction. Wire
Place the round crimp-style terminals on the wires up to the
covered part and secure in place.
Screw Screw
• Ground terminal installation
Round crimp- Flat washer
Use the following method when installing the round style terminal
crimp-style terminal. Round crimp-
Flat washer style terminal
Good Wrong
CAUTION
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal
board using a single core wire, be sure to perform curling.
3P192027-7C
Installation 235

1. Trial operation and testing.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in either cooling or heating mode.
n For Heat pump
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26˚C to 28˚C in cooling mode,
20˚C to 24˚C in heating mode).
n For Cooling only
1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the operation manual to ensure that all functions and
parts, are working properly.
• If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the
original operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2. Test Items.
Test Items Symptom Check

solid bases.

Water leakage

The specified wires are used for inter-unit wiring

connections.


Inoperative
commands.
3P192027-7C
236 Installation
3.3 RXS71FBVMA (Installation manual)
3P229455-2A M08B131
DAIKIN AIR CONDITIONER
2
Safety Precautions
• The precautions described herein are classified as WARNING and CAUTION. They both contain important
information regarding safety. Be sure to observe all precautions without fail.
• Meaning of WARNING and CAUTION notices
WARNING Failure to follow these instructions properly may result in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION Failure to observe these instructions properly may result in property damage or personal injury, which may be serious depending on the circumstances.
• The safety marks shown in this manual have the following meanings:
Be sure to follow the instructions. Be sure to establish an earth connection. Never attempt.
• After completing installation, conduct a trial operation to check for faults and explain to the customer how to
operate the air conditioner and take care of it with the aid of the operation manual.
WARNING
Do not attempt to install the air conditioner yourself. Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Install the air conditioner in accordance with the instructions in this installation manual. Improper installation may result in water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Be sure to use only the specified accessories and parts for installation work. Failure to use the specified parts may result in the unit falling, water leakage, electric shocks or fire.
• Electrical work must be performed in accordance with relevant local and national regulations and with instructions in this installation manual.
Be sure to use a dedicated power supply circuit only. Insufficiency of power circuit capacity and improper workmanship may result in electric shocks or fire.
• Use a cable of suitable length. Do not use tapped wires or an extension lead, as this may cause overheating, electric shocks or fire.
connections or wires. Improper connections or securing of wires may result in abnormal heat build-up or fire.
• When wiring the power supply and connecting the wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, position the wires so that the
control box lid can be securely fastened. Improper positioning of the control box lid may result in electric shocks, fire or over heating terminals.
• After completing installation, check for refrigerant gas leakage. Toxic gas may be produced if the refrigerant gas
leaks into the room and comes into contact with a source of fire, such as a fan heater, stove or cooker.
• When installing or relocating the air conditioner, be sure to bleed the refrigerant circuit to ensure it is free of air, and use only the specified
refrigerant (R410A). The presence of air or other foreign matter in the refrigerant circuit causes abnormal pressure rise, which may result in equipment damage and even injury.
• During installation, attach the refrigerant piping securely before running the compressor. If the compressor is not attached and the stop valve is
open when the compressor is run, air will be sucked in, causing abnormal pressure in the refrigeration cycle, which may result in equipment damage and even injury.
• During pump-down, stop the compressor before removing the refrigerant piping. If the compressor is still running and the stop valve is open during pump-down,
air will be sucked in when the refrigerant piping is removed, causing abnormal pressure in the refrigeration cycle, which may result in equipment damage and even injury.
Do not earth the unit to a utility pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth lead. Imperfect earthing may result in electric shocks.
• Be sure to install an earth leakage breaker. Failure to install an earth leakage breaker may result in electric shocks or fire.
CAUTION
• Do not install the air conditioner at any place where there is a danger of flammable gas leakage.
In the event of a gas leakage, build-up of gas near the air conditioner may cause a fire to break out.
• While following the instructions in this installation manual, install drain piping to ensure proper drainage and insulate
piping to prevent condensation. Improper drain piping may result in indoor water leakage and property damage.
• Tighten the flare nut according to the specified method such as with a torque wrench.
If the flare nut is too tight, it may crack after prolonged use, causing refrigerant leakage.
3P229455-2A
Installation 237
Accessories
(B) Drain socket assy
(HEAT PUMP ONLY)

not be amplified.
air conditioner.
from moisture.
NOTE
CAUTION
temperature, be sure to follow the instructions described below.
1) To prevent exposure to wind, install the outdoor unit with its
Construct a large canopy.
Construct a pedestal.
2) Never install the outdoor unit at a site where the suction side
may be exposed directly to wind.
3) To prevent exposure to wind, it is recommended to install a Install the unit high enough off the
baffle plate on the air discharge side of the outdoor unit. ground to prevent burying in snow.
• It is best to screw in the foundation bolts until their length are 20mm from the foundation surface.
20
3P229455-2A
238 Installation
Model
Max. allowable length
71 class
30m
2
Min. allowable length 1.5m
Additional refrigerant Wrap the insulation
required for refrigerant pipe with the finishing
20g/m tape from bottom to top.
pipe exceeding 10m
in length.
Gas pipe O.D. 15.9mm
CAUTION
Liquid pipe O.D. 6.4mm Allow 30cm of work
space below the Set the piping length
* Be sure to add the proper amount of additional refrigerant. ceiling surface. from 1.5m to 30m.
Failure to do so may result in reduced performance.
Allow space for piping

and electrical servicing.
25cm from wa
If there is the danger of the unit falling ll
or overturning, fix the unit with
foundation bolts, or with wire or other
means.
If the location does not have good

Right side plate
drainage, place the unit on a level
mounting base (or a plastic pedestal).
Install the outdoor unit in a level
position. Failure to do so may result in le
water leakage or accumulation. cm ho
35 lt-
t bo s)
oo re
(Foot
bo
62cm (F ent
lt-hole c
centre
s)
Also insulate the connection on the outdoor unit.
Level mounting base Clamping material

(available separately)
Insulation tube
Tape Service lid
Use tape or insulating material on all connections

to prevent air from getting in between the copper
piping and the insulation tube.
Be sure to do this if the outdoor unit is installed
above.
Wall facing one side Walls facing two sides Walls facing three sides

More than 350
More More than 100
than 100
1200 More than 350
or less More than 50
More than 50 Top view More than 50 Top view
Side view Unit: mm
C : 3P229455-2A
Installation 239

1) When installing the outdoor unit, refer to “Precautions for Selecting the Location” and the “Outdoor Unit Installation Drawings”.
2. Drain work.
• Use drain plug for drainage.
• If the drain port is covered by a mounting base or floor surface, place additional foot bases of at least 100mm in height under the outdoor unit’s feet.
• In cold areas, do not use a drain hose with the outdoor unit. (Otherwise, drain water may freeze, impairing heating performance.)
1) Insert drain receiver (C) onto drain socket (A) and drain cap (B) beyond 4 projections around drain socket and drain cap. (A) Drain socket (B) Drain cap
2) Insert drain socket and drain caps into their matching drain hole ; Drain socket (A) into drain
hole I and drain caps (B) into drain hole II and III. After insertion, turn them about 40° clockwise.
(Be sure not to insert them into wrong drain

II holes, or there causes water leakage.)
I
III
(C) Drain receiver
(View from bottom)
3) Connect vinyl hose on the market (internal diameter of 25mm) to drain socket (A).
(If the hose is too long and hangs down, fix it carefully to prevent the kinks.)
NOTE
If the drain holes of the outdoor unit are covered with the mounting bracket or the floor, raise the unit to
provide the space of more than 100mm under the leg of the outdoor unit.
Flaring
3. Flaring the pipe end. Set exactly at the position shown below.
A Flare tool for R410A Conventional flare tool
1) Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
Clutch-type Clutch-type (Rigid-type) Wing-nut type (Imperial-type)
2) Remove burrs with the cut surface facing Die A 0-0.5mm 1.0-1.5mm 1.5-2.0mm
downward so that the chips do not enter the pipe.
3) Put the flare nut on the pipe. Check
4) Flare the pipe. surface must
be flaw-free.
be evenly flared in
a perfect circle.
5) Check that the flaring is properly made. (Cut exactly at
right angles.) Remove burrs Make sure that the
WARNING
CAUTION
2) To prevent gas leakage, apply refrigeration oil only to the inner surface of the flare. (Use refrigeration oil for R410A.)
Align the centres of both flares and tighten the flare nuts 3 or 4 turns by hand. Then tighten them fully with the torque wrenches.
Do not apply refrigeration Apply refrigeration Torque wrench Flare nut tightening torque Valve cap tightening torque
oil to the outer surface. oil only to the inner
surface of the flare. Gas side Liquid side Gas side Liquid side
Flare nut
5/8 inch 1/4 inch 5/8 inch 1/4 inch
Spanner
61.8-75.4N • m 14.2-17.2N • m 48.1-59.7N • m 21.6-27.4N • m
(630-770kgf • cm) (144-175kgf • cm) (490-610kgf • cm) (220-280kgf • cm)
Piping
Do not apply refrigeration union Service port cap tightening torque 10.8-14.7N • m (110-150kgf • cm)
oil to the flare nut avoid Flare nut
tightening with over torque.
C : 3P229455-2A
240 Installation

WARNING 2
2) To prevent air pollution, a vacuum pump should be used for air purging wherever possible.
3) Refrigerant gas leaks during air purging, ventilate the room as soon as possible.
• If using additional refrigerant, perform air purging from the refrigerant pipes and indoor unit using a
vacuum pump, then charge additional refrigerant.
• Use a hexagonal wrench (4mm) to operate the stop valve rod.
• All refrigerant pipe joints should be tightened with a torque wrench at the specified tightening torque.
5) Remove covers from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve.
8) Tighten valve caps and service port caps for the liquid and gas stop valves with a torque wrench at the specified torques.

3P229455-2A
Installation 241

Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the machine nameplate. Filling a cylinder with an Filling other cylinders
Precautions when adding R410A attached siphon
Fill from the liquid pipe in liquid form. Stand the cylinder upright Turn the cylinder
when filling. upside-down when filling.
It is a mixed refrigerant, so adding it in gas form may cause the
There is a siphon pipe
refrigerant composition to change, preventing normal operation. inside, so the cylinder
1) Before filling, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not. need not be upside-
down to fill with liquid.
(It should have something like “liquid filling siphon attached” displayed on it.)
7. Refrigerant piping work. Be sure to
Wall
place a cap.
7-1 Cautions on pipe handling.
Rain
If no flare cap is
1) Protect the open end of the pipe against dust and moisture. available, cover the
2) All pipe bends should be as gentle as possible. Use a pipe bender for bending. flare mouth with
(Bending radius should be 30 to 40mm or larger.) water out.
7-2 Selection of copper and heat insulation materials. Inter-unit wiring

When using commercial copper pipes and fittings, observe the following: Gas pipe
Liquid pipe
Heat transfer rate: 0.041 to 0.052W/mK (0.035 to 0.045kcal/mh˚C)
Choose heat insulation materials that will withstand this temperature. Gas pipe Liquid pipe
2) Be sure to insulate both the gas and liquid piping and to provide insulation insulation insulation
dimensions as below. Finishing tape Drain hose
Gas side Liquid side Gas pipe thermal insulation Liquid pipe thermal insulation
Thickness 1.0mm Thickness 0.8mm Thickness 10mm Min.
Pump Down Operation

1) Remove the valve cap from liquid stop valve and gas stop valve. Service port
2) Carry out forced cooling operation.

3) After five to ten minutes, close the liquid stop valve with a Hexagonal
wrench
hexagonal wrench.
4) After two to three minutes, close the gas stop valve and stop
forced cooling operation.
Close
Gas stop valve
Liquid stop valve
Forced cooling operation valve cap
1) Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) to begin forced cooling. Press the Forced Operation switch (SW1) again
to stop forced cooling.
S102
S2
LED-A
A B CD
ON
SW4
Forced
operation
switch
SW1
3P229455-2A
242 Installation
Wiring
WARNING
3) Be sure to install an earth leakage bleaker. (One that can handle higher harmonics.)
(This unit uses an inverter, which means that it must be used an earth leakage bleaker capable handling
harmonics in order to prevent malfunctioning of the earth leakage bleaker itself.)
• Do not turn ON the safety breaker until all Firmly fix the wires with
work is completed. Outdoor unit
1) Strip the insulation from the wire (20mm). When wire length exceeds 10m,
1 23 LN
2) Connect the connection wires between use 2.0mm diameter wires.

the indoor and outdoor units so that the
1
terminal numbers match. Tighten the Indoor 2
3
Safety
breaker Earth leakage
Power supply
50Hz 220-240V
unit circuit breaker : FVMA
terminal screws securely. We recommend 20A 60Hz 220-230V
50Hz 220-240V : FV1A
a flathead screwdriver be used to tighten Firmly fix the wires with 60245 IEC57
the terminal screws. Earth
the screws.
Power supply terminal block
L N
1 2 3
Firmly secure wire retainer Shape wires so that the

Use the specified wire type so wire terminations will not service lid and stop
and connect it securely. receive external stress. valve cover fit securely.
Round crimp-style
Precautions to be taken for power supply wiring. terminal
Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection to the power supply terminal board.
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, be sure to observe the
following instruction.
Place the round crimp-style terminals on the wires up to the covered part and secure in place. Stranded wire
Screw Screw
• Ground terminal installation
Use the following method when installing Round crimp- Flat washer
style terminal
the round crimp-style terminal. Round crimp-
Flat washer style terminal
Good Wrong
CAUTION
When connecting the connection wires to the terminal board using a single
core wire, be sure to perform curling.
3P229455-2A
Installation 243

1. Trial Operation and Testing.
1-2 Trial operation should be carried out in cooling or heating mode.
n For Heat pump
2) After trial operation is complete, set the temperature to a normal level (26˚C to 28˚C in cooling mode, 20˚C
to 24˚C in heating mode).
n For Cooling only
1-3 Carry out the test operation in accordance with the Operation Manual to ensure that all functions
and parts, such as louver movement, are working properly.
• If the circuit breaker trips to shut off the power to the air conditioner, the system will restore the
original operation mode when the circuit breaker is opened again.
2. Test Items.
Test items Symptom Check

solid bases.

Water leakage

The specified wires are used for interconnecting

wire connections.


Inoperative
commands.
3P229455-2A
244 Installation
3.4 RZQ71F / 100FV4A (Installation manual)
C : 1P143018F
Installation 245
1P143018F
246 Installation
1P143018F
Installation 247
1P143018F
248 Installation
1P143018F
Installation 249
1P143018F
250 Installation
1P143018F
Installation 251
1P143018F
252 Installation
C : 1P143018F
Installation 253
1P143018F
254 Installation
1P143018F
Installation 255
CAUTION FOR HANDLING THE VALVE COVER

n The valve cover is sealed where indicated by the allow.
n After operating the valve, be sure to tighten the valve cover properly.
Tightening torque Refer to Fig. 8.
Liquid pipe Gas pipe
13.5 ~ 16.5 N·m 22.5 ~ 27.5 N·m
Valve cap
CAUTION FOR HANDLING SERVICE PORT
n Work with the charge hose with a pushbar. Stop valve
n After the work, tighten the valve cover in place.

(valve cap attachment part)
Tightening torque Fig. 8.

10.8 ~ 14.7 N·m
PRECAUTIONS WHEN CONNECTING FIELD PIPING AND REGARDING INSULATION

n Be careful not to let the indoor and outdoor branch piping come into
contact with the compressor terminal cover.
If the liquid-side piping insulation might come into contact with it, adjust
the height as shown in the figure below. Also, make sure the field piping
does not touch the bolts or outer panels. Compressor Field piping
n When the outdoor unit is installed above the indoor unit the
following can occur:
The condensated water on the stop valve can move to the indoor
unit.
To avoid this, please cover the stop valve with sealing material.
PRECAUTIONS REGARDING INSULATION Corking,
etc.
n If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher Inslation
than RH 80%, then the thickness of the sealing materials should material
be at least 20 mm in order to avoid condensation on the surface Bolts
of the sealing.
n Be sure to insulate the liquid and gas-side field piping.
(The highest temperature that the gas-side piping can reach is
around 120°C, so be sure to use insulating material which is
very resistant.)
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit.
Any exposed piping may cause condensation or burns if touched.
CAUTION FOR FLARE CONNECTION

n Refer to the table for the dimensions for processing flares
and for the tightening torques. (Too much tightening will end
up in splitting of the flare.)
Piping Flare nut A dimensions for Flare shape

size tightening torque processing flares (mm) R0.4 ~ 0.8
± 2°
90° ± 2°
45°
φ 9.5 32.7 ~ 39.9 N·m 12.8 ~ 13.2

A
φ 15.9 61.8 ~ 75.4 N·m 19.3 ~ 19.7
n When connecting the flare nut, apply refrigeranting machine oil

to the flare (only inside) and first screw the nut 3 or 4
turns by hand.
Coat the flare section (only inside) with ether or ester oil.
Coat the flare section (only inside)
n After completing the insullation, carry out a gas leak inspection of the
piping connections with nitrogen and such.
n If a torque wrench is not available, use Table as a guide.
When work is completed, be sure to check that there is no gas leakage.
When a wrench is used to tighten the flare nuts, the tightening torque may
increase suddenly.
From this position tighten only to the angle shown in Table.
Piping Further tightening Recommended arm

size angle length of tool
φ 9.5 60 to 90 degrees Approx. 200mm
φ 15.9 30 to 60 degrees Approx. 300mm
C : 1P143019B
256 Installation
CAUTION FOR NECESSITY OF A TRAP

Since there is fear of the oil held inside the riser piping flowing back into
the compressor when stopped and causing liquid compression phenomenon,
or cases of deterioration of oil return, it will be necessary to provide a
trap at an appropriate place in the riser gas piping.
A trap is not necessary when the outdoor unit is installed in a
Higher position than the indoor unit. Indoor unit 2
Oil trap
Outdoor unit Gas piping Liquid piping
CAUTION FOR BRAZING

n Be sure to carry out a nitrogen blow when brazing.
Brazing without carrying out nitrogen replacement or releasing
nitrogen into the piping will create large quantities of oxidized
film on the inside of the pipes, adversely affecting valves and
compressors in the refrigerating system and preventing normal
operation.
n When brazing while inserting nitrogen into the piping, nitrogen
must be set to 0.02 MPa with a pressure-reducing valve ( = just
enough so that it can be felt on the skin).
Part to be brazed
Nitrogen
Taping Nitrogen
Hands valve
Refrigerant piping
AIR PURGE
n Do not purge the air with refrigerants. Use a vacuum pump to vacuum the installation.
No additional refrigerant is provided for air purging.
n Pipes inside the units were checked for leaks by the manufacturer.
The refrigerant pipes fit on site are to be checked for leaks by the installer.
n Confirm that the valves are firmly closed before leak test or vacuuming.
(Tight test pressure to be used on the manufacturer's label)
Stop valve Outdoor unit
Pressure
gauge
Indoor unit
Nitrogen
Vacuum pump
Note:
The refrigerant pressure may not rise even if the stop valve is opened after an air purge is performed
using a vacuum pump.
This is because the outdoor unit refrigerant piping is closed off with electric valves inside.
This will not create any problems during operation.
1P143019B
Installation 257
CHARGING REFRIGERANT
• Check the type of refrigerant to be used on the manufacturer's label.

Precautions charging R410A
Before charging, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not.
(It should have something like "Liquid filling siphon attached" displayed on it.)
Charging a cylinder with an attached siphon Charging other cylinders
Stand the cylinder upright at charging. Turn the cylinder upside-down

(There is a siphon pipe inside, at charging.
so that cylinder need not be (Be careful not to fall
upside-down to fill with liquid.) down the cylinders.)
Be sure to use the R410A tools to ensure pressure and to prevent foreign objects entering.
Be sure to charge refrigerant from service port of liquid side stop valve.
This unit requires additional charging of refrigerant according to the length of

pipe connected at the site. Charge the refrigerant to the liquid pipe in its
liquid state. Since R-410A is a mixed refrigerant, its composition changes
if charged in a state of gas and normal system operation would no longer
be assured.
This model is charge less type, so it is not necessary to charge additionaly
if pipe does not exceed the maximum allowable length without additional charge.
Liquid piping Liquid piping Liquid piping

Refrigerant piping size 1 size smaller standard size 1 size larger
Maximum allowable piping length
10m 30m 15m
without additional charge
For additionaly charging or for complete recharging, please charge based on the
following tables. Be sure to charge refrigerant from service port of liquid side stop
valve.
• In case of additional refrigerant charging

Please add refrigerant quantity according to the following table.
For future servicing, mark with a circle the selected amount on the tables below.
Liquid piping Liquid piping
Refrigerant piping size standard size 1 size larger
Connected piping length is between 30 ~ 40m ~ 50m 15 ~ 20m ~ 25m

Additional refrigerant charging (kg) 0.5 1.0 0.5 1.0
• Total refrigerant charging (After a leak, etc...)

In case of complete recharge of refrigerant, please first execute vacuuming.
Execute this vacuuming from the service port.
Position of service port:
· When the service port is between the liquid receiver and the electric expansion valve,
execute vacuuming from here.
· When there is no service port above-mentioned, execute vacuuming from two service
ports simultaneously.
- one is between the heat exchanger and the 4-way valve another one is stop valve
(liquid or gas).
Charge refrigerant depending on pipe length mentioned on the tables below.
Refrigerant piping size Liquid piping standard size
Refrigerant
(*) ~ 10m ~ 20m ~ 30m ~ 40m ~ 50m
piping length
Total refrigerant
1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8
charging (kg)
(*) When piping length is less than 5m, a complete recharging of the unit is required.
Charge the unit with the refrigerant charge as indicated.
Refrigerant piping size 1 size smaller 1 size larger
Refrigerant
(*) ~ 10m (*) ~ 10m ~ 15m ~ 20m ~ 25m
piping length
Total refrigerant
1.8 2.3 2.8 3.3 3.8
charging (kg)
C : 1P143019B
258 Installation
When re-charged up with the refrigerant, carry out in the

following procedure.
1. Collect the refrigerant until it becomes below -0.098MPa side plate
(gauge pressure) from the port for refrigerant recovery
which is inside the side panel. the port for
2. Please carry out vacuum drying with a vacuum pump from refrigerant
the port for the said refrigerant recovery. recovery 2
3. Re-charging of the refrigerant should be charged up with
the refrigerant from the service port of the liquid side
stop valve. Side plate removal point
CAUTION
To persons in charge of piping wiring work
Be sure to open the stop valves after piping installing and vacuuming is complete.
(Running the system with the valve closed may break the compressor.)
ELECTRIC WIRING WORK
Install the earth leakage circuit breaker

A duty of installation of a earth leakage circuit breaker is imposed for an
electric shock and fire accident prevention.
WARNING
n Electrical wiring must be carried out by qualified personnel.
n Before obtaining access to terminal devices, all supply circuits must be interrupted.
CAUTION
n Be sure to ground the air conditioner.
n Do not connect the earth wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning conductor or
telephone earth wire.
n Use only copper wires.
n The wiring between the indoor unit and outdoor unit must be for 240V.
n Do not turn on the main switch until all the wiring is completed.
n The resistance of the grounding must not exceed 500Ω. (Keep below 250Ω in locations
with high electrical danger.)
n When performing electrical wiring, refer also to the wiring diagram affixed to the unit.
n Use the specified wires and fix them with clamps so that no external forces
act on the terminals. For clamping, push the hook in tail end of the clamp to loosen it,
pass the wires through it, then fasten the clamp.
n As this unit is equipped with an inverter, installing a phase advancing capacitor not only
will deteriorate power factor improvement effect, but also may cause a capacitor abnormal
heating accident due to high-frequency waves. Therefore never install a phase advancing
capacitor.
n Clamp the wiring as shown below, taking care that the wires do not touch the piping
(especially high-pressure piping).
n Never squeeze extra wires into the unit.
n Protect the electric wiring with electric wiring pipes or tubes to prevent the edges of
the knock holes from damaging it.
n Secure the electrical wiring with the included clamping material as shown in the figure below
so that it does not come in contact with the piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
Make sure no external pressure is applied to the terminal connectors.
Secure the wiring in the order shown below.
1. Secure the wiring between units to the stop valve mounting plate so that it does not move.
2. Secure the wiring between units to the stop valve mounting plate one more time along with
the power supply wiring.
n Lay the electrical wiring so that the front cover does not rise up when doing wiring work, and
attach the front cover securely.
n Form the wires and fix the cover firmly so that the cover may be fit in properly.
1P143019B
Installation 259
Carry out insulated processing of attaching • Power supply wiring, wiring between units and earth wire
an insulated sleeve. with tying bundling as shown below.
Ground (May be shaped of tying bundling portion 2 type as shown
Terminal Strip below.)
The wiring clamp method
L N 1 Fix to the stop 2 Fix the earth wire to

1 2 3 valve fixing plate the stop valve fixing
not to move on plate with power supply
the earth wire. wiring and wiring
Power supply wiring between units again.
and earth wire Earth wire Earth wire
Clamp material
Wiring
(accessories) Clamp material
between units (accessories)
The stop valve Power supply

fixing plate wiring and wiring
between units

Earth wire
Wiring between units
Power supply wiring
The wiring extraction direction

Back The stop valve
Wiring between units fixing plate Clamp material
(accessories)
Fix to the stop valve Fix to the stop valve

Side fixing plate not to move fixing plate not to move
Front
on the earth wire. on the power supply wiring
Power supply wiring and wiring between units.
and earth wire
PRECAUTIONS ON WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY AND INTER-UNIT WIRING

Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection

to the power supply terminal board. Electric
Round crimp-style
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons, Wire
terminal
be sure to observe the following instruction.
n Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.
n When connecting wires of the same gauge, connect them according to the below figure.
Connect wires Do not connect Do not connect

of the same wires of the same wires of different Tightening torque (N·m)
gauge to both side. gauge to one side. gauges. M4 1.2 ~ 1.8
M5 2.0 ~ 3.0
M4 (Ground) 1.4 ~ 1.9
Use the correct screwdriver to tighten the terminal

screws. Small screwdrivers can damage the screw Round Crimp-style Cup Washer
head and prevent appropriate tightening. Terminal
Over-tightening the terminal screws can damage
the screws. See the table below for tightening
torques for the terminal screws.
Cutting
n Precautions on grounding terminal connection

Part
Ground wiring should be taken out from the cutting part of a cup washer.
(Otherwise, contact of ground wiring is inadequate and it is ineffective.)
CAUTION
When installing the leakage breaker make sure it is an inverter-type

(high-frequency / high-freq. non-sensing type) breaker.
1P143019B
260 Installation
Wiring of power supply and the units

For details on the wiring of the indoor unit and wiring between units, refer to the Installation
Manual of the indoor unit.
POWER SUPPLY Specifications of standard wiring components
~ L N
50Hz Power supply
240V
Recommended Wire type
Wire type of
wiring between
2
(*) Size the units
field fuse
(Outdoor Unit)
X1M L N RZQ71 20A Wiring size must

1 2 3 comply with the
H05VV-U3G H05VV-U4G2.5
applicable local
RZQ100 30A and national code
(*)Only in protected pipes, use H07RN-F when protected pipes are not used.
1 2 3 (Indoor Unit)
n In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out
complete connections, and fix the wires so that outside forces
are not applied to the terminals.
n Instead of fuse, use circuit breaker.
n Refer to the engineering data for details.
CAUTION
To persons in charge of electrical wiring work
Do not operate the unit until the refrigerant piping is complete.
(Running it before the piping is ready will break the compressor.)
TEST OPERATION
WARNING
Where a power supply is switched on, when you leave from the outdoor
unit, be sure to close the front plate.
Pre-run checks
Item to check
Power supply wiring n Is the wiring as mentioned on the wiring diagram?
Wiring between units Make sure no wiring has been forgotten and that
Earth wire there are no missing phases or reverse phases.
n Is the unit properly grounded?
n Are any of the wiring attachment screws loose?
n Is the insulation resistance at least 1MΩ?
· Use a 500V mega-tester when measuring insulation.
· *Do not use a mega-tester for circuits which are
not 240V.
Refrigerant piping n Is the size of the piping appropriate?
n Is the insulation material for the piping attached
securely?
Are both the liquid and gas pipes insulated?
n Are the stop valves for both the liquid side and
the gas side open?
Extra refrigerant n Did you write down the extra refrigerant and the
refrigerant piping length?
n Be sure to make a test run.

n Check that the stop valve is open before making a test run.
If it operates with stop valves close, the compressor will break down.
n Be sure to operate the test run of the installation first time by
cooling mode.
n Please close the front panel to see you take the place of other installer,
when leaving from the outdoor unit unavoidably during the test run.
C : 1P143019B
Installation 261
Test run Open

1. Make sure the liquid and gas stop valves are open. Open direction
2. Be sure to close the front plate. direction
3. In order to protect the compressor,
be sure to turn the power on 6 hours before
starting operation.
Gas
4. Be sure to set it to cooling. Liquid
side
side
5. Press inspection / test run button of remote
controller 4 times (in the case of Remove the cap and turn counterclockwise
wireless remote controller : 2 times), and with a hex wrench until it stops.
make it test run mode.
6. Press ON / OFF button within about 10 seconds, and start a test run. Please check
an operation state for about 6 minutes.
7. Push the air flow direction adjust button with an operation state and check an
operation.
8. Press inspection / test run button after the check of the above-mentioned operation,
and make it the usual operation.
9. Check functions according to the operation manual.
Precautions regarding test-runs
1. In order to restrict to the test run of the installation first time and to detect a failure
of the stop valves to open, even if it is set as heating by remote controller, air
conditioning operation is compulsorily performed for
about 2 - 3 minutes, and it switches to heating operation automatically after that.
(In this case, a remote controller display is still heating.)
2. In the above-mentioned turn 5., when a setup in test run mode and the turn of
operation of pressing operation / stop button are reverse, a test run can be started.
3. When it is unusual and you can not operate, please refer to the following failure
diagnosis.
4. After a test run end, please push operation / test run once, go into check mode,
and check that a malfunction code is "00" (= normal.) When the malfunction code
except "00" is displayed, refer to the following failure diagnosis.
5. If inspection / test run button is pressed 4 times, it returns to normal operation
mode.
6. Surely, the end of a test run should shut off a power supply, after carrying out an operation
stop by remote controller. (Do not stop operation with Breaker OFF.)
Precautions regarding test-runs
When nothing is displayed on remote controller, please check about the following before the
diagnosis in a malfunction code (when the display of setting temperature does not come out).
· There is the possibility of disconnection and wiring error.
(Between a power supply and outdoor unit, between outdoor unit and indoor units, during
indoor unit and remote control)
The fuse on PC board of the outdoor unit may have run out.
n If the remote controller shows E3, E4 or L8 as an error code, there is a possibility that
either the stop valves closed, or the outlet vent is closed.
n If the error code U2 is displayed on the remote controller, check for voltage imbalance.
n If the error code U4 or UF is displayed on the remote controller, check the inter-unit
branch wiring connection.
1P143019B
262 Installation
4P187704
Installation 263
3.5 RZQ100K / 125K / 160KV4A (Installation manual)
C : 1P208412
264 Installation
1P208412
Installation 265
1P208412
266 Installation
SELECTING INSTALLATION SITE (2/2)

CAUTION
(1) In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required
to take adequate measures.
(2) When installing the unit in a place exposed to strong wind, pay special attention to the following.
2
Strong winds of 5m/sec or more blowing against the outdoor unit's air outlet causes short circuit
(suction of discharge air) and this may have the following consequences:
-Deterioration of the operational capacity.
-Frequent frost acceleration in heating operation.
-Disruption of operation due to rise of high pressure.
- When a strong wind blows continuously on the face of the unit, the fan can start rotating very fast
until it breaks.
Refer to the figures for installation of this unit in a place where the wind direction can be foreseen.
Set the outlet side at a right
angle to the direction of the wind.
Suction grille
Turn the air outlet side
toward the building's wall,
fence or screen. STRONG WIND
Make sure there is STRONG WIND

BLOWN AIR
enough room to do
the installation
(3) When installing the unit in a place frequently exposed to snow, pay special attention to the following:
-Elevate the foundation as high as possible.
-Remove the rear suction grille to prevent snow from accumulating on the rear fins.
(4) Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation, to drain waste water from around the unit.
(5) If the water drainage of the unit is not easy, please build up the unit on a foundation of
concrete blocks, etc. (the height of the foundation should be maximum 150mm).
(6) If you install the unit on a frame, please install a waterproof plate within 150mm of the underside of
the unit in order to prevent the invasion of water from the lower direction.
INSTALLATION SERVICING SPACE (1/3)

• Installation service space shown in these figures is based on the cooling operation of outdoor unit with suction surround
temperature is 35˚C(DB). In case of suction surround temperature exceeds 35˚C(DB) or flush load of all outdoor unit
•
exceeds the maximum capacity, please secure a still bigger space from the size by the side of suction shown in this figure.
Please choose the pattern which is suitable from these figures as below in consideration of the passage of people
and a wind. (When the number of installation increases from the pattern of this figure, please install in consideration
•
of a short circuit.)
Please install in consideration of a space required for construction of local refrigerant piping about a front space.
(When not applied to the construction conditions of this figure, please consult with an agency or our company.)
STAND-ALONE INSTALLATION (The measure of these values is "mm".)
No obstacle above
(1) Obstacle on the suction side only (2) Obstacle on both sides (3) Obstacle on the discharge side only
and suction side, too
ore 10
0o
o rm rm
00 re
1 ore
mo
re mo
10
0o r 0 or
0o 50
Obstacle above, too rm
ore 10
(1) Obstacle on the suction side, too (2) Obstacle on both sides (3) Obstacle on the discharge side only, too
and suction side, too 0
50 less
1000 or more
ss
1000 or more
or
1000 or more
r le
0 0o
50 less 50
or
15
0o
re rm
mo ore re
or 15 mo re
1 00 0o
0o
r
mo
rm or
ore 15 0
50
1P208412
Installation 267
When there are obstacles on both suction and discharge sides (The measure of
these values is "mm".)
Pattern 1 When the obstacles on the discharge side is higher than the unit s
les
0 or
1000 or more
(1) No obstacle above 50
(2) Obstacle above, too
(There is no limit for the height of
obstructions on the suction side. )
L A
L ≤ 1/2H 750
L≤H
ore
1/2H < L ≤ H 1000
L
rm ore
Set the stand as: L ≤ H
H
0o H<L
10 or m
ore 250
rm (*) Close the bottom of the installation frame to A
0o
50 prevent the discharged air from being bypassed.
1000 or more
ss
r le
0o
(1) No obstacle above (1) Obstacle above, too 50
obstructions on the suction side.) The relations between H, A and L are as follows.
L A
H
L ≤ 1/2H 100
L≤H
L
1/2H < L ≤ H 200
re
r mo H<L Set the stand as: L ≤ H
0o re
A
10 mo
r
ore (*) Close the bottom of the installation frame to 0o
rm 100
0o prevent the discharged air from being bypassed.
50
(*) · In side extraction, please provide the space of piping.

SERIES INSTALLATION (2 OR MORE)
(The measure of these values is "mm". )
No obstacle above
(1) Obstacle on the suction (2) Obstacle on the discharge
side and both sides side only
10
00
or
mo
re
re ore
20 mo rm
0o
0 or o
rm 30 00
ore 10
Obstacle above, too ss
r le
1000 or more
0o
1000 or more
(1) Obstacle on the 50 (2) Obstacle on the suction ss

side and both sides r le
discharge side 0o
50
10
00
or
mo
re
re
mo
ore 20 0 or
or
m 0o 30
rm
00 ore
10
When there are obstacles on both suction and discharge sides ss

r le
0o
Pattern 1 When the obstacles on the discharge side is higher than the unit 50
1000 or more

obstructions on the suction side.) The relations between H, A and L are as follows.
L A
L ≤ 1/2H 1000
L≤H
1/2H < L ≤ H 1250
Set the stand as: L ≤ H
L
H<L
ore ore
H
m rm
0 or o
30 (*) Close the bottom of the installation frame to 300
re prevent the discharged air from being bypassed.
r mo A
0 0o Limit of series installation is 2 unit.
10
1P208412
268 Installation

Pattern 2 When the obstacle on the discharge side is lower than the unit (The measure of
these values is "mm".)
obstructions on the suction side. )
2
H 1000 or more
The relations between H, A and L are as follows. ss
L A r le
L A 0o
L ≤ 1/2H 250 50
L ≤ 1/2H 250
1/2H < L ≤ H 300 L≤H
1/2H < L ≤ H 300
H<L Set the stand as: L ≤ H
L
H
L
(*) Close the bottom of the installation frame to A

re
A prevent the discharged air from being bypassed. r mo
ore 0o
rm Limit of series installation is 2 unit. 15
0
0o
150
(The measure of these values is "mm".)

DOUBLE-DECKER INSTALLATION
(*) · Do not stack more than two unit.
· The drain piping construction size of upper side outdoor unit is needed about 100mm.
· Close "X" to prevent the discharged air from being bypassed
( : the gap between the upper and lower outdoor units).
· In side extraction, please provide the space of piping.
(1) Obstacle on the (2) Obstacle on
discharge side X the suction side X
100
100
ore ore
rm
00
o or m
10 300
MULTIPLE ROWS OF SERIES INSTALLATION (ON THE ROOFTOP, ETC. )

(1) One row of (2) Rows of series installation (2 or more)
stand-alone
installation
L
The relations between H, A
and L are as follows. A
0
10 ore L A 00
or m 30 ore
00 L ≤ 1/2H 250 or m
20 ore
H
L≤H 0
o m
r 60 ore
1/2H < L ≤ H 300
0
20 ore 5 00 or m
1 ore
00 or m H<L Can not be installed
10 ore or m
or m
PRECAUTIONS ON INSTALLATION
• Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the unit
• Inbyaccordance
will not cause any operating vibration or noise after installed.
20
Resin washer
with the foundation drawing in Fig.1, fix the unit securely
means of the foundation bolts. (Prepare four sets of M12 foundation
Fig. 1
• Itfromis best
bolts, nuts and washers each which are available on the market.)
to screw in the foundation bolts until their length are 20mm Discharge side
the foundation surface. 140 620 140
30
(345 ~ 355)
<Installation method of fitting for prevention of overturning>

• Ifprevention
117
219
289
350
overturning prevention is required, use the optional overturning

kit.
47
<Drain pipe disposal>
• If drain pipe disposal from the outdoor unit causes trouble, (for example,
if the drain water may splash on people) provide the drain piping by using
423
614
Drain hole
•
of the drain plug (optional).
Make sure the drain works properly. BOTTOM VIEW (mm)
1P208412
Installation 269
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK (1/4)

CAUTION
TO PERSONS IN CHARGE OF PIPING WORK
• The following to use new R410A refrigerant.

• For brazing,
Do not use flux when brazing the refrigerant piping.
use phosphor copper brazing filler metal (BcuP) which does not require a flux.
(If a chlorine flux is used, the piping will corrode, and if the flux contains fluoride it will cause
the coolant oil to deteriorate, adversely affecting the coolant piping system.)
• Be sure to open the stop valve after piping installing and vacuuming is complete.
(Running the system with the valve closed may break the compressor.)
• All field piping must be installed by a licensed refrigeration technician and must comply with
relevant local and national regulations.
5-1 INSTALLATION TOOLS
Please be sure to use parts for exclusive use resisting pressure and impurities mixing prevention.
Make sure to use installation tools that are exclusively used for R410A
GAUGE MANIFOLD
installations to withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials
CHARGE HOSE
(e.g. mineral oils and moisture) from mixing into the system.
Make sure the pump oil does not flow oppositely into the system while the
VACUUM PUMP pump is not working.
Use a vacuum pump which can evacuate to -100.7kPa (5 Torr, -755 mmHg)
5-2 SELECTION OF PIPING MATERIAL
• Construction material: phosphoric acid deoxidized seamless copper for refrigerant.

• as listed in table below.
Temper grade: use piping with temper grade in function of the pipe diameter
• The pipe thickness of the refrigerant piping should comply with relevant local
and national regulations.
• The minimal pipe thickness for R410A piping must be in accordance with the table below.
Temper grade
PIPE φ of piping material Minimal thickness t (mm)
6.4 / 9.5 / 12.7 0 0.80

15.9 0
1.00 0=Annealed
19.1 1/2H 1/2H=Half hard
5-3 CARE OF PIPE
• Ina pinch
order to prevent dirt, liquid or dust from entering the piping, cure the piping with
or taping.
• Great caution is needed when passing copper tubes through walls.
PLACE INSTALLATION PERIOD PROTECTION METHOD

More than a month Pinch the pipe
OUTDOOR
Less than a month Pinch or tape pipe
PLACE INSTALLATION PERIOD PROTECTION METHOD
INDOOR Unquestioned Pinch or tape pipe
1P208412
270 Installation
<Please refer to installation manual of indoor

REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK (2/4) unit about indoor unit's refrigerant piping>
5-4 REFRIGERANT PIPE SIZE AND ALLOWABLE PIPE LENGTH
CAUTION 2
Set the lower limit for the allowable piping length to 5m. If it is shorter than 5m the piping will
become overloaded with refrigerant, raising the possibility of malfunctions related to high
pressure.
When piping length is less than 5m, a complete recharging of the unit is required.
Charge the unit with the refrigerant charge shown in " 7 CHARGING REFRIGERANT".
• For new installations, use the standard pipe sizes.

• Please give the vertical interval between the indoor and outdoor as 30m or less.
Refrigerant pipe size

Refrigerant Piping 1 size smaller Standard size 1 size larger
Gas Pipe — φ 15.9 φ 19.1
Liquid Pipe φ 6.4 φ 9.5 φ 12.7
Allowable pipe length and height differrence
Refrigerant Piping 1 size smaller Standard size 1 size larger
Maximum allowable
RZQ TYPE 10m(15m) 75m(90m) 35m(45m)
piping length (*)
Maximum height between indoor and outdoor 10m 30m 25m

Chargeless length ≤10m ≤30m ≤15m
(*) Parenthesized figure represents the equivalent length.
CAUTION
• Do not use pipe cutters and flare tools which have been used with refrigerant other R410A.
• Use theconnecting
When the flares, coat the flare section with ether oil or ester oil.
• In order to prevent dirt, liquidto the
flare nut attached outdoor (indoor) unit.
• or taping. or dust from entering the piping, cure the piping with a pinch
5-5 CONSTRUCTION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING

• To install the connecting pipe to the unit in a downward direction, make a knockout hole by penetrating
the center area around the knockout hole using a φ 6 mm drill.<Fig.1>
• Cutting out the two slits makes it possible to install as shown in the figure.
•
(Use a metal saw to cut out the slits.)<Fig.2>
•
Field pipes can be installed in four directions.<Fig.3>
Do not allow any substances other than the specified refrigerant such as air to mix into the refrigerant
circuit.
Centre area around knockout hole Front plate
Drill
Pipe outlet plate
Knockout hole
Backward
Slit Connecting pipe Screw front plate

Slit Foward Sideways
Bottom frame
Pipe outlet plates crew Downward
<Fig.1> <Fig.2> <Fig.3>
After knocking out the knock hole, we recommend applying a repair coating on edges, slits,
and around side surfaces to prevent rusting.
C : 1P208412
Installation 271
<Please refer to installation manual of indoor

REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK (3/4) unit about indoor unit's refrigerant piping>
REAR-SIDE CONNECTION SIDE CONNECTION

· Connect after the valve cover is removed · Connect after the valve cover is removed
Flare nut
Flare nut Flare nut
Flare nut
Gas piping
(Field supply) Liquid piping
Gas piping Liquid piping
(Field supply)
(Field supply) (Field supply)
PREVENTING FOREIGN OBJECTS FROM ENTERING

• Plug the pipe through-holes with putty or insulating material (field supply) Putty or insulating material
to stop up all gaps, as shown in the figure. (Field supply)
• Insects or small animals entering the outdoor unit
may cause a short circuit in the electrical box. Service port
CAUTIONS FOR HANDLING STOP VALVE Stop valve

NEVER OPEN THE STOP VALVE UNTIL CHARGING REFRIGERANT FINISHED. Valve cover
• The stop valves for indoor-outdoor connecting piping are closed at shipment from the factory.
• Since the side boards may be deformed if only a torque wrench is used when loosening or
tightening flare nuts, always lock the stop valve with a wrenches and then use a torque wrench.
DO NOT APPLY FORCE ON THE VALVE COVER, THIS MAY RESULT IN A REFRIGERANT LEAK. Field piping connection
• For cooling operation under low ambient temperature or
any other operation under low pressure, apply silicon pad DO NOT PLACE
WRENCHES ON
or similar to prevent freezing of the gas stop valve THE VALVE COVER.
flare nut (see figure).
Spanner Open
Freezing of the flare nut may cause refrigerant leak. Open
Torque
[How to use the stop valve] wrench
Use hexagonal wrenches 4mm and 6mm.

Opening the valve 1. Place the hex wrench on the valve bar and turn counter-clockwise.
2. Stop when the valve bar no longer turns. (It is now open.) <Liquid side> <Gas side>
Closing the valve 1. Place the hex wrench on the valve bar and turn clockwise.
2. Stop when the valve bar no longer turns. (It is now closed.) Silicon sealing pad
(Make sure there is no gap)
CAUTIONS FOR HANDING SERVICE PORT
• A seal is attached to the point indicated by the arrow. Take care not to damage it.
• Be sure to tighten the valve cover securely after operating the valves.
Valve cover
Valve size Tightening torque (N·m) Valve size Tightening torque (N·m)
Liquid side φ9.5 13.5~16.5 Gas side φ15.9 22.5~27.5
Stop valve (cover attachment)
CAUTIONS FOR HANDING SERVICE PORT
• Always use a flexible charge hose with a push-rod and valve to enable recovery of remaining refrigerant in the charge hose.
• After the work, tighten the valve cover in place.
• Tightening torque: 11.5~13.9N·m
Compressor Field piping
PRECAUTIONS WHEN CONNECTING FIELD PIPING
• Be careful not to let the indoor and outdoor branch piping come into contact Terminal cover
Insulation
with the compressor terminal cover. If the liquid-side piping insulation material
might come into contact with it, adjust the height as shown in the figure. (Field
Also, make sure the field piping does not touch the bolts or outer panels supply)
of the compressor.
• When the outdoor unit is installed above the indoor unit the following can occur :
The condensated water on the stop valve can move to the indoor unit. Corking, etc.
To avoid this, please cover the stop valve with sealing material.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN REGARDING INSULATION Thermal insulation is twisted so that the
piping R section may not be exposed,
• If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is and it is recuperated on a vinyl tape.
higher than RH 80% (or 75%), then the thickness
of the sealing materials should be at least 20mm (or 15mm) in order to avoid condensation on the surface of the sealing.
• Be sure to insulate the liquid and gas-side field piping and the refrigerant branch kit.
(It may become the cause of a leak if it does not insulate.)
(The highest temperature that the gas-side piping can reach is around 120°C,
so be sure to use insulating material which is very resistant.)
Be sure to insulate any field piping all the way to the piping connection inside the unit.
(Any exposed piping may cause condensation or burns if touched.)
1P208413
272 Installation
REFRIGERANT PIPING WORK (4/4)

Spanner
CAUTION FOR FLARE CONNECTION Torque wrench
Union pipe coupling
• Please be sure to remove a flare nut with a two-dish spanner, and
to bind after connection of piping using a spanner and a torque wrench.
2
• Refer to the following table for a flare part processing size.
• When connecting the flare nut, apply refrigeranting machine oil Flare nut
to the flare (only inside) and first screw the nut 3 or 4 Flare nut
turns by hand. Coat here with ether or ester oil.
• Refer to the table for the dimensions for processing flares Terminal area of field piping
and for the tightening torques. (Too much tightening will end
Coat the flare section (only inside) with ester oil or ether oil.
up in splitting of the flare.)
• After completing the insullation, carry out a gas leak inspection
of the piping connections with nitrogen and such.
A DIMENSIONS FOR
PIPING SIZE TIGHTENING TORQUE FLARE SHAPE
PROCESSING FLARES (mm)
φ 6.4 14.2 ~ 17.2N·m 8.7 ~ 9.1

R0.4~0.8
±2°
φ 9.5 32.7 ~ 39.9N·m 12.8 ~ 13.2
45°
90°±2°
A
φ12.7 49.5 ~ 60.3N·m 16.2 ~ 16.6
φ15.9 61.8 ~ 75.4N·m 19.3 ~ 19.7
φ19.1 97.2 ~ 118.8N·m 23.6 ~ 24.0
• If a torque wrench is not available, be aware that

FURTHER TIGHTENING RECOMMENDED ARM
the tightening torque may increase suddenly. PIPING SIZE
ANGLE LENGTH OF TOOL
Do not tighten nuts any further than to the angle as listed.
• When work is completed, be sure to check that there φ 6.4 60°~90° About 150mm
is no gas leakage. φ 9.5 60°~90° About 200mm
1 A flare nut is bound tight with a spanner to the position φ12.7 30°~60° About 250mm
whose torque with a bundle increases suddenly. φ15.9 30°~60° About 300mm
2 Only the angle of a right table is further bound tight φ19.1 20°~35° About 450mm
from the position.
CAUTION FOR BRAZING

• Be sure to carry out a nitrogen blow when brazing.
Brazing without carrying out nitrogen replacement or releasing nitrogen into the piping will create large quantities of oxidized
film on the inside of the pipes, adversely affecting valves and compressors in the refrigerating system and preventing
normal operation.
• When brazing while inserting nitrogen into the piping, nitrogen Pressure-reducing valve
Refrigerant piping
must be set to 0.02 MPa with a pressure-reducing valve (=just Part to be brazed
enough so that it can be felt on the skin).
Nitrogen
Please do not use an antioxidant etc. at the time of brazing.
(It may result in piping Interruption or part failure with Taping Nitrogen
a residual substance.) Hands valve
AIR PURGE
• Do not purge the air with refrigerants. Use a vacuum pump to vacuum the installation. No additional
refrigerant is provided for air purging.
• Pipes inside the units were checked for leaks by the manufacturer. The refrigerant pipes fit on site are to
be checked for leaks by the installer.
• Confirm that the valves are firmly closed before leak test or vacuuming.
(Refer to the manufacturer's label of the outdoor unit for the test pressure)
OUTDOOR UNIT Stop valve
INDOOR UNIT
Pressure
gauge
Nitrogen
Vacuum pump
(CHECKING LEAKAGE)
Note: The refrigerant pressure may not rise even if the stop valve is opened after an air purge is performed
using a vacuum pump. This is because the outdoor unit refrigerant piping is closed off with electric
valves inside. This will not create any problems during operation.
10
C : 1P208413
Installation 273
CHARGING REFRIGERANT (1/2) < R410A should be used for a refrigerant at any cost.
(The coolant cylinder for R410A has painted the upper
part by peach color.) >
ADDITIONAL REFRIGERANT CHARGING
This model is chargeless type, so it is not necessary to charge additionaly
if pipe does not exceed the maximum allowable length without additional charge.
Please refer to the following table about the maximum allowable length without additional charge.
Liquid piping Liquid piping Liquid piping ONE INDOOR UNIT TYPE (PAIR)
Refrigerant piping size 1 size smaller standard size 1 size larger
Maximum allowable
piping length without RZQ TYPE 10m 30m 15m
Main pipe (LO)
additional charge
When piping length exceeds its of a top table,

or only when you perform recharging, Piping length L=LO
please be correctly charged according to the following.

For future servicing, please describe the amount of additional refrigerant charging,
or the amount of recharging in the collective indications label of attachment
at the back of front plate.
• In case of additional refrigerant charging
Please select the amount of additional refrigerant which suited piping
length from the following table, and add it from the service port of
the liquid stop valve.
Refrigerant piping size standard size 1 size larger
Connected piping length is between 30~40m ~50m ~60m ~75m 15~20m ~25m ~30m ~35m
Additional refrigerant charging

(kg) RZQ TYPE
0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0
• Total refrigerant charging (After a leak, etc...)
Please charge refrigerant based on pipe length mentioned on the following table.
Refrigerant piping size Liquid piping standard size

Refrigerant piping length ~10m~20m~30m ~40m ~50m~60m ~75m
Total refrigerant charging
RZQ TYPE 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.7 5.2 5.7
(kg)
Liquid piping
Refrigerant piping size 1 size smaller Liquid piping 1 size larger
Refrigerant piping length ~10m ~10m ~15m ~20m ~25m ~30m ~35m
Total refrigerant
charging (kg) RZQ TYPE 2.7 3.2 3.7 4.2 4.7 5.2 5.7
When recharged with a refrigerant, please carry out in the following procedure.
1 Please recover the refrigerant until becoming -0.098MPa or less
by the gage pressure from port for the recovery of refrigerant
in front board. Port for
refrigerant recovery
2 Please execute vacuuming from port. (The same port as 1)
3 In case of complete recharge of refrigerant, please recharge
from the service port of liquid stop valve.
11
C : 1P208413
274 Installation
CHARGING REFRIGERANT (2/2)
Precautions charging R410A Before charging, check whether the cylinder has a siphon attached or not.
(A cylinder has the display "with the siphon pipe for liquid charging")
Charging a cylinder with an attached siphon
Stand the cylinder upright at charging.

Charging other cylinders
2
Turn the cylinder upside-down at charging.
(There is a siphon pipe inside, so that cylinder (Be careful not to fall down the cylinders.)
need not be upside-down to fill with liquid.)
• Be sure to charge refrigerant from service port of liquid side stop valve.
WARNING
To persons incharge of piping work
• Please be sure to open a stop valve after a refrigerant charging end
(if it operates shut, a compressor will break down).
• Please do not emit a refrigerant into the atmosphere indiscriminately.
ELECTRICAL WIRING WORK (1/3)

WARNING
• Install the earth leakage circuit breaker. (A duty of installation of a earth leakage
circuit breaker is imposed for an electric shock and fire accident prevention.)
• Electrical wiring must be carried out by qualified personnel.
• Before obtaining access to terminal devices, all supply circuits must be interrupted.
CAUTION
To persons incharge of electrical wiring work

• Do not connect the earth wire to a gas pipe, water pipe, lightning conductor or telephone earth wire.
• Use only copper wires.
• The wiring between the indoor unit and outdoor unit must be for 240V.
• Do not turn on the main switch until all the wiring is completed.
• The resistance of the grounding must not exceed 500Ω. (Keep below 250Ω in locations
with high electrical danger.)
• When performing electrical wiring, refer also to the wiring diagram affixed to the unit.
• Use the specified wires and fix them with clamps so that no external forces
act on the terminals. For clamping, push the hook in tail end of the clamp to loosen it,
pass the wires through it, then fasten the clamp.
• As this unit is equipped with an inverter, installing a phase advancing capacitor not only
will deteriorate power factor improvement effect, but also may cause a capacitor abnormal
heating accident due to high-frequency waves. Therefore never install a phase advancing capacitor.
• Clamp the wiring as shown below, taking care that the wires do not touch the piping
(especially high-pressure piping).
• Never squeeze extra wires into the unit.
• Protect the electric wiring with electric wiring pipes or tubes to prevent the edges of
the knock holes from damaging it.
• Secure the electrical wiring with the included clamping material as shown in the figure below
so that it does not come in contact with the piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
Make sure no external pressure is applied to the terminal connectors.
Secure the wiring in the order shown below.
1.Secure the wiring between units to the stop valve mounting plate so that it does not move.
2.Secure the wiring between units to the stop valve mounting plate one more time along with
the power supply wiring.
• Lay the electrical wiring so that the front cover does not rise up when doing wiring work, and
attach the front cover securely.
• Form the wires and fix the cover firmly so that the cover may be fit in properly.
12
1P208413
Installation 275

• As shown in the following figure, please fix power supply wiring,
field wiring and an earth wire by clamp material.
• Power supply wiring, wiring The wiring clamp method

between units and earth wire
with tying bundling 1 Fix to the stop valve 2 Fix the earth wire to the
as shown below. fixing plate not to stop valve fixing plate with
move on the earth power supply wiring and
(May be shaped of wiring between units
wire.
tying bundling portion again.
2 type as shown below.)
Earth wire Earth wire
Clamp material
(accessories) Clamp material
(accessories)
The stop valve Power supply

fixing plate wiring and wiring
between units

Earth wire
Power supply wiring
The stop valve

fixing plate
Clamp material
(accessories)
Fix to the stop valve fixing Fix to the stop valve fixing
plate not to move on the plate not to move on the
earth wire. power supply wiring and
wiring between units.
• Carry out insulated processing of attaching

an insulated sleeve.
The wiring extraction direction Ground
Back Terminal Strip
L N
1 2 3
Side
Front
Power supply wiring
and earth wire
Power Supply wiring Wiring
between units
and earth wire
13
1P208413
276 Installation

Connection of wiring Round crimp-style
terminal Electric wire
Precautions on wiring
• Use a round crimp-style terminal for connection

2
Insulating sleeve
to the power supply terminal board.
In case it cannot be used due to unavoidable reasons,
be sure to observe the following instruction.
• Do not connect wires of different gauge to the same power supply terminal.
• When connecting wires of the same gauge, connect them according to the below figure.
Connect wires Do not connect Do not connect
of the same wires of the same wires of different
gauge to both sides gauge to one side gauges
• Use the correct screwdriver to tighten the terminal screws. Tightening torque (N·m)
Small screwdrivers can damage the screw head and prevent M4 (Wiring between units terminal board) 1.2~1.8
appropriate tightening.
M5 (Power supply terminal board) 2.0~3.0
• Over-tightening the terminal screws can damage the screws.
See the table below for tightening torques for the terminal M5 (Earth) 2.4~2.9
screws.
Precautions on connecting terminal of grounding
• Ground wiring should be taken out from the cut out section of Round pressure Cup washer
a cup washer. terminal
(Otherwise, contact of ground wiring is inadequate and it is
ineffective.) Cut out section
WIRING OF POWER SUPPLY AND THE UNITS

For details on the wiring of the indoor unit and wiring between units
refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit.
POWER SUPPLY
~ L N • SPECIFICATIONS OF STANDARD WIRING COMPONENTS
50Hz Power supply
240V Wire type of
Recommended Wire type wiring between
Size the units
(Outdoor Unit)
field fuse (∗)
X1M L N Wiring size must

1 2 3
comply with the
30A H05VV-U3G H05VV-U4G2.5
applicable local
and national code
(∗)Only in protected pipes, use HD7RN-F when protected pipes are not used.
1 2 3 (Indoor Unit)
• In wiring, make certain that prescribed wires are used, carry out complete connections,
and fix the wires so that outside forces are not applied to the terminals.
• Instead of fuse, use circuit breaker.
• Refer to the engineering data for details.
CAUTION
TO PERSONS IN CHARGE OF ELECTRICAL WIRING WORK

• Do not operate the unit until the refrigerant charging is complate.
(Running it before the the piping is ready will break the compressor.)
14
1P208413
Installation 277
LOCAL SETUP
PRE-RUN CHECKS
ITEM TO CHECK CHECK

Power supply Is the wiring as mentioned on the wiring diagram?
wiring Make sure no wiring has been forgotten and that there are no missing phases
or reverse phases.
Does wiring between units put in and changed in continuation installation?
Is the unit properly grounded?
Are any of the wiring attachment screws loose?
Is the insulation resistance at least 1MΩ?
• Use a 500V mega-tester when measuring insulation.
• ∗Do not use a mega-tester for circuits which are not 240V.
Refrigerant Is the size of the piping appropriate?
piping Is the insulation material for the piping attached securely?
Are both the liquid and gas pipes insulated?
Are the stop valves for both the liquid side and the gas side open?
Extra refrigerant Did you write down the extra refrigerant and the refrigerant piping length?
WARNING
• Where a power supply is switched on, when you leave from the outdoor unit, be sure to close the front plate.
(It becomes the cause of an electric shock.)
THE METHOD OF LOW NIGHT NOISE SETTING USING THE REMOTE CONTROLLER (∗ONLY RZQ)
The functions of the "Low Night Noise Setting" outdoor unit can be set
by using the remote controller.
During installation, make the on-site settings
according to the description below, after the service inspection and repair.
Mistakes in the settings could cause malfunctions.
HOW TO MAKE THE ON-SITE SETTINGS
Make the on-site settings according to "How to make the on-site settings"
which came with the remote controller.
• The settings are set by switching between "Mode No.", "FIRST CODE NO.",
and "SECOND CODE NO.".
CONTENT OF SETTINGS AND SETTING NUMBER : Factory settings
Mode FIRST Content of SECOND CODE NO.
No. CODE NO. settings 01 02 03 04 05 06
Choose the code No. 02 Low Night
0 "Low Night Noise Setting" - Noise Setting
16
(26) 1 Choose the code No. 06 Low Night
"Low Night Noise Setting" Noise Setting
See the technical guide for details on the content of the settings
Shift of mode
4 times
Normal run Test run
1 time
1 time 1t
1 time im
(4 seconds or more) e
4t
im
es
Field setting Inspection
NOTE: 1. Do not set any values not shown in the table above.
2. When returning to normal mode, the remote controller may display "88"
because it has been initialized.
15
1P208413
278 Installation
TEST OPERATION
WARNING
• Never operate the unit without the thermistor (R3T, R4T) buring of the compressor may result. 2
• Be sure to close the front plate, when you leave from the outdoor unit as power supply
is switched on.
HOW TO TEST RUN

Please be sure to make a test run in the following procedure.
1 Be sure to turn the power on at least 6 hours before operation for compressor protection.
2 Confirm that stop valves both on the liquid and gas sides are open.
<Make sure the front panel is closed before operation.>
∗The refrigerant pressure might not go up even if the stop valve is opend after the air purge
with vacuum pump.
3 Set up a cooling operation.
4 Pushing TEST button for 4 times (2 times for wireless remote control)
and it changes to test run mode. ON/OFF button is pushed within about 10 seconds, and a test run is started.
It continues operating for about 3 minutes.
∗Then, it is not unusual although it switches to heating operation.
(A remote control display is still "heating" in this case.)
5 TEST button is pushed, it usually operates and a function is checked according to an instructions manual.
6 When the make up panel is not attached, a power supply is intercepted after a test run end.
∗Even if it sets it as heating in the outdoor air temperature of about 24°C or more, it does not operate,
but it is not unusual.
CAUTION
1. In the above-mentioned procedure 4 , also when a setup in test run mode and the turn of operation of
pushing ON/OFF button are reverse, a test run can be started.
2. When it is unusual and you cannot operate, please refer to the following malfunction diagnosis.
3. Please check that push TEST button once, and the entering malfunction code has become "00"
(= normal) at check mode after a test run end. When malfunction codes other than "00" are displayed,
please refer to the following malfunction diagnosis.
4. If TEST button is pushed 4 times, it will usually return to the mode of operation.
5. When wireless remote control is being used, please make a test run after makeup panel attachment.
Open
Shift of mode Open
4 times
Normal run Test run
1 time
1 time 1t
1 time im
(4 seconds or more) e <Liquid side> <Gas side>
4t
im
es It turns until it removes a valve lid and stops to a
Field setting Inspection counterclockwise rotation by a 6 angle wrench.
MALFUNCTION DIAGNOSIS • At the time of a test run, when the following malfunction code is displayed
on remote control, the fault of installation construction can be considered.
Malfunction code Installation error Remedialaction
[E3] [E4] [L8] A failure of a stop valve to open "Open" operation of a stop valve
[E3] [E4] [L4] [L8] Closing of an air passage Removing closing thing from air passage
[U1] Missing phase, negative phase 2 phase of power supply 3 phase (R, S, T phase) are replaced
[U2] Power supply unbalancing Unbalanced dissolution
[U4] [UF] Incorrect connection of field wiring Correction of wiring
• When malfunctionl codes other than the above are displayed on remote control, considering that the failure of
between an indoor and an outdoor unit may have.
Refer to the installation description of an indoor unit for an malfunction
code. (An malfunctionl code has what has a display according to the form of the interior
of a room and an outdoor unit, and the thing which is not.)
CAUTION
To persons in change of piping work and electric work
• Please check having attached the front board and the piping cover after a test run end
when giving production over to customer.
16
1P208413
Installation 279
3.6 RZQ100H / 125H / 160HY4A (Installation manual)
1P227380
280 Installation
1P227380
Installation 281
1P227380
282 Installation
1P227380
Installation 283
1P227380
284 Installation
1P227380
Installation 285
1P227380
286 Installation
1P227380
Installation 287
1P227381
288 Installation
2
C : 1P227381
Installation 289
1P227381
290 Installation
1P227381
Installation 291
1P227381
292 Installation
1P227381
Installation 293
1P227381
294 Installation
1P227381
Installation 295
296 Installation
EDAU28-856
Part 3
Detail Information
of Options
3
1. Accessories.........................................................................................299
1.1 Indoor unit ............................................................................................299
1.2 Outdoor unit..........................................................................................304
2. Remote controller................................................................................305
2.1 BRC1D61 — Wired remote controller with weekly schedule timer ......305
2.2 Wireless remote controller....................................................................313
3. FCQ.....................................................................................................315
3.1 BYCP125K-W1 — Decoration panel....................................................315
3.2 KDBH55K160F — Sealing member of air discharge outlet..................320
3.3 KDBP55H160FA — Panel spacer........................................................324
3.4 KDDP55K160(K) — Fresh air intake kit (chamber type) ......................327
3.5 KDDP55X160 — Fresh air intake kit (direct installation type) ..............332
3.6 KAFP556H80·160, KAFP557H80·160
— High efficiency filter (including chamber) .........................................335
3.7 KAFP552H80·160, KAFP553H80·160
— Replacement high efficiency filter ....................................................338
3.8 KDDFP55H160 — High efficiency filter chamber.................................339
3.9 KAFP551K160 — Replacement long-life filter .....................................342
3.10 KAFP55H160 — Ultra long-life filter unit (including chamber) .............343
3.11 KAFP55H160H — Replacement ultra long-life filter.............................346
3.12 KKSJ55K160 — Chamber connection kit.............................................347
3.13 KDJP55H80·160 — Branch duct chamber...........................................348
3.14 KDTP55K80·160 — Insulation kit for high humidity .............................351
3.15 KRP1H98 — Installation box for adaptor PCB .....................................353
4. FFQ .....................................................................................................362
4.1 BYFQ60B7W1 — Decoration panel .....................................................362
4.2 KDBHQ44B60 — Sealing member of air discharge outlet ...................365
4.3 KDBQ44B60 — Panel spacer ..............................................................367
4.4 KAFQ441B60 — Replacement long-life filter .......................................370
4.5 KDDQ44X60 — Fresh air intake kit (direct installation type)................371
4.7 KRP1BA101 — Installation box for adaptor PCB.................................375
5. FHQ.....................................................................................................384
5.1 KDU50N60VE / KDU50N125VE — Drain-up kit ..................................384
5.2 KAF501DA56·80·112·160 — Replacement long-life filter ....................389
5.3 KHFP5MA63·160 — L-type piping kit (for upward direction)................389
5.4 KRP1CA93 — Installation box for adaptor PCB...................................390
Options 297
EDAU28-856

6. FAQ.....................................................................................................400
7. FBQ.....................................................................................................404
7.1 KTBJ25K56W / 80W — Service access panel.....................................404
7.2 KDAJ25K56A / 71A — Air discharge adaptor ......................................407
8. Outdoor unit ........................................................................................410
8.3 KKP937A4 — Drain plug......................................................................412
8.4 KKP945A4 — Drain plug......................................................................413
8.5 KKPJ5F180 — Central drain plug ........................................................414
8.6 K-KYZP15C — Wire fixture for preventing overturning ........................415
8.7 KPT-60B160 — Fixture for preventing overturning ..............................417
8.8 KRP58M51 — Demand adaptor...........................................................419
298 Options
EDAU28-856 Accessories
1. Accessories
1.1 Indoor unit
1.1.1 FCQ
Standard
accessories Name (1) Drain hose (2) Metal clamp
(3)Washer for
(4) Clamp
(5)Paper pattern
(6) Screw (M4)
hanger bracket for installation
Quantity 1 pc. 1 pc. 8 pcs. 6 pcs. 1 pc. 4 pcs.
Also used as For paper pattern
packing material for installation
Shape
3
Name (7)Washer fixing Insulation for
Sealing pad
Installation
plate fitting guide
Quantity 4 pcs. 1 each 1 each 1 pc. 1 pc. 1 pc.
(8) for gas pipe (10) Large
(Other)
(14) (15) y Installation
(13) Small
(9) for liquid pipe (11) Medium-1 manual
Shape y Operation
manual
(12) Medium-2
3P177351-2D
Optional
accessories Kit name
Name of option Remark
71K 100K 125K 140K
Decoration panel BYCP125K-W1
Sealing member of air discharge outlet KDBH55K160F
Panel spacer KDBP55H160FA
Without T-joint
KDDP55K160
pipe and fan
Chamber type
Fresh air intake kit With T-joint pipe, KDDP55K160K
without fan
Direct installation type KDDP55X160
Chamber connection kit *1 KKSJ55K160
Insulation kit for high humidity KDTP55K80 KDTP55K160
(Colorimetric method 65%) KAFP556H80 KAFP556H160
High-efficiency filter
(Colorimetric method 90%) KAFP557H80 KAFP557H160
Replacement high-efficiency (Colorimetric method 65%) KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160
Filter (Colorimetric method 90%) KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
High-efficiency filter chamber KDDFP55H160
Replacement long-life filter KAFP551K160
Ultra long-life filter KAFP55H160
Replacement ultra long-life filter KAFP55H160H
Branch duct chamber KDJP55H80 KDJP55H160
Wired type *2 BRC1D61
Remote controller
Wireless type Heat pump BRC7F632F
Central remote controller *3 DCS302CA61
Unified ON/OFF controller *3 DCS301BA61
Schedule timer *3 DST301BA61
intelligent Touch Controller *3 DCS601C51
Adaptor for wiring *4 KRP1C63
Group control adaptor *4 KRP4AA53
Installation box for adaptor PCB KRP1H98
Remote sensor (for indoor temperature) KRCS01-4B
C : 3D058465A
Note: *1. Required for installing high-efficiency filter of ultra long-Llife filter.
*2. Wiring for wired remote controller to be procured locally.
*3. The indoor unit is equipped standardly with the Interface for SkyAir series and an option is unnecessary.
*4. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1H98) is necessary.
Options 299
Accessories EDAU28-856
1.1.2 FFQ
Standard
accessories 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1x 1x 8x 1x 4x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 1x
1 Drain hose 7 Insulation for liquid pipe fitting

2 Metal clamp 8 Large sealing pad 2
3 Washer for hanger bracket 9 Small sealing pad
4 Paper pattern for installation 10 Sealing material
5 Srews (M5) for paper pattern for installation 11 Installation manual and operation manual
6 Insulation for gas pipe fitting
4PW23700-1A
Optional
25B 35B 50B 60B
2
1
3
4
Decoration panel BYFQ60B7W1
Remote Heat pump BRC7E530W
controller Wireless type
Cooling only 4 BRC7E531W
Adaptor for wiring *2 3 KRP1BA57
2
1
Remote sensor (for indoor temperature) KRCS01-1B
Installation box for adaptor PCB 2 KRP1BA101
Interface adaptor for SkyAir series DTA112BA51
Replacement long-life filter KAFQ441B60
Fresh air intake kit Direct installation type KDDQ44X60
Sealing member of air discharge outlet KDBHQ44B60
Panel spacer KDBQ44B60
C : 3TW26479-1D
Note: *1. Wiring for wired remote controller to be procured locally.
*2. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1BA101) is necessary.
*3. This optional accessory requires DTA112BA51.
300 Options
1.1.3 FHQ
Standard
accessories (3) Washer for
(5)Paper pattern
Name (1) Drain hose (2) Clamp hanger (4) Clamp for installation
bracket
Quantity 1 pc. 1 pc. 8 pcs. 6 pcs. 1 pc.
Shape
3
Name Insulation for fitting Sealing pad
Quantity 1 each 1 each
(6) For gas pipe (8) Large
(Other)
y Operation manual
Shape (9) Small y Installation manual
(7) For liquid pipe
3PN06588-3G
Optional
50BV 60BV 71BV 100BV 125BV
Long-life filter Resin net KAF501DA56 KAF501DA80 KAF501DA112 KAF501DA160
Drain-up kit KDU50N60VE KDU50N125VE
L-type piping kit (for upward direction) KHFP5MA63 KHFP5MA160
Remote Heat pump
controller BRC7EA63W
Wireless type
Cooling only BRC7EA66 —
Adaptor for wiring KRP1BA54
Installation box for adaptor PCB KRP1CA93
Remote sensor (for indoor temperature) — KRCS01-1B
Electrical box with earth terminal (3 blocks) — KJB311AA
Electrical box with earth terminal (2 blocks) — KJB212AA
C : 3D038056A
C : 3D044485B
*3. Installation box for adaptor PCB (KRP1CA93) is necessary.
Options 301
1.1.4 FAQ
Standard
accessories Name (1) Installation panel
Insulation for fitting
(4) Insulation tape
(5) Paper pattern
(for refrigerant pipe) for installation
Quantity 1 1 each 2 1
(2) For liquid pipe (Other)
y Operation
manual
y Installation
Shape manual
(6) Screw×12
(3) For gas pipe
3P184443-2B
Optional
100BV
Remote controller
Wireless type Heat pump BRC7C610W
Group control adaptor (2) KRP4AA51
Electrical box with earth terminal (3 blocks) KJB311AA
Electrical box with earth terminal (2 blocks) KJB212AA
C : 3D044482B
302 Options
1.1.5 FBQ
Standard
accessories Name (1) Metal clamp (2) Chain (3) Drain hose Insulation for fitting
Quantity 1 pc. 1 set 1 pc. 1 each
(4) For gas pipe
Shape
FBQ50BV1A 2 pcs.
FBQ60 · 71BV1A 3 pcs. (5) For liquid pipe 3
(8) Washer for hanger
Name Sealing pad bracket Clamp (11) Screw for chains
Quantity 1 each 8 pcs. 4 pcs. 2 pcs. 1 set

(6) Large (9) Large (10) Small
Shape
FBQ50BV1A 4 pcs.
(7) Middle FBQ60 · 71BV1A 6 pcs.
(12) Duct companion

Name flange connection (13) Small sealing pad
screw
Quantity 1 set 2 pcs.
(Other)
y Operation manual
y Installation manual
Shape
FBQ50BV1A 8 pcs.
FBQ60 · 71BV1A 12 pcs.
3P156215-8K
Optional
50B 60B 71B
Service access panel KTBJ25K56W KTBJ25K80W
Air discharge adaptor KDAJ25K56A KDAJ25K71A
Remote controller
Wireless type Heat pump BRC4C62
Adaptor for wiring (interlock for fresh air intake fan) KRP1BA54
Group control adaptor KRP4AA51
C : 4D053094A

Options 303
1.2 Outdoor unit

1.2.1 RZQ
Optional
Name of option
71FV4A 100FV4A 100KV4A 125KV4A 160KV4A 100HY4A 125HY4A 160HY4A
Central drain plug KKPJ5F180
Wire fixture for preventing overturning K-KYZP15C
Fixture for preventing overturning KPT-60B160
Demand adaptor KRP58M51
4D046721C
1.2.2 RKS
Optional
25EBVMA 35EBVMA 50FBVMA 60FBVMA
Air direction adjustment grille KPW937A4 KPW945A4
One set includes 5
Drain plug KKP937A4
pieces for 5 units
1.2.3 RXS
Optional
25EBVMA 35EBVMA 50FBVMA 60FBVMA 71FBVMA
Air direction adjustment grille KPW937A4 KPW945A4
One set includes 5
Drain plug pieces for 5 units KKP937A4 KKP945A4
304 Options
EDAU28-856 Remote controller
2. Remote controller
2.1 BRC1D61 — Wired remote controller with weekly schedule timer
Adds new, advanced functions to those of the wired remote controller.
Includes ventilation mode and airflow rate switching, the main

functions of HRV series.
24-hour clock function (1-hour backup for power failures).
Programming function for each day of week.
Scheduling possible of start/stop and temperature limit
(5 settings/day).
Programming can be enabled or disabled.
Copy function for programmed schedules. 3
Features and functions
The BRC1D61 is a state of the art remote controller that offers full control over your installation.
1 BASIC REMOTE CONTROLLER
The basic remote controller functions are:
• ON/OFF,
• operation mode change-over,
• temperature, adjustment,
• air volume adjustment
• air flow direction adjustment.
2 CLOCK FUNCTION
The clock functions are:
• 24 hours real time clock,
• day of the veek indicator.
3 SCHEDULE TIMER FUNCTION

The schedule timer functions are:
• a maximum of 5 actions can be programmed for each day of the week (totalling 35 actions),
• schedule timer can be enabled/disabled at any time,
• linked to a set temperature or a LIMIT operation or an OFF operation,
• "last command" overrules previous command until next scheduled command.
4 LIMIT OPERATION
Limit operation provides thermostat control within the range of the set minimum and maximum temperature.
The minimum temperature setting will trigger heating, the maximum temperature setting will trigger cooling.
5 LEAVE HOME
The leave home function prevents the room temperature from dropping when the occupants are out for a longer
period. If the room temperature drops below 10ºC, heating is started automatically. As soon as 15ºC is reached, the
controller returns to its original status.
6 BUTTON PERMISSION LEVEL

Three hierarchical permission levels can be set to limit the user action.
3P107422-3D
Options 305
Remote controller EDAU28-856
Names and functions
3P107422-3D
306 Options
Name and function of switches and icons (refer to figure 1)
3P107422-3D
Options 307
3P107422-3D
308 Options
Installation
3P107422-4D
Options 309
3P107422-4D
310 Options
3P107422-4D
Options 311
3P107422-4D
312 Options
2.2 Wireless remote controller
Model series
Name of option
FCQ FFQ FHQ50 · 60 FHQ71~125 FAQ FBQ
Remote Heat pump BRC7F632F BRC7E530W BRC7EA63W BRC7EA63W BRC7C610W BRC4C62
Wireless type
controller Cooling only — BRC7E531W BRC7EA66 — — —
Figure 1
1-1
1
ON OFF
8
3
1-2
3 H M L
DOWN
10
C ON OFF
UP
6
TEMP
FAN H M L TIME
11
4 C
hr. UP
9 DOWN
FAN
2 hr. 13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5 TIMER 12
hr.
TEST MODE 15
7
SWING 14
16
TEST
TEST 17
3P107422-11J
Figure 2 (explanation of receiver)
FCQ FFQ FHQ
22 23
22 23
21 20 22 23
19
18
19 21 20 18
18 3P107422-8S
19
20 21
3P107422-11J 3P107422-1S
FAQ FBQ (separate type)
18
20
22
18 20 21
19
21
19
23
23 22
3P107422-17M 3P107422-21S
Options 313
Names and functions of the operating section (fig. 1, 2)
DISPLAY “ ” (SIGNAL TRANSMIS- 14 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON

SION) OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
1
This lights up when a signal is being trans- 15 Press this button to select OPERATION
mitted. MODE.
DISPLAY “ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
“ ” (OPERATION MODE) 16 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in

the operation manual attached to the
2 This display shows the current OPERA- indoor unit.
TION MODE. For cooling only type,
INSPECTION/TEST OPERATION BUTTON
“ ” (Auto) and “ ” (Heating) are not 17 This button is used only by qualified ser-
installed. vice persons for maintenance purposes.
DISPLAY “
H M L
” (SET TEMPERATURE) EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
3 C 18 This switch is readily used if the remote
This display shows the set temperature. controller does not work.
RECEIVER
DISPLAY “ hr. hr. ”
19 This receives the signals from the remote
4 (PROGRAMMED TIME)
controller.
This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME
OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
of the system start or stop.
5 DISPLAY “ 20 This lamp stays lit while the air
” (AIR FLOW FLAP) conditioner runs. It flashes when the unit is
in trouble.
DISPLAY “ ”“ ” (FAN SPEED)
6 TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
The display shows the set fan speed. 21
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
DISPLAY “ TEST ” AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME
(INSPECTION/ TEST OPERATION) INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST OPERA- 22
Lights up when it is time to clean the air fil-
TION BUTTON is pressed, the display ter.
shows the system mode is in.
DEFROST LAMP (Orange)
ON/OFF BUTTON
23 Lights up when the defrosting operation
8 Press the button and the system will start. has started. (For cooling only type this
Press the button again and the system will lamp does not turn on.)
stop.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON NOTES
• For the sake of explanation, all indications are
9 Press this button to select the fan speed,
shown on the display in Figure 1 contrary to
HIGH or LOW, of your choice.
actual running situations.
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON • Fig. 1-2 shows the remote controller with the
10 Use this button for SETTING TEMPERA- front cover opened.
TURE (Operates with the front cover of the • If the air filter cleaning time indicator lamp
remote controller closed.) lights up, clean the air filter as explained in the
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON operation manual provided with the indoor
unit.
Use this button for programming “START
11 and/or STOP” time. (Operates with the After cleaning and reinstalling the air filter,
press the filter sign reset button on the remote
front cover of the remote controller
controller. The air filter cleaning time indica-
opened.)
tor lamp on the receiver will go out.
12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON • The Defrost Lamp will flash when the power is
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON turned on. This is not a malfunction.
C : 3P107422-11J
314 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3. FCQ
3.1 BYCP125K-W1 — Decoration panel
1. PRECAUTIONS
• Refer also to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
2. ACCESSORIES
• Installation manual.
3. NOTE TO INSTALLER 3
• Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly operate the system showing him/her the attached
operation manual.
2. PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL

〈〈For this unit, you are able to select air flow directions. To discharge air in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary
to purchase optional blocking pad kit.〉〉
HANDLING OF DECORATION PANELS

• Never place the panel facing down nor lean it against a wall nor leave it on a projecting object.
• Never touch or put pressure on the swing flap.
(The swing flap may malfunction)
(1) Remove the suction grille from the decoration panel.
1 Press the lever on the suction grille and lift the lever side. (Refer to Fig. 1)
2 Detach the suction grille from the decoration panel by lifting the grille up approximately 45 degrees.
(Refer to Fig. 2)
3 Remove the transporting cardboard (in 4 locations) from the main unit. (Refer to Fig. 3)
4 Remove the transporting tape (in 4 locations) on the back of the suction grille. (Refer to Fig. 4)
Corner section
decoration cover
Suction grille
45
Decoration
panel
Lever Swing flaps
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
1
3PA64319-13Q
Options 315
FCQ EDAU28-856
(2) Remove the corner section decoration cover.

• Lift the four corner decoration covers in the direction of the arrow and remove. (Refer to Fig. 5)
Cardboard Corner section

Tape decoration cover
Suction grille
Rear side of the suction grille
Fig. 3 Fig. 4 Fig. 5
3. INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL TO THE INDOOR UNIT BODY

〈〈Refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the installation of the indoor unit. 〉〉
(1) Match the “PIPING SIDE” and “DRAIN SIDE” displays on the decoration panel with the position of the pip-
ing section and drain section on the indoor unit.
(2) Install the decoration panel

1 Temporarily install the decoration panel to the indoor unit by hanging the temporary latch of the deco-
ration panel to the hook of the indoor unit body. (2 locations)
2 Hook the four mounting brackets on the corner sections of the decoration panels onto the hooks around
the main indoor unit body.
(Make sure at this time that the swing motor lead wire does not get caught between the decoration panel
and the main unit.)
3 Screw all 4 hexagon head screws located right beneath the latches in approximately 5 mm. (Panel will rise)
4 Adjust the decoration panel by turning it to the arrowed direction in Fig. 6 so that the ceiling opening is
completely covered.
Mounting bracket Hook

Drain 2
Piping section
section
1 Hook
(4 locations)
Temporary latch (2 locations)

“PIPING SIDE” marking
“DRAIN SIDE” marking
3 5
4
Fig. 6
2
3PA64319-13Q
316 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
5 Tighten the screws until the thickness of the sealing material between the decoration panel and the
indoor unit body reduces to 5-8 mm.
Sealing material
Indoor unit
5 - 8mm
Ceiling
material
Swing flaps
Decoration panel
3
[ PRECAUTIONS ]
• Inproper screwing of the screws may cause the Air leak
troubles shown in Fig. 7 Screw properly.
Air leak from ceiling
Contamination Dew formation, dew dripping
Fig. 7
• If gap is still left between the ceiling and the decoration panel after screwing the screws, readjust the indoor
unit body height. (Refer to Fig. 8)
Adjustment of the indoor unit body

height from the holes in the corner
of the decoration panel is possible
if the indoor unit is kept leveled and
the drain piping, etc. is unaffected.
No gap is allowed
Fig. 8
(3) Wiring of the decoration panel (Refer to Fig. 9)

6 Remove the electric components box lid.
7 Connect the connectors for swing flap motor lead wire installed on the decoration panel.
8 Replace the electric components box lid reversing the procedure to remove it.
Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire is not caught between the electric components box and its lid,
and between the indoor unit body and the decoration panel.
3
3PA64319-13Q
Options 317
FCQ EDAU28-856
7 Swing flap motor lead wire

Decoration panel side
Connector
Connect securely
Indoor unit side
Hooks
Swing flap motor lead wire Screw 6 8 Electric

<Wiring Diagram> (2 locations) components box lid
(The orientation of the indoor unit is changed
Loosen the two screws, slide the cover
for purposes of description.)
in the direction of the arrows,
Fig. 9 and disengage from the hooks.
4. INSTALLATION OF SUCTION GRILLE AND SERVICE COVER

(1) Install the suction grille
Install by reversing the procedure shown in “PREPARATION OF DECORATION PANEL”.
It is possible to install the suction grille in 4 directions by turning the suction grille.
Change the direction when adjusting the direction of the suction grille of multiple units or in meeting
customers’ demands.
Install the suction grill.

1 Tilt the suction grill at a 2 Hook up the strings of the suction grill to the fixtures of the 3 Slowly push the suction
45˚ angle and fix 3 hooks body corners (2 places) as shown below. grill up and lastly, ensure
to the decoration panel. the grill is fastened to the
NOTE: decoration panel body,
When mounting the String
keeping pressing 2 knobs.
suction grill, strings may
be caught in the grill.
Be sure that It should not
strings do not Suction grill hang outside.
Decoration hang out of the
suction grill edges.
panel body
String Fixture
String Fixture
String
When installing the grill,

Suction grill change the direction of
the strings.
Suction grill
NOTE :
Be careful not to get swing flap motor lead wire get caught when installing the suction grille.
C : 3PA64319-13Q
318 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
(2) Install the corner section decoration cover.

1 Attach the string of the corner section decoration cover to the pin of the decoration panel. (Refer to Fig. 10)
2 Install the corner section decoration cover over the decoration panel. (Refer to Fig. 11)
Hole
Hole
Attach by inserting the
Hole
five tabs on the corner
section decoration cover
Tab
Tab into the holes on the 3
Tab decoration panel.
Fig. 10 Fig. 11
4
C : 3PA64319-13Q
Options 319
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.2 KDBH55K160F — Sealing member of air discharge outlet

KDBH55K160·160F
Dimensions Unit:mm
Sealing materials for long air outlets (Polyethylene foam t10): 2 pieces Sealing materials for horizontal blades (Polyethylene foam t10): 8 pieces
Slit
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner (Polyethylene foam t10): 1 piece for each
Tape for sealing materials Tape for sealing materials Tape for sealing materials
for long air outlets (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 2 for air outlets at the corner (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 3 for air outlets at the corner (Non-woven fabric t0.6): 1
Slit
Side insulation plate (NB foam t10) : 2
Antisweat material (Flocking tape): See right Applicable part number Q'ty and colour
4, grey
4 for each, Dark grey or black
Antisweat material (Flocking tape): See right Applicable part number Q'ty and colour
4, grey
4 for each, Dark grey or black
J : D3K05112
320 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation
Precautions
Use this manual with the installation manuals attached to the indoor unit's main body and decoration panel.
When other separately-sold products are mounted, the 3-way blow and 2-way blow may not be selected.
For details, refer to the Engineering Data or catalog.
Parts content Check the following parts.
Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet Longitudinal air outlet Corner air outlet Corner air outlet
Name Longitudinal air outlet sealing material
sealing material A sealing material B1 sealing material B2 sealing material C sealing material D tape for fixing the sealing material tape for fixing the sealing material tape for fixing the sealing material
Number of pieces 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
D 2
Shape/Symbol 2
A B2 4
4 B1 C
3 3
Name Absorbent (Inside 1) Absorbent (Inside 2) Absorbent (Outside) Absorbent (Bridge centre) Absorbent (Bridge outside)
The sticking procedure for absorbent
Number of pieces 2 1 1 2 2 2 differs with classes 28 to 56 and with
Shape/Symbol
10 Use only classes 28 to 56
24mm×328mm
24mm×410mm
24mm×290mm
13
8mm×505mm
14 15 Use only classes 28 to 56
47mm×47mm
classes 63 to 160.
(Refer to 2 Sticking of absorbent to air outlet.) 3
Horizontal
Name Side insulator plate Horizontal blade absorbent
blade sealant
With 4-blade With 8-blade (2 colours) With 4-blade With 8-blade (2 colours)
Number of pieces 2 KDBH55K160F KDBH55K160 KDBH55K160F KDBH55K160
8 pieces
16 17 18 15mm×200mm 19
Shape/Symbol
100mm×1480mm ( With KDBH55K160, two colours are available,
gray and black, matching the blade colours. ) ( With KDBH55K160, two colours are available,
gray and black, matching the blade colours. ) 10mm×95mm
Blow Direction Selection and Sealing Material Mounting
(1) Blow direction selection

Depending on the installation location, select a blow direction from the table below. For the setting position number, refer to Field Setting .
For the selection of installation location, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit's main body.
Precautions Blow direction patterns other than those shown in the figure below cannot be selected. (Condensation may occur.)
4-way
Air outlet B1, B2
3 3 3 3 3
Pipe side Drain side
Air outlet 2
Air outlet 3
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Air outlet A Air outlet C 1 1 1 1 1
4-way 3-way
3 3 3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Drain side
1 1 1 1 1
3-way 2-way
3 3 3 3 3
Air outlet 1 Air outlet 4
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Air outlet D
Pipe side
1 1 1 1 1
2-way
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
(2) Matching with the corner air outlets A to D that are to be blocked, stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick the sealing material so that the sealing material comes to the positions shown in the schematic diagram.) (3) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in
(2) to the air outlet of indoor unit main body.
Sealing material 3 Sealing material 4
Sealing material 2
Release paper B1 B2
A
) )
(12 (12
2 Tape for fixing the sealing material 8 Tape for fixing the sealing material 8
) (12 (12
(12 )
Air outlet B1 )
Air outlet B2
Procedure 1
Remove the
release paper.
( When the indoor unit's main
body belongs to classes 28 to 56
) ( When the indoor unit's main body
belongs to classes 63 to 160 )
(12
) Tape for fixing the sealing material 8 Sealing material 5
C
D
Sealing material 6 Air outlet

Procedure 2 (12
)
Air outlet A
Stick the sealing material to the
(12) (12
tape for fixing the sealing material. )
With air outlets B to D , using the same procedure, Tape for fixing the sealing material 8 Tape for fixing the sealing material 9 Indoor unit main body
stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material as shown in the figure. Air outlet C Air outlet D
The sealing material has a directional property. Be sure to stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material so that the printed number of outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
Precautions
When blocking both the air outlet 1 and air outlet D , start the sticking of sealing material with the air outlet D .
(4) Matching the longitudinal air outlet numbered 1 to 4 that are to be blocked, prepare the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material. (5) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in
Cut both the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material along the perforation (dotted line). (4) to the air outlet of indoor unit main body.
Stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick so that the sealing material comes to the centre of tape for fixing the sealing material.) Indoor unit main body
Example) When blocking air outlet 2 or 3 Sealing material 1
2
4 3 Procedure 1
Procedure 2 Cut off
Remove the 3
release paper.
Release paper
Tape for fixing the sealing material 7 Air outlet 1
Procedure 3
<Sealing material treatment> Stick the sealing material so that it comes
to the centre of tape for fixing the sealing material. <Mounting to air outlet>
∗ When blocking the air outlet 1 , the sealing material preparation is not necessary.
Precautions The sealing material has a directional property. Be sure to stick the sealing material to
the tape for fixing the sealing material so that the printed number of outlet to be blocked becomes visible.
J : 1P177350A
Options 321
FCQ EDAU28-856
Sticking of Absorbent to Air Outlet
Stick the absorbent indicated in the table below to the air outlet that was not blocked in 1 according to the procedure shown in the figure below.
If the sticking of absorbent is omitted, condensation may occur.

Classes 28 to 56 Classes 63 to 160 Precautions
To positions where the absorbent is already stuck,
Air outlet 1 the sticking of absorbent is not necessary.
Air outlet 2 Absorbent 10 13 14 Total 3 pieces
Air outlet 3 Absorbent 10 13 14 15 Total 4 pieces Absorbent 11 13 14 Total 3 pieces
Air outlet 4 Absorbent 12 15 Total 2 pieces
Classes 28 to 56
ce
ren
refe
king 10
Stic St
ce Air outlet 3 13 ick
ing
ren 13 re
refe St
ick
fer
en
ing ing ce
ick 10 13 Sticking reference
St re
fer (Upper surface)
10 en
ce
13 Sticking reference
14 (Upper surface)
Stic
kin
g re
fere
nce
10 10
14 14
10
13 13
Sticking reference ce
en e) nce 15
fer c fere
(Upper surface) re ren re 14
ing efe king St 15
S t ick tre r Stic (C ickin
en g
S
(C tick
4 en 14 tre refe
1 ( C
re re en ing
fer nc tre re
en e
ce re fer
) fe en
re ce
nc
View e) View
nce
refere
king
Air outlet 2 Stic (Upper surface)
15
15
12
nce
fere
g re
kin
Stic
12
(5)
(5)
15 Cross section -
Sticking not necessary
15
Cross section -
e
renc 11
Classes 63 to 160 king
refe St
Stic ick
ing
13
re
fer
Air outlet 3 en
ce
11 13 Sticking reference
nce (Upper surface)
e fere
gr
ckin
Sti
14
11
14
Air outlet 2 13
14
St
Sticking not necessary (C ickin
en g
tre refe
re re
fer nc
en e
ce
)
View

Sticking not necessary Sticking not necessary
continuted on back side
J : 1P177350A
322 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Sticking of Insulator to Indoor Unit Main Body
For safety, be sure to shut off power supply before starting the insulator sticking operation, decoration panel mounting operation, and connecting of connectors for swinging.
Precautions If the sticking of insulator is omitted, condensation may occur.

Stick the side insulator plate 16 according to the figure below.
Side insulator plate 16
For a wiring takeoff point with two sections, make a slit on
the side insulator plate 16 as shown in the figure below,
Side insulator plate 16 then route the wiring.

Side insulator plate 16 Side insulator plate 16
Wiring
Wiring
Slit
Wiring takeoff point

Slit
Superimpose the surplus section.

3
Sticking of Absorbent to Panel Horizontal Blade
Perform the operation on soft cloth to prevent damage to the panel.

2 Stick the horizontal blade sealing pad 19 to the backside of the blade. (For both left and right)
Perform sticking for the horizontal blades of all air outlets.
Do not apply force to the horizontal blade. (Application of force may lead to horizontal blade
swing failure.)
According to the figure below, stick the horizontal blade absorbent 17 and 18 as well as the horizontal blade
sealing pad 19 .
(With KDBH55K160, stick the horizontal blade absorbent with matching blade colour.)
Precautions When the sticking of absorbent and sealant is omitted, condensation may occur.
1 Stick the horizontal blade absorbent 17 in line with the blade shape to the front face of the horizontal blade.
Horizontal blade
Horizontal blade absorbent 17

Horizontal blade sealing pad 19
A 19 Sticking reference
Using the base of the rib as a reference, stick without leaving any gap.
Rib
Horizontal blade
Horizontal blade
Front face 3 Stick the horizontal blade absorbent 18 in between the horizontal blade sealing pad 19 .
Backside
A-A cross section

Horizontal blade sealing pad 19 18 Sticking reference
B
B B-B cross section
Field Setting
Depending on the installation status of the indoor unit's main body, the field setting needs to be performed by remote control operation.
Perform the setting by switching among the following three items: "Mode number", "Setting switch number", and "Setting position number".
The setting procedure and operation method are described in "How to perform field setting" attached to the remote control.
(1) Setting by number of air outlets used
While referring to "How to perform field setting" attached to the remote control, perform the setting according to the table
in the right.
Also, when the corner air outlet is blocked with 4-way blow, set the wind direction slightly downward.
[Setting content] (Setting by number of air outlets used)
(Note) When the installation height becomes higher than the standard, the setting by ceiling height in (2) becomes (Number of air outlets used) Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number
necessary.
3-way blow 02
13 (23) 1
(2) Setting by ceiling height 2-way blow 03
For the ceiling height, refer to the guidelines of ceiling height and number of air outlets used, then perform the setting for [Setting content] (Setting for when corner air outlet is blocked with 4-way blow)
each air outlet used according to the table below.
(Wind direction) Mode number Setting position number
(Guidelines of ceiling height and number of air outlets used) Standard 02
13 (23) 4
Number of air outlets used Slightly downward 03
Types 28 to 90 Types 112 to 160 [Setting content] (Setting by ceiling height)
Indoor unit
All-around blow 4-way blow 3-way blow 2-way blow All-around blow 4-way blow 3-way blow 2-way blow Mode number Setting position number
Ceiling height
Standard 2.7m or less 3.1m or less 3.0m or less 3.5m or less 3.2m or less 3.4m or less 3.6m or less 4.2m or less Standard 01
High ceiling 1 3.0m or less 3.4m or less 3.3m or less 3.8m or less 3.6m or less 3.9m or less 4.0m or less 4.2m or less High ceiling 1 13 (23) 0 02
High ceiling 2 3.5m or less 4.0m or less 3.5m or less 4.2m or less 4.5m or less 4.2m or less High ceiling 2 03
Values for ceiling height are provided as reference.
J : 1P191031A
Options 323
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.3 KDBP55H160FA — Panel spacer

KDBP55H160FA Model
KDBP55H160FA
Item
Exterior Fresh White
Outside frame: Resin
Material
Insulation: Polyethylene foam
Fixture : 4 pieces
Screws : 1 set
Accessories
Sealing material : 1 set
Installation manual
· Using the panel spacer in areas of the ceiling
with limited space makes it possible to install
the air conditioner.
· Hides the gap between the decoration panel
and the ceiling.
Dimensions Unit:mm
Hole
J : D3K04626
324 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation
1P136564E
Options 325
FCQ EDAU28-856
1P136564E
326 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.4 KDDP55K160(K) — Fresh air intake kit (chamber type)

KDDP55K160 (without T-shape, without Fan) Model
KDDP55K160
Item
Fresh air intake method Fresh air intake by air conditioning fan
Diameter of connection duct φ150
3
Dimensions Unit:mm
1 Indoor unit main body
Inspection hole o 450 or more
(See note 2)
2 Decoration panel
3 Suction chamber
4 Connecting port chamber (right)
5 Connecting port chamber (left)
Accessories
Screws (M5×12) : 4 pieces
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Tape for fixing sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Installation manual

(See note 2)
How to establish an inspection hole
(Note 7)
Resistance in the passage inside the chamber
Static pressure in the chamber
Note)
1. Maximum length of the duct is 4 meters.
2. When installing this kit, an inspection hole is required (Ceiling opening dimension)
(in order to maintain this kit). Establish an inspection holes on either side.
3. This kit is field assembly.
4. Install the hanging fixing for the T joint. Otherwise the load from T-shape pipe Airflow rate
assembly, etc., could create a gap between the indoor unit and suction chamber.
5. When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification adaptor to
interlock with the indoor unit fan. Indoor unit Mountable Indoor unit models
6. With the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the "H" wind volume of the indoor unit Classes 28 to 90 FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
BYCP125K-W1 SkyAir
is recommended. Classes 112 to 160 F C Q 7 1 K / 1 0 0 K / 1 2 5 K / 1 4 0 K V LT
7. This graph shows values from the inlet of the T joint through that of the
indoor unit when KDDP55K160K (with a T joint) is connected.
JC : D3K05058
Options 327
FCQ EDAU28-856
KDDP55K160K (with T-shape, without Fan) Model

KDDP55K160K
Item
Fresh air intake method Fresh air intake by air conditioning fan
Dimensions Unit:mm

1 Indoor unit main body
(See note 2) 2 Decoration panel
Flexible duct 3 Suction chamber
(Accessory)
4 Connecting port chamber (right)
5 Connecting port chamber (left)
Accessories
Screws (M5×12) : 4 pieces
Sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Tape for fixing sealing materials for air outlets at the corner
Installation manual

(See note 2)
How to establish an inspection hole
(Note 7)
Resistance in the passage inside the chamber
T joint Suction duct
(Accessory) (Accessory)
Plate band (Accessory)
Static pressure in the chamber

Hanging fitting (Field supplied)
(See note 4)
Note)
1. Maximum length of the duct is 4 meters.
2. When installing this kit, an inspection hole is required
(in order to maintain this kit). Establish an inspection
holes on either side. (Ceiling opening dimension)
3. This kit is field assembly. Airflow rate
4. Install the hanging fixing for the T joint. Otherwise the load
from T-shape pipe assembly, etc., could create a gap between
the indoor unit and suction chamber.
5. When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification Indoor unit
Mountable Indoor unit models
adaptor to interlock with the indoor unit fan. BYCP125K-W1
Classes 28 to 90
SkyAir FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
6. With the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the "H" wind volume Classes 112 to 160 F C Q 7 1 K / 1 0 0 K / 1 2 5 K / 1 4 0 K V LT
of the indoor unit is recommended.
7. This graph shows values from the inlet of the T joint through that of the
indoor unit when KDDP55K160K (with a T joint) is connected.
JC : D3K05059
328 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation
Recommendations
Caution After thoroughly reading these "Safety precautions", properly perform the installation.
· This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must always be used. <Round flow>.
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur. · According to the table to the left, check the model name of the indoor unit, then mount the kit.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no abnormality is present. · At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to the
one for the decoration panel.
· When mounting the duct fan, be sure to use the wiring modification adaptor [KRP1C63] to
Combination table
interlock with the indoor unit fan.
Model name Installable indoor unit / Panel model name For the intake wind volume, 10% or less of the indoor unit wind volume of "H" is
recommended.
FCQ(N)71K/100K/125K/140KVEA When the intake wind volume becomes excessive, operation noise may become louder or
SkyAir
FCQ71K/100K/125K/140KVLT the intake temperature detection of the indoor unit may be affected.
· Be sure to mount the supplied sensor assembly.
KDDP55K160 (K)
<For the duct used for field connection, those in the table below are recommended.>
Panel BYCP125K-W1 Name 14 Partition plate
Part name Part number
K-FDS151D (1m)
Flexible duct
(Nominal diameter φ150)
K-FDS152D (2m)
K-FDS153D (3m)
Shape
3
Parts content Check the following parts. (Shaded part is included in a different package.) K-FDS154D (4m) Number KDDP55K160 1
of pieces KDDP55K160K 1
Name 1 Suction chamber 2 Connecting chamber (left) 3 Connecting chamber (right) 4 Corner air outlet 5 Corner air outlet tape for 6 Mounting screw 7 Sensor assembly 8 Clamp 9 Mounting screw 10 T joint 11 Flexible duct 12 Sealing pad 13 Installation manual
sealing material fixing the sealing material (for sensor)
Shape A
M5 × 12 (this document)
Number KDDP55K160 1 1 1 2 2 4 1 2 1 1
of pieces KDDP55K160K 1 1 1 2 2 4 1 2 1 1 2 4 1
Selection of Installation Location and Establishment of Inspection Opening
(1) Refer to the figure below to select the installation location. (2) Establish an inspection opening. Inspection opening ( 450 or more)
(Refer to *2.)
*1 Duct (arrangement at site)
*1. Install the suspension bracket for

the T joint section.
Because of the load from T joint,
Inspection opening
etc., a gap may be created in
Indoor unit main body 455mm (ceiling opening
dimension) between the indoor unit and
suction chamber.
Indoor unit (mm)
*2. Establish an inspection opening ( 450 or more). Inspection opening ( 450 or more)
classes 28 to 90 306 Establish an inspection opening to either side. 725 (Refer to *2.)
BYCP125K-W1
classes 112 to 160 348
Mounting of Sensor Assemblies and Suction Chamber
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with precautions below.
• Shut off power supply before performing operation.
• Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
(For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.)
<Mounting of sensor assembly>
<Mounting of suction chamber>
(1) According to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit main * Figure shows an example where the indoor unit main body is newly
body, remove the cover of the control box. installed.
(2) Using the supplied screws, tighten the sensor assembly together with (1) Stick the corner air outlet tape for fixing the sealing material 5 to
the bell mouth to the indoor unit main body.
the corner air outlet sealing material 4 , then stick it to the air outlet
(Mount without pinching the float switch lead wire.)
(3) Remove the connector (X16A) of the existing sensor from the PC of the indoor unit main body. (2 positions) Figure 1 Figure 2
board of the indoor unit main body. (2) Mount the suction chamber 1 to the indoor unit main body using
(4) Connect the lead wire of the mounted sensor assembly to the the hook (4 positions). Figure 3 to Figure 5
connector (X16A) on the PC board of the indoor unit main body as
For the fixing method of the hook, refer to Figure 4 , then mount at
shown in the figure below.
(5) As shown in the figure below, fix the lead wire using the supplied 4 positions.
clamp. * Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and suction
(6) After all the wiring is completed, fit the control box cover according to chamber match. Figure 4 Figure 6
the installation manual attached to the main body.
(7) Making sure that the control box cover is covered with the partition
plate 14 , tighten these together using the screws on the cover. (Hook
the partition plate tab onto the cover.) Figure 1 Corner air outlet sealing material 4 Figure 3
Fixing screw 9 Release paper Suction chamber 1 To Figure 4
A
Sensor assembly 7 (2) Using the supplied
) Procedure 1
Bell mouth screws, tighten the (12 2
sensor assembly Remove the
together with the bell release paper.
mouth. (5) Tighten with the float switch
(5) Tighten with the lead wire of the indoor unit (12 Hook
)
existing wiring. main body. Tape for fixing the sealing material 5 (4 positions)
(4) Connect the connector of the Clamp 8

mounted sensor assembly. Sensor assembly 7 Procedure 2 Indoor unit
* The figure main body
Stick the sealing material to the tape for
shows SkyAir
fixing the sealing material. (2 pieces)
Partition plate 14
(7) Using screws, tighten the
partition plate together with X16A
Figure 2 For 2 positions Sensor assembly
the control box cover so that Refrigerant piping
|PS<
WHITE
the box cover is covered
with the partition plate. Air outlet Control box cover
Float Indoor unit main body Suspension bracket
Control box cover
switch
(1) Remove the control box (4 positions)
lead wire
cover. (Screws at 2 positions) (3) Disconnect the connector of
the existing sensor. Bell mouth
JC : 3K017588C
Options 329
FCQ EDAU28-856
Figure 4 Mounting status Figure 5 Status after mounting Figure 6 Drawing of mounting at completion
Suction chamber 1 Hook Hook
Hook Suction chamber 1
Indoor unit main body
Suspension bracket
Match the contour
Fixing method of hook
Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket Indoor unit main body
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Suction Chamber
• Install the indoor unit main body and suction chamber.

At the time of installation, perform the engineering work according to the installation
(mm)
manual attached to the indoor unit main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure Suspension bracket
to the right.)
• When mounting the suction chamber to the existing indoor unit main body, change the Indoor unit BYCP125K-W1 180
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right. main body
Mounting of Connecting Chamber and Connection of Flexible Duct

Suction chamber
Ceiling surface
Mount the connecting chamber. (1 piece each for left and right, a total of 2 pieces) Figure 7
(1) Press the square hole area of the connecting chamber 2 ( 3 ) into the hook
section (tab) of the suction chamber 1 . (2 positions)
(2) Using the supplied screws 6 , fix the connecting chamber. (2 positions)
Connecting chamber left (right) 2 ( 3 ) Square hole

(Procedure 1) <How to Tight Sealing Pad>
Screw 6 Press the square hole area of the
connecting chamber 2 ( 3 ) into the (1) (2) (3) (4)
Outside air inlet hook section of suction chamber 1 .
7 Flexible duct
(2 positions each)
Suction chamber 1 Split pin wrong correct
(Procedure 2)
Using the supplied screws 6 , fix the
connecting chamber. (2 positions each)
(1) Wrap the sealing pad (2) Insert the tip of the (3) Using a standard (4) This completes
Figure 7 Mounting of connecting chamber to the position to be band through the tool (driver, pliers, the mounting.
(This figure shows the connecting chamber (left) 2 .) tightened. gap of the split pin, etc.), turn the split
then lightly tighten pin to the direction
by hand. shown in the figure
to tighten the band.
Precautions
Because the split pin has a structure to prevent counter rotation, be careful with the
turning direction. (When a counter rotation is forced, the ratchet will be damaged, and
Drawing of mounting
the tightening force will be weakened.)
at completion
In case of KDDP55K160K
(3) Connect the connecting chamber and T joint. Figure 8 (4) Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit by using screws to
Flexible duct 11 cure the indoor unit.
Connecting chamber (right) 3 (Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.)
T joint 10 (Refer to the figure below.)
Hanging band for duct Installation pattern paper
(Mounting of installation
Duct (field supplied) (field supplied) (Supplied with the indoor unit
pattern paper) main body)
(φ150)
Screw
Sealing pad 12 (Supplied with the indoor unit
Connecting chamber (left) 2 To prevent applying weight to the main body)
connecting chamber, hang the T
Insert the flexible duct joint using the hanging band for • Complete all the refrigerant and drain piping works for the indoor unit main body.
until the base of the the duct.
Figure 8 connecting chamber.
Duct Connection <<Duct: Nominal diameter φ150>>
(1) Connect the duct to the duct connection area. a) Extreme bending b) Multiple bending c) Reduction of connecting duct diameter
(2) Wrap the connection area with vinyl tape, etc., (arrangement at site) to prevent an air leak.
Precautions
• For the duct, be sure to apply the insulation treatment to prevent condensation.
• Do not perform duct manipulations described in the figure to the right.
• Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is
compulsory.
• When a duct goes through fire protection areas including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law, it may be required to establish a damper or to build a
structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
• When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
• Mount the outside duct so that it has a downslope toward the outside, and prevent rainwater from leaking in with a hood, etc. (Gradient of 1/100 to 1/50)
• To prevent the intrusion of small animals, such as birds, and bugs, be sure to attach a netting to sections open to outside air.
• To protect the heat exchanger of the indoor unit, be sure to attach an air filter to sections open to outside air.
Mounting of Decoration Panel
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wiring hole of the suction chamber.
However, when used in combination with the air purifier unit or streamer deodorization unit, perform wiring without routing through the wiring hole.
• Mount the decoration panel according to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.
Suction chamber 1
Wiring hole
Swing motor lead wire: Route from the panel side to the
suction chamber 1 .
With wireless unit
(After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass • For details on connection method, refer to the installation manual
through the wiring hole.) attached to the wireless remote control kit (sold separately).
With an air purifier unit or

streamer deodorization unit Decoration panel
JC : 3K017588C
330 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
KDDP55K160 (without T joint, without fan)
KDDP55K160K (with T joint, without fan)
Options 331
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.5 KDDP55X160 — Fresh air intake kit (direct installation type)

KDDP55X160 Model
KDDP55X160
Item
Material Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet
Insulation material retainer plate : 1
Insulation material : 1 set
Accessories
Mounting screws : 4
Installation manual
Dimensions Unit:mm
124 67
6
φ12
φ 137
φ 98
4− φ 5 Hole (cyclotomic)
J : D3K04240A
332 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation
Precautions This kit can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner.
When using this kit, a duct (nominal diameter: φ100) is required separately.
• Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is compulsory.
• When a duct goes through fire protection areas including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law,
it may be required to establish a damper or to build a structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
• When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
• Mount the outside duct so that it has a downslope toward the outside, and prevent rainwater from leaking in.
(Gradient of 1/100 to 1/50)
• To prevent the intrusion of small animals, such as birds, and bugs, be sure to attach a netting to sections open to
outside air.

3
Name 1 Duct flange 2 Mounting screws 3 Duct flange insulator 4 Main body opening insulator 5 Sealing pad retainer 6 Installation manual
Number of pieces 1 4 1 1 1 1
Shape
M4×12
Tools needed for mounting Phillips-type screwdriver, nippers, and cutter, etc.
Mounting of Duct Flange
1) Cut off the side plate of the indoor unit main body along the dowel hole without damaging
the internal insulator. Figure 1
Piping position
Internal insulator Drain pipe position
Cut off using

Side plate nippers, etc.
Slit Side plate

Figure 1
2) Stick the main body's opening insulator 4 to the opening. Figure 2
Figure 2
Main body opening insulator 4
JC : 2P137676B
Options 333
FCQ EDAU28-856
3) After mounting the duct flange 1 to the opening using the mounting screws 2 (M4×12, 4 pieces),
stick the duct flange insulator 3 . Figure 3
Duct flange 1
Mounting screws 2
(M4×12, 4 pieces)
Duct flange insulator 3 Figure 3
4) Before mounting the decoration panel, remove the insulator, and stick the sealing pad retainer 5 to
the indoor unit drain pan. Figure 4
Figure 4
Sealing pad retainer 5

Insulator Be careful not to
block the air outlet.
Duct Connection 〈〈Duct: Nominal diameter φ100〉〉
1) Connect the duct to the outside of the duct flange. Figure 5

2) After the connection, wrap the connection area with tape (field supplied) to prevent an air leak.
Wrap with tape to prevent an air leak.
Duct flange 1
Figure 5
Tape
φ100 duct (field supplied)
Precautions a) Extreme bending b) Multiple bending c) Reduction of connecting

duct diameter
Perform insulation for all ducts.
Do not perform duct manipulations
shown to the right.
J : 2P137676B
334 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.6 KAFP556H80·160, KAFP557H80·160 — High efficiency filter

(including chamber)
KAFP556H80·160 KAFP557H80·160 Dimensions Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when mounted)
842
842
3
J : D3K04253
Caution Model
KAFP556H80 KAFP556H160 KAFP557H80 KAFP557H160
· Field setting by remote controller is necessary Item
when the high efficiency filter is installed. Material Galvanized sheet iron, foam polystyrene
Initial
pressure loss Pa 34 or less
Final pressure Pa 98 or less

loss
Average
efficiency % 65 (colorimetric method) 90 (colorimetric method)
3
m /min 19 35 19 35
Air flow rate
l/sec 317 583 317 583
2,500 1,800
Life h
(dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3) (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber
Number of sheets
1 1 1 1
included
Installation manual
Accessories
Sealing material : 2
Mass (weight) kg 3.6 4.2 3.6 4.2
Replacement filter
(optional KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160 KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
accessories)
Options 335
FCQ EDAU28-856
Installation
Recommendations
• This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must always <round flow >.
be used. • According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body,
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur. then mount the product.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no abnormality • At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit and to
is present. the installation manual of the decoration panel.

Combination table
Name High efficiency filter unit Sealing pad Installation manual
Model name Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
KAFP556H80 FCQ(N)71KVEA
SkyAir
KAFP557H80 FCQ71KVLT
Shape
KAFP556H160 FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA

SkyAir
KAFP557H160 FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
Number of pieces 1 2 1 (This document)
Panel BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of High Efficiency Filter Unit
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with Figure 1
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation. High efficiency filter
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit's main body.
(For details, refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.) Filter clasp
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed Rotate the filter clasp by 90°
to remove the filter
(1) Remove the high efficiency filter from the chamber. Figure 1 (4 positions)
(2) Mount the high efficiency filter unit to the indoor unit main body using the hooks
(4 positions). Figure 2 to Figure 4
For the fixing method of the hooks, refer to the figure to the right. Mount at 4 positions.
Hook
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber match. Figure 3 Figure 5
Suspension bracket
Figure 2
Fixing method of hooks
High efficiency filter
unit
Figure 3 Mounting status
Figure 4 Status after mounting
High efficiency filter unit
Hook Hook
Indoor unit main body (4 positions)
Match the contour.
Control box cover

Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 5 Drawing of mounting at
completion
High efficiency filter unit
JC : 3K015220E
336 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and High Efficiency Filter Unit
• Install the indoor unit main body and high efficiency filter unit.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual attached
to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to the right.) Suspension bracket
• When mounting the high efficiency filter unit to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right. Indoor unit
main body
(Installation height
guideline)
• Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit using screws to
cure the indoor unit.
(Refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit main body.)
(Refer to the figure below.) High efficiency filter unit
Ceiling surface
Installation pattern paper

(Supplied with indoor unit main body)
(mm)
3
BYCP125K-W1 180
M4×12 Screws
[Mounting of installation pattern paper]
• Complete all the refrigerant and drain piping work for the indoor unit main body.
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of High Efficiency Filter
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of
the high efficiency filter unit.
Sealing pad (supplied): For preventing air bypass

High efficiency Figure 6 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
filter chamber
Wire through hole
Swing motor lead wire:

Route from the panel side to
the high efficiency filter chamber. Decoration panel
(After temporarily hooking High efficiency

the decoration panel, filter unit
pass through the wire through hole.)
Decoration panel
Rotate the filter clasp by 90˚ to
• Mounting of high efficiency filter fix the filter.
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the high efficiency (4 positions)
filter. Figure 6 Figure 7
Filter clasp
With wireless unit Figure 7 High efficiency filter
• Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor PC board ass'y.
• For details on the connection method, refer to the installation manual attached to the wireless remote control kit (sold separately).
Preparation of Indoor Unit
• With the mounting of a high efficiency filter unit, setting the indoor unit main Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number Remarks
body is required.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting 0 02 80 only
position number as shown in the table to the right. 13 or 23
1 02 Both 80 and 160
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field setting" attached to
the remote control.
JC : 3K015220E
Options 337
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.7 KAFP552H80·160, KAFP553H80·160 — Replacement high efficiency filter

KAFP552H80·160 KAFP553H80·160 Dimensions Unit:mm
Model A
560 KAFP552H80 · KAFP553H80 25
KAFP552H160 · KAFP553H160 45
560
0
10 540 -2 10
A
J : D3K04256A
· Cannot be water-washed for reuse. Model

KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160 KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
· The filter chamber (KDDFP55H160) is required Item
when the high efficiency filter will be installed. Initial
Pa 34 or less
pressure loss
Final pressure
Pa 98 or less
loss
Average
efficiency % 65 (colorimetric method) 90 (colorimetric method)
3
m /min 19 35 19 35
Air flow rate
l/sec 317 583 317 583
Life h 2,500 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3) 1,800 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element Non-woven fabric of synthetic fiber
Number of sheets
included 1 1 1 1
Mass (weight) kg 0.6 1.2 0.6 1.2
338 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.8 KDDFP55H160 — High efficiency filter chamber

KDDFP55H160 Dimensions Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when attached)

842
842
3
J : D3K04252
Model
KDDFP55H160
Item
High efficiency 65% (colorimetric method) KAFP552H80 KAFP552H160
Inserted filter
filter 90% (colorimetric method) KAFP553H80 KAFP553H160
Ultra long-life filter KAFP55H160H
Galvanized sheet iron,
Material foam polystyrene
Installation manual
Accessories Sealing pad : 2
Options 339
FCQ EDAU28-856
Installation
Recommendations
Caution After thoroughly reading these "Safety Precautions", properly perform the installation.
• This product can be mounted to ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must <round flow>.
always be used.
• According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body, then
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no mount the product.
abnormality is present. • At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to
the one for the decoration panel.
Recommendations (When using ultra-long life filter)
Combination table
The ultra-long life filter can be reused after cleaning.
Model name High efficiency filter Ultra-long life filter Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
After engineering work is completed, provide instructions to the customer about
the filter cleaning interval and how to remove the filter. KAFP552H80 FCQ(N)71KVEA
Or SkyAir
Parts content Check the following parts. KAFP553H80 FCQ71KVLT
Name Filter chamber Sealing pad Installation manual KAFP55H160H

KDDFP KAFP552H160
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA
55H160 Or SkyAir
FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
KAFP553H160
Shape Panel BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of Filter Chamber
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation. Hook
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed
(1) Mount the filter chamber to the indoor unit main body using the hooks (4 positions).
Suspension bracket
Figure 1 to Figure 3
Fixing method of hooks
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber are match. Figure 2 Figure 4
Figure 1 Figure 2 Mounting status Figure 3 Status after mounting

Filter chamber
Filter chamber
Hook
Hook
Match the contour
Suspension bracket
Lead wire
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Drawing of mounting at
Figure 4
completion
Filter chamber
JC : 3K015219E
340 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Filter Chamber
• Install the indoor unit main body and filter chamber.

At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual
attached to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to
the right.)
Suspension bracket
• When mounting the filter chamber to the existing indoor unit main body, change the
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right.
Indoor unit
• Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit using screws main body
to cure the indoor unit. (Installation height
(Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.) guideline)
(Refer to the figure below.)
Installation pattern paper Filter chamber

Ceiling surface
3
(mm)
BYCP125K-W1 180
M4 × 12 screws
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of Filter Chamber
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of the filter chamber.
Figure 5 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Filter chamber
Wire through hole
Decoration panel

Route from the panel side to the Filter chamber
filter chamber.
(After temporarily hooking the
decoration panel, pass through
the wire through hole.) Rotate the filter clasp by 90˚
to fix the filter.
(2 positions)
Decoration panel
Filter clasp
• Mounting of filter
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the filter.
Figure 5 Figure 6
Before mounting each filter to the chamber,
cut off at the perforation (2 positions).
Filters
With wireless unit Figure 6
• Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor PC board assembly.
• Depending on the types of mounting filters, setting the Filter name Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number Filter sign display interval time
indoor unit main body is may be required. High 80 only 0 02
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch performance 13 or 23
Both 80 and 160 1 02
to the setting position number shown in the table to the right. filter
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field Where there is minimal fouling
01 Approximately every 10,000 hours
setting" attached to the remote control. (Example: Office, etc.)
0
Ultra-long life filter 10 or 20 Where there is considerable fouling
(Example: Pachinko parlor, etc.)
1 02 Initial setting for ultra-long life filter
JC : 3K015219E
Options 341
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.9 KAFP551K160 — Replacement long-life filter

KAFP551K160 Dimensions Unit:mm
535.5 2310
9
6 3.5
552.5
492.5
>PS<
6 3.5
9
Square hole (both sides)
J : D3K05114
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused. Model

KAFP551K160
Item
Initial pressure loss Pa 4.9 or less
Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less
Average efficiency % 60 (gravity method)
m3/min 18
Air flow rate
l/sec 300
Life h 5,000 (dust concentration 0.15 mg/m3)
Filter element Mould-proof and antibacterial resin net
Number of sheets included 1
342 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.10 KAFP55H160 — Ultra long-life filter unit (including chamber)

KAFP55H160 Dimensions Unit:mm
50 (dimensions when attached)

842
12
842
3
J : D3K04254
Caution Model
KAFP55H160
· In order to mount a ultra long life filter unit, Item
setting of the main unit of indoor unit should Material Galvanized steel iron, foam polystyrene
be made. Initial pressure loss Pa 8 or less

· Individual filter (KAFP55H160H) is available Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less
as an optional accessory. Average efficiency % 50 (gravity method)
m3/min 29.5
Air flow rate
l/sec 492
Mounting locations Filter cleaning period Life h 5,000 (dust concentration 0.3 mg/m3)
Filter element Polypropylene honeycomb (with mould-proof)
Locations with much Approximately every
dust 5,000 hours Number of sheets included 1
Locations with little dust Approximately every Installation manual
Accessories
(e.g. offices) 10,000 hours Sealing pad : 2
Options 343
FCQ EDAU28-856
Installation
Recommendations
• This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner
• For the installation parts, accessory parts and specified components must <Round flow>.
always be used. • According to the table below, check the model name of the indoor unit main body, then
If the specified components are not used, the kit may fall or an air leak may occur. mount the product.
• After the completion of installation, perform a test run to check that no • At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and to
abnormality is present. the one for the decoration panel.
Recommendations
The ultra-long life filter can be reused after cleaning.
Combination table
After the engineering works are completed, provide instructions to the customer
about the filter cleaning interval and how to remove the filter. Model name Installable indoor unit model name / Panel model name
Name Ultra-long life filter unit Sealing pad Installation manual FCQ(N)71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVEA
KAFP55H160 SkyAir
FCQ71K / 100K / 125K / 140KVLT
Shape
Panel BYCP125K-W1
Mounting of Ultra-Long Life Filter Unit
* When the indoor unit main body is already installed, perform the following operations, complying with Figure 1
precautions below.
Shut off power supply before performing the operation. Ultra-long life filter
Remove the decoration panel from the indoor unit main body.
Filter clasp
* When the indoor unit main body is newly installed
Rotate the filter clasp by
90˚ to remove the filter
(1) Remove the ultra-long life filter from the chamber. Figure 1 (4 positions)
(2) Mount the ultra-long life filter unit to the indoor unit main body using the hooks (4 positions).
Figure 2 to Figure 4
Hook
* Mount so that the contours of the indoor unit main body and chamber match. Figure 3 Figure 5
Suspension bracket
Figure 2 Fixing method of hooks
Ultra-long life filter unit Figure 3 Mounting status
Figure 4 Status after mounting

Ultra-long life filter unit
Hook Hook
Match the contour.

Control box cover
Suspension bracket
Suspension bracket
(4 positions)
Refrigerant piping
Figure 5 : Drawing of mounting at completion
Ultra-long life filter unit
JC : 3K015221D
344 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation of Indoor Unit Main Body and Ultra-Long Life Filter Unit
• Install the indoor unit main body and ultra-long life filter unit.
At the time of installation, perform engineering work according to the installation manual
attached to the air conditioner's main body. (For the installation height, refer to the figure to Suspension bracket
the right.)
• When mounting the ultra-long life filter unit to the existing indoor unit main body, change the Indoor unit
installation height of the indoor unit main body to height in the figure to the right. main body
(Installation height
guideline)
• Mount the supplied installation pattern paper to the indoor unit by using screws
to cure the indoor unit.
(Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit main body.) Ultra-long life filter unit
Ceiling surface
(Refer to the figure below.)
(mm)
Installation pattern paper

BYCP125K-W1 180 3
M4 × 12 Screw
Mounting of Decoration Panel and Mounting of Ultra-Long Life Filter
• After temporarily hooking the decoration panel, pass the swing motor lead wire, which is coming out from the decoration panel, through the wire through hole of the ultra-long
life filter unit.

Figure 6 (Stick to 2 positions in the same manner.)
Ultra-long life filter chamber
Wire through hole

Decoration panel
Route from the panel side to the
ultra-long life filter chamber.
(After temporarily hooking the
decoration panel, pass through
the wire through hole.) Ultra-long life filter unit
Decoration panel Rotate the filter clasp by 90˚

to fix the filter.
• Mounting of ultra-long life filter (4 positions)
After the completion of wiring and sticking of sealing pad (2 positions), mount the
ultra-long life filter. Figure 6 Figure 7 Filter clasp
Figure 7 Ultra-long life filter

With wireless unit
• Route the connector of the receiver lead wire through the wire through hole, then connect the connector on the indoor printed circuit board assembly.
• With the mounting of a ultra-long life filter unit, setting the indoor unit main Mode number Setting switch number Setting position Number Filter sign display interval time
body is required.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting Where there is minimal fouling
position number shown in the table to the right. (Example: Office, etc.)
0
For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field setting" attached 10 or 20 Where there is considerable fouling
to the remote control. 02 Approximately every 5,000 hours
(Example: Pachinko parlor, etc.)
1 02 Initial setting for ultra-long life filter
JC : 3K015221D
Options 345
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.11 KAFP55H160H — Replacement ultra long-life filter

KAFP55H160H Dimensions Unit:mm
10
536-20
10
12
10 10
12 536 -20 12
60
12.5
J : D3K04257
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused. Model

KAFP55H160H
· The filter chamber (KDDFP55H160) is Item
required when the ultra long life filter will be Initial pressure loss Pa 8 or less
installed. Final pressure loss Pa 49 or less

Average efficiency % 50 (gravity method)
m3/min 29.5
Air flow rate
l/sec 492
Filter element Mould-proof resin net
Number of sheets included 1
346 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.12 KKSJ55K160 — Chamber connection kit

KKSJ55K160 Dimensions Unit:mm
Vinyl tube
J : D3K2186
Installation
3
F H (Y) C ~ K V E , F H C ~ N U V 2 S , ~ K V 2 S
C : 3P089651D
Options 347
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.13 KDJP55H80·160 — Branch duct chamber

KDJP55H80·160 Model
KDJP55H80 KDJP55H160
Item
Hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet

Material
(with insulation)
Mounting screws : 10
Blocking pad : 2
Tape for fixing the blocking pad : 2
Accessories
Opening sealing material : 1 set
Insulation material : 1 set
Installation manual
Caution
1. When mounting, refer to the installation manuals for the indoor unit and the
decoration panel.
Dimensions Unit:mm
KDJP55H80 KDJP55H160
208
256
382
382 366 232
366 200 177
232
200 176
106
77
179
167
φ206
φ198
240
121
109
φ156
φ148
190
11
15
6-6 × 10 6-6 × 10
oblong holes oblong holes
4-φ6 holes 4-φ6 holes
J : D3K04231 J : D3K04232
348 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation
Precautions Combination table

• This product can be mounted to a ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner <round flow>. Model name Installable indoor unit model name
According to the table to the right, check the model name of the indoor unit, then mount the product.
• At the time of mounting, also refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit main body and to the
one for the decoration panel.
FCQ(N)71KVEA
• For the duct (field supplied) to be connected, those specified in the table to the right are recommended. KDJP55H80 SkyAir
FCQ71KVLT
Name Branch duct chamber Mounting screw Installation manual Sealing material Tape for fixing the sealing material
FCQ(N)100K/125K/140KVEA
KDJP55H160 SkyAir
Shape/ FCQ100K/125K/140KVLT
Number
M4×16
Number 80
of pieces 160 1 10 1 2 2
Name Main body insulator Main body opening sealant Recommended duct
Shape/
1 2 3 4 5A 5B
Branch duct chamber Connecting duct kit name 3
Number KDJP55H80 K-FDK151B (1 m) or K-FDK152B (2 m) (Flexible duct: Nominal diameter of φ150)
(Small) (Large)
Number 80 2 ——
KDJP55H160 K-FDK201B (1 m) or K-FDK202B (2 m) (Flexible duct: Nominal diameter of φ200)
of pieces 160 1 1 2 2
1 1
Preparation Before Installation With this branch duct, an independent 4-way and simultaneous 2-branch drawing are also possible.
• With this branch duct chamber, the blow directions shown in the
1-way branching, main body 3-direction blow Branch
figure to the right can be selected.
Select the blow direction that is most appropriate for the room Closed Closed
shape and installation position. (Blow directions other than those Closed Drain side
Branch
in the figure to the right cannot be selected.)
• From the external static pressure/air volume characteristics (refer
to the technical guide), select the duct length and air outlet.
Precautions Branch
Piping side Closed
• Be sure to securely block the air outlet of the indoor unit main
body to which the branch duct chamber is mounted. If the Branch
blocking is incomplete, water spraying or condensation may
occur. Do not block the corner sections. 1-way branching, main body 2-direction blow
(Refer to Mounting of Sealing Material to Indoor Unit .) Closed Closed Closed
• When mounting the branch duct chamber, be sure to perform field
setting of the indoor unit main body.
(Refer to Field Setting .)
Branching to
Branching to Closed either side
either side
2-way branching, main body 2-direction blow Another branch duct chamber set is necessary.
Closed Closed Closed
Closed Branch
Branch
Mounting of Branch Duct Chamber
When an installation is performed after mounting the branch duct chamber to the indoor unit main body Face 3
(at new installation), do not apply force to the branch duct chamber. (Deformation may occur.) Face 4 Face 2
(1) Select the position where the branch duct chamber is mounted.
(2) Mount the branch duct chamber to the indoor unit according to the following procedure. ( Figure 2 is an Face 3 Face 2
example of the face 1 side.)
1) Along the slit, cut the side plate of the indoor unit to which the branch duct chamber is mounted. Then,
cut the internal insulator along the groove. Figure 1
(Use nippers, etc., to cut the slit section, and cutter, etc., to cut the groove section.) Figure 2 Face 1
Internal insulator
For the port opening operation, do not use a tool that produces chips, such as a saw. The drain system may become clogged, and a water
leak may occur. Side plate
2) Use the sealant for sticking so that the gaps between the side plate and internal insulator are filled around the full circumference. Figure 3
• First, stick the main body's opening sealant 4 to left and right of the opening, and the main body's opening sealant 5A ( 5B ) to the upper and lower sides of Face 4
the opening.
At this time, fold the main body opening sealant towards the inside so that the gap between the side plate and internal insulator is no longer visible. Figure 2 Face 1
Main body opening sealant Main body opening sealant 4 Side plate slit (Internal insulator groove)
5A ( 5B )
( )
Stick without leaving
Internal
any gap against the main insulator Side plate Opening
(Top plate side)
body's opening sealant
Main body opening sealant 5A ( 5B )
Main body opening sealant 4 5A ( 5B ).
Internal
insulator
Stick so that the gap between
( )
Stick without leaving the side plate and internal
any gap against the main insulator are filled around the
body's opening sealant Main body opening sealant 5A Figure 3 Sectional View full circumference.
5A ( 5B ).
JC : 1P137894D
Options 349
FCQ EDAU28-856
3) Mount the branch duct chamber. Figure 4

Indoor unit Mount so that the flat face becomes
the top plate side of the indoor unit.
Branch duct chamber
Mounting screw, 10 pieces

(M4×16)
Figure 4
(3) Stick the main body insulator to the indoor unit. (The figure is an example of the face 1 side) Figure 5
Main body insulator 1
Stick with the end folded.
Stick with the left sides of
the main body insulators Main body insulator 2
1 , 2 , and 3 aligned.
Stick with the end folded.
Create a slit to the wiring hole using a cutter, etc..
Main body insulator 3
Be sure to stick the main body insulator from the top of the branch duct Stick with the end folded.
chamber flange (sheet metal section). Otherwise, condensation may occur. Figure 5 Main body insulator 3
KDJP55H80 ... Nominal diameter of φ150

Duct Connection <<Duct: KDJP55H160 ... Nominal diameter of φ200>>
1) Connect the duct to the outside of the branch duct chamber. Figure 6 Tape Wrap with tape to prevent
• After the connection, wrap the connection area with tape (field supplied) Branch duct chamber an air leak.
to prevent an air leak.
• Apply insulation for all the ducts.
main body
Indoor unit
2) Do not perform duct manipulation described below.
a) Extreme bending b) Multiple bending c) Reduction of connecting
duct diameter Duct of φ150 or φ200
(field supplied)
Figure 6
1. Beware that, in accordance with the local law, there may be cases where the use of a nonflammable duct is compulsory.
2. When a duct goes through fire protection areas, including a fire proof structure, beware that, in accordance with the local law, it may
be required to establish a damper or to build a structure that is not detrimental to fire protection.
3. When penetrating a wooden construction wall with a metal duct, apply electrical insulation to the duct and wall.
Mounting of Sealing Material to Indoor Unit <<With the sealing material supplied in this kit, blocking of two openings can be performed.>>
• For the block position, refer to Preparation Before Installation , then determine the position. Always block the branch duct mounting surface.
Closed 3 3 3 3
Air outlet 2
Air outlet 3 Closed
Closed
3-way blow 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4
Closed
1 1 1 1
3 Closed 3
Drain side
Closed Closed
Air outlet 1 Air outlet 3 2-way blow 2 4 2 4
Closed
Piping side 1 1
(1) Matching the longitudinal air outlets numbered from 1 to 4 to be blocked, prepare the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material. (2) Stick the sealing material that was prepared in (1) to
• Cut both the sealing material and tape for fixing the sealing material along the perforation (dotted line). the air outlet of the indoor unit main body.
• Stick the sealing material to the tape for fixing the sealing material.
(Stick so that the sealing material is at the centre of the tape for fixing the sealing material.) Indoor unit main body
Example) When blocking air outlet 2 or 3
Sealing material
<Sealing material preparation>
2
4 · Procedure 1
Procedure 2 3
Remove the Cut off.
release paper.
3 Precautions
Procedure 3 The sealing material has a directional
Stick the sealing material so that property. Be sure to stick the sealing
Release paper it is at the centre of the tape for material to the tape for fixing the sealing Air outlet 1
Tape for fixing the sealing material
fixing the sealing material. material so that the printed number of the
outlet to be blocked becomes visible. <Mounting to air outlet>
∗ When blocking the air outlet 1 , sealing material preparation is not necessary.
For safety, be sure to shut off power supply before starting the decoration
Mounting of Decoration Panel panel mounting operation and connecting the connectors for swinging.
Refer to the installation manual attached to the decoration panel.

After mounting the decoration panel, check that no gap is present between the decoration panel and the unit's main body.
Field Setting
• When mounting the branch duct chamber, setting the indoor unit main body is required. Branch blow pattern Mode number Setting switch number Setting position number
After all the engineering work is completed, perform setting together with field setting of 1-way branching,
3-direction blow 02
the indoor unit.
Using the field setting mode on the remote control, switch to the setting position number 1-way branching and 2-way blow 13 or 23 1
shown in the table to the right. For the field setting mode, refer to "How to perform field or 03
setting" attached to the remote control. 2-way branching and 2-way blow
JC : 1P137894D
350 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.14 KDTP55K80·160 — Insulation kit for high humidity

KDTP55K80 Dimensions Unit:mm
Model AA AB
KDTP55K80 245 157
KDTP55K160 287 186
Top panel insulation (1) (t10) ×1 Side panel insulation (1) (t10) ×1
862
778±1
slit
144
AA
Top panel insulation (2) (t10) ×1
862
slit
3
Side panel insulation (2) (t10) ×1
765±1
574
AA
AB
perforation
Top panel insulation (3) (t10) ×1 Side panel insulation (3) (t10) ×1
862 769±1
slit
144
AA
slit
Insulation for decoration panel (t5) ×4 Side panel insulation (4) (t10) ×1
900 772±1
AA
34
2-hole
J : D3K05113
Model
KDTP55K80 KDTP55K160
Item
Polyethylene foam
Material
(with adhesive on the reverse side)
Applicable ambient temperature 40°CDB, RH85%
Insulation for hanger bracket : 4
Accessories
Installation manual
Options 351
FCQ EDAU28-856
Installation
Precautions
This kit can be mounted to an ceiling mounted cassette-type air conditioner <round flow>.
According to the chart below, check the model name of indoor unit, then mount the kit.
This kit cannot be used for the mounting of humidifier and branch duct.
Combination table
Model name Installable indoor unit model name
FCQ(N)71KVEA
KDTP55K80 SkyAir
FCQ71KVLT
FCQ(N)100K / 125K / 140KVEA

KDTP55K160 SkyAir
FCQ100K / 125K / 140KVLT
Parts content
Name 1 Side insulator plate (1) 2 Side insulator plate (2) 3 Side insulator plate (3) 4 Side insulator plate (4) 5 Top insulator plate (1)
778mm 80 A=245mm 765mm 80 A=245mm 769mm 80 A=245mm 772mm 80 A=245mm
160 A=287mm 160 A=287mm 160 A=287mm 160 A=287mm
Shape
A
A
Slit Slit
Number of pieces 1 1 1 1 1
Name 6 Top insulator plate (2) 7 Top insulator plate (3) 8 suspension bracket insulator 9 Panel insulator Others
Shape
· This manual
Number of pieces 1 1 4 4
Sticking Procedure Perform the work on soft cloth to prevent damage to the indoor unit and panel.
<Procedure>
(1) According to the sticking procedure for the side insulator plate, stick the side insulator plates (1 to 4) in sequential 6 Top insulator plate (2) 5 Top insulator plate (1)
order without leaving any gap in between. (Figure 1)
(When mounting the fresh air intake kit (KDDP55X160), cut off the side insulator plate (2) with a knife along the
perforation. The cut-off insulator is no longer needed.)
(2) Stick the top insulator plates (1 to 3) without leaving any gap in between. Also, stick the top insulator plates without
leaving any gap against the side insulator plates all the way around. (Figure 2)
(3) Hang the product.
(4) Stick the suspension bracket insulator to the suspension bracket together with the washer and bolt. (Figure 3)
(5) Lastly, stick the panel insulator to the backside of the panel. (Figure 4)
2 Side insulator plate (2) 7 Top insulator plate (3)

3 Side insulator plate (3) Slit
* Fresh air intake kit

When mounting (KDDP55X160), cut off
the insulator along the perforation.
Slit
(Figure 2)
Perforation
Suspension bracket
(4 points)
8 Suspension bracket insulator

4 Side insulator plate (4)
Slit 1 Side insulator plate (1)
Sticking reference for
2 side insulator plate (2)
side insulator plate (3) Suspension bracket (Figure 3)
(4 points)
9 Panel insulator
At the suspension bracket section, At the suspension bracket section, * After hanging the product, stick the
the slit must be passed through. the slit must be passed through. suspension bracket insulator.
Match these corners

1 before sticking.
3
side insulator plate (1)
side insulator plate (4)
4
Sticking procedure for side insulator plate Panel insulator
(Figure 4)
(Figure 1)
JC : 3P179341B
352 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3.15 KRP1H98 — Installation box for adaptor PCB

Model
KRP1H98
Item
Adaptor for wiring KRP1C63

KRP4AA53
Clamp : 2, code sticker : 6
Screws for adaptor box cover : 1, Installation manual
Accessories Wire clamp material : 8
Mounting screws : 3
Earth wire (length 1060m) : 1
Dimensions Unit:mm
Adaptor box Adaptor box cover 3
hole
hole
hole
Fixture
hole hole
hole
hole
hole
J : D3K4202
Options 353
FCQ EDAU28-856
Installation
2P196605A
354 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
2P196605A
Options 355
FCQ EDAU28-856
2P196606A
356 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
2P196606A
Options 357
FCQ EDAU28-856
3.16 KRCS01-4B — Remote sensor (for indoor temperature)

Model
KRCS01-1B KRCS01-4B
Item
Length of branch wiring m 12
Appearance Light ivory (with the Daikin logo)
Box material ABS resin
Dimensions mm W50 × H60 × D15
Remote sensor. Extension cord (12m). Screws.
Component parts
Clamps. Installation manual.
Caution
· Select a location for the sensor where it can detect the average temperature.
Avoid the following locations.
· Recommended for ceiling suspension and 1. Locations in direct sunlight.
ceiling-embedded types which often result in a 2. Locations where the outlet air from the air conditioner is directed.
difference between set temperature and actual 3. Locations close to other heat sources.
temperature. 4. Locations near doors which might be affected by air coming in.
· The sensor for detecting the temperature can
be placed away from the indoor air conditioner.
(Branch wiring is included in the kit.)
358 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
Installation
3K019189A
Options 359
FCQ EDAU28-856
3K019189A
360 Options
EDAU28-856 FCQ
3K019189A
Options 361
FFQ EDAU28-856
4. FFQ
4.1 BYFQ60B7W1 — Decoration panel
Installation
1 2
2
1
±45°
1 2
3
4 5
2
1
1 2
1 3 2
3 4 5
6~8 mm
7
1
2
4 5 2 3
6 7
8
1 3 4 5 6 7
4PW19171-1
362 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
BYFQ60B7W1 Decoration panel Installation manual
Preparing the decoration panel for installation

Read this manual attentively before installation. Do not
throw it away. Keep it in your files for future reference. 1 Remove the suction grille from the decoration panel.
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or ■ Push the suction grille lever in the direction of the arrow and
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit, open the grille. (See figure 1)
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Be sure only ■ Detach the suction grille from the decoration panel by lifting
to use accessories made by Daikin that are specifically the grille up approximately 45 degrees so the grille can be
designed for the use with the equipment and have them removed. (See figure 2)
installed by a professional.
If unsure of installation procedures or use, always contact
3
your dealer for advice and information.
INSTALLATION OF THE DECORATION PANEL TO
THE INDOOR UNIT
BEFORE INSTALLATION Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit for details on
installing the indoor unit.
■ Leave the unit inside its packaging until you reach the
installation site. 1 Hold the decoration panel against the indoor unit by matching
■ Refer to the warning symbols on the unit. the piping side and drain side marks on the decoration panel
with the position of the piping section and drain section of the
Rotary fan indoor unit.
2 Install the decoration panel.

Cut off the main power before opening the grille.
1 Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire does not come
out of the groove for routing the wire inside the indoor unit (3
■ Refer to the installation manual of the indoor unit for items not
locations). If it has, put it back in. (Connecting the decoration
described in this manual.
panel with the wire out of the groove may cause water
NOTE To the installer leakage.)
Be sure to instruct the customer how to properly

2 Provisionally tighten the 2 supplied screws approximately
operate the system showing him or her the 5 mm into the indoor unit at the side opposite the switch box.
operation manual of the indoor unit. (See figure 3)
Accessories 1 Supplied screws

2 Groove for wire routing
3 Switch box
Installation manual
3 Slide the panel in the direction of the arrow, matching the

2 attachment holes ( ) over the provisionally tightened
Screws (4x) screws. (See figure 4)
4 Turn the decoration panel lever at the side of the indoor unit
switch box over the hook located on that switch box. (See
figure 5)
PREPARATION BEFORE INSTALLATION
For this unit, you are able to select air flow directions. To discharge air 1 Lever
in 2 or 3 directions, it is necessary to purchase the optional blocking 2 Switch box
pad kit.
3 Hook
Handling of the decoration panel 5 Attach the remaining screws and tighten all 4 screws until
To prevent any damage to the decoration panel, take care of the the thickness of the sealing material between the decoration
following: panel and the indoor unit is reduced to 6~8 mm. (See
- Never place the panel with the front facing down. figure 6)
- Never let the panel lean against a wall.
- Never put it down on a projecting object. 1 Indoor unit
- Never touch or put pressure on the swing flap in order to 2 Ceiling
prevent malfunction of the swing flap.
3 Sealing material
4 Decoration panel
5 Air outlet
BYFQ60B7W1 Installation manual

Decoration panel
4PW19171-1 1
Options 363
FFQ EDAU28-856
Precautions
■ Improper tightening of the screws (see figure 7) may cause
air to leak into the unit and air to escape between the ceiling
and the decoration panel (1), resulting in contamination (2)
and dew formation (3).
■ If there is a gap remaining between the ceiling and the
decoration panel after tightening the screws, re-adjust the
indoor unit body height.
3 Wiring of the decoration panel (See figure 8)
1 Screws (2)
2 Switch box
3 Swing flap motor lead wire
4 Hang the swing flap motor lead wire on this tab
5 Connector of the decoration panel swing flap motor
6 Connector of the indoor unit
7 Clamp
Pass the swing flap motor lead wire through the clamp as
shown. After connection, store the connector inside the
switch box.
1 Remove the switch box cover after making sure that the
power to the unit is off.
2 Connect the connectors of the swing flap motor lead wire.
3 Put the switch box cover back in place and fix it with the 2
screws again.
■ If the connectors are not connected properly, the

swing flap will not work.
■ Make sure that the swing flap motor lead wire is
not caught between the indoor unit and the
decoration panel.
INSTALLATION OF THE SUCTION GRILLE

Install the suction grille by reversing the procedure shown in
"Preparing the decoration panel for installation" on page 1.
■ The suction grille may be installed in 4 directions by simply
turning it 90 degrees.
■ Change the direction when adjusting the direction of the suction
grille of multiple units or to comply with the demands of the
customer.
NOTE Be careful not to get the swing flap motor lead wire get
caught when installing the suction grille.
Installation manual BYFQ60B7W1

2 Decoration panel
4PW19171-1
364 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
4.2 KDBHQ44B60 — Sealing member of air discharge outlet
Installation
1P109292B
Options 365
FFQ EDAU28-856
1P109292B
366 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
4.3 KDBQ44B60 — Panel spacer

Model
KDBQ44B60
Item
Applicable decoration panel BYFQ60B7W1
Exterior White
Outside frame: Resin
Material
Insulation: Foam polyethylene
Panel spacer. Insulation. Sealant.
Component Parts
Mounting screws. Installation manual.
· Using the panel spacer in areas of the ceiling with 3

limited space makes it possible to install the air
conditioner.
· Hides the gap between the decoration panel and
the ceiling.
Dimensions Installation Unit:mm

700
654 43
654
700
Ceiling surface
Panel spacer
4-φ5 Hole
Options 367
FFQ EDAU28-856
Installation
1P107764C
368 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
1P107764C
Options 369
FFQ EDAU28-856
4.4 KAFQ441B60 — Replacement long-life filter
2P100214B
370 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
4.5 KDDQ44X60 — Fresh air intake kit (direct installation type)

Installation
2P108307A
Options 371
FFQ EDAU28-856
2P108307A
372 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
4.6 DTA112BA51 — Interface adaptor for SkyAir series

Installation
1P107904C
Options 373
FFQ EDAU28-856
1P107904C
374 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
4.7 KRP1BA101 — Installation box for adaptor PCB

KRP1BA101 Model
KRP1BA101
Item
Adaptor for wiring KRP1BA57

KRP4AA53
Clamp material : 3
Accessories Mounting screws : 5
Code sticker : 3
Installation manual
3
Dimensions Unit:mm
Adaptor box Adaptor box cover
hole hole
Insulation
hole
hole
hole
J : D3K05389
Options 375
FFQ EDAU28-856
Installation
1P107687C
376 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
1P107687C
Options 377
FFQ EDAU28-856
1P133507
378 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
1P133507
Options 379
FFQ EDAU28-856

Model
KRCS01-1B KRCS01-4B
Item
Component parts
Caution
380 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
Installation
3K019189A
Options 381
FFQ EDAU28-856
3K019189A
382 Options
EDAU28-856 FFQ
3K019189A
Options 383
FHQ EDAU28-856
5. FHQ
5.1 KDU50N60VE / KDU50N125VE — Drain-up kit
KDU50N60VE Model
KDU50N125VE KDU50N60VE KDU50N125VE
Item
Drain-up lift mm 600
Drain Con. diameter VP20 (Ex. dia. φ 26, Int. dia. φ 20)
Single phase 220-240V/220V 50/60Hz
Power supply
Pump (from Indoor Unit PC Board)
Power consumption W 13.5/12 (50/60Hz)
Dimensions Unit:mm
Float switch transmission wiring Float switch

Drain outlet
Drain pump
(VP20)
Drain pump
transmission
115
wiring
167
140
149
34 173
227
J : D3K03613A
384 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
Installation
SkyAir FHQ35·50·60BVVIB
3
SkyAir FHQ71·100·125BVVIB
C : 3K012642A
Options 385
FHQ EDAU28-856
1 Preparations before hanging the indoor unit

The drain up kit is installed after the air conditioner main unit is hung. Preparations are required before hanging the air conditioner. At least 60 mm
(Installation service space)
Mounting space
Select the place for the indoor unit to be installed in consideration of the installation service space.
Note, however, that there must be at least 60 mm of service space to the right of the indoor unit main unit.
See the installation manual attached to the indoor unit for the service space for the indoor unit. Figure 2
Figure 2
(1) Select the position of the pipe outtake, the drain pipe outtake, and the wiring outtake, A (Dimension of the main unit)
and make holes in those positions. B (Hanging pitch)
The locations are displayed on the installation pattern paper attached to the indoor unit, C
so use the paper pattern. Figure 3 D
(2) Perform the refrigerant and drain piping work following the installation manual attached
160
185
85
E
to the indoor unit.
Field drain piping should be as short as possible and with a downward slope (1/25 – 1/100)
680 (Dimension of the main unit)
210
to prevent air pockets. Figure 4
Be sure to insulate all drainpipes which run above the ceiling.
(Hanging pitch)
260
(Seen from above) Position for connecting
upward drain hose
Be sure to fix the field drain pipe to the support brackets in the ceiling. Figure 4 Position for connecting
upward gas pipe
(3) Connect the attached piping 6 and the field refrigerant piping. Position for connecting
upward liquid pipe
For the attached pipes 6 , select the liquid and gas pipes which match the pipe diameters
Eyebolt
of the corresponding indoor unit. (4)
Outlet
When connecting the flare nuts, refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
(4) Wrap the insulation pipe cover attached to the indoor unit and fasten with the clamp material 5 . Model (FHQ~) A B C D E
(For both gas and liquid pipes.) Figure 5 35·50 type 960 920 390 375 310
(5) Be sure to use adhesive when connecting the attached drain hose 2 and the field drain piping 60·71 type 1160 1120 490 475 410
in the ceiling. Figure 4 100 type 1400 1360 610 595 530
(6) Insulate the drain hose using the attached insulation pipe cover(large) 7 . Figure 6 125 type 1590 1550 800 785 720
Figure 3
Ceiling slab
1~1.5m Field refrigerant piping

Insulating material Support bracket Wrap with vinyl tape to prevent
(Field supplied)
air from entering through split.
Anti-condensation tubing 7 Insulation pipe cover
(Large)
Fasten with adhesive 5 Clamp material
VP20 Top side
Hose band instead of

Local pipes
clamp material (20)

Install the pipe
(70)
VP20 to the support

Top side bracket, then fix it. 6 Attached piping
(Select the liquid and gas pipes
which match the pipe diameters
2 Drain hose Figure 4 Figure 5 of the corresponding indoor unit.) Figure 6
(For use outside the unit)
2 Installation Outline
Remove the lid from the top of the indoor unit, and hang the indoor unit main unit before installing the drain up kit in the following manner. Figure 7
1. Complete the electrical wiring following the installation manual attached to the indoor unit.
(Use the wiring through-hole in the top side of the indoor unit to pull the wiring into the indoor unit main unit.)
2. Connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit.
(1) Connect the liquid and gas piping to the indoor unit main unit. Figure 8
(2) Wrap the piping connections with the attached insulation pipe cover (medium and small) 7 and fasten either end with the attached clamp material 5 .
Next, put the attached insulating material 8-1 . Wrap gas-side piping with the insulating material attached the indoor unit on top of the insulation pipe cover
wrapped on the piping connections. (For the KDU50M60VE, there are two types of Insulation pipe covers (medium) for the gas pipe connection. Select the one appropriate for the piping size.)
Also, pass the lead wires of swing moter and thermistor through the clamp section of the top lid and fix it so they are as they were before removing the topside through lid.
In order to prevent dust from entering the indoor unit, block any crevices between the lid and the pipes with putty.
Top
plate 5 Clamp material
6 Liquid-side attached piping Clamp part on the top lid
7 Insulation pipe cover
Liquid-side: small
Gas-side: medium
(1) (2) For φ 9.5 : ID φ32×L100 Cut to fit Thermistor lead wires
Top lid For φ 12.7 : ID φ35×L100 the piping
Swing motor lead wires
Insulating material attached 8-1 Insulating material

6 Gas-side attached piping with the indoor unit main unit
Only for gas-side ( Gas-side: one piece, 150×200, thickness 5mm
Liquid-side: one piece, 30×200, thickness 5mm )
(One piece, 100×230, thickness 5mm)
Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9
3. Mount the drain up kit to the indoor unit.

(1) Remove the screws from the top of the indoor unit, and insert the attached screws 4 temporarily. Next, temporarily put the screwed clamps on either end of the drain up kit,
and tighten the screws. Figure 10
Take out the lead wires of drain pump and the float switch from the back of the drain up kit.
Wire the local wiring as shown in Figure 11 .
Float switch lead wires (black)
Remote control cord

From the rear side of the
drain up kit to the control box { Drain pump lead wires (yellow)
Swing motor lead wires
Thermistor lead wires { Pass under the
installation stay and
to the control box
Replace with the
Top plate attached screw 4 Field wiring
Temporary Temporary
fixing fixing
Approx. 5mm
4 Screw
(M4 × 12) Drain up kit
4 Screw installation stay
Float switch lead wires (black)
Drain pump lead wires (yellow) A

View from direction of arrow A Pass over
the installation Local wiring
4 Screw stay and to the
control box
{
Remote control cord Wiring outline
Figure 10 Figure 11
C : 3K012642A
386 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
(2) Insert the hose band 3 into the external drain hose, firmly insert the drain hose all the way into the drain socket in the drain up kit, and wrap it firmly with the hose band 3
within the area designated by the black tape on the hose end. Figure 12
(3) Put the attached insulating material 8-3 to the external drain hose connector, as shown in Figure 13 .
(4) Connect the indoor unit drain socket and the drain up kit drain socket with the attached drain hose 2 inserting it all the way in, and wrap it firmly with the hose band 3 within
the area designated by the black tape on the hose end. Make sure the hose band connector comes to the top, as in Figure 15 . Figure 14
(5) Insulate the drain hose 2 fixed by the procedure (4) using the attached insulating material 8-2 . Wrap the entire surface over the hose band on the drain hose. Figure 16
8-3 Insulating material

Connector
Indoor unit main unit Drain up kit
3 Hose band drain socket drain socket
3 Hose band
Insert firmly Tape section (black) Tape section (black)
all the way in.
Tape section (black) 3 Hose band
Figure 12 8-2 Insulating

material Insert firmly Cross section 2 Drain hose
Fix making sure that there are no
split between the rising face of the
drain up kit and the insulation.
2 Drain hose
Figure 14
all the way in.
Figure 15 3
External drain hose
8-3 Insulating
material
3 Hose band 8-2 Wrap the insulating material
External drain hose 8-3 Insulating material 2 Drain hose

Attach facing the
external drain hose Top view Figure 16
from the drain up kit wall.
Figure 13
3 Electrical wiring
· Wire the float switch lead wires (black), coming out of the drain up kit, and the drain pump lead wires (yellow) in the manner described below.
(Removing the control box makes wiring work easier.) When doing wiring work, be sure to shut off the power. Figure 17
· Refer also to the “Electric Wiring Diagram Plate” when performing wiring work. (It can be found on the control box lid.)
(1) Remove the control box from the indoor unit.
(2) Connect the drain pump lead wires (yellow) to X25A (the white connector) on the indoor unit PC board assembly.
(3) The connector on the PC board assembly to which the float switch lead wires (black) must be connected differs depending on the indoor unit series (Sky Air or VRV Air Conditioner).
Sky Air : Remove the short circuit connector connected to X15A (a green connector), and connect the float switch lead wires.
VRV Air Conditioner : Remove the short circuit connector connected to X8A (a green connector), and connect the float switch lead wires.
(4) After all the wires are connected, arrange them, pass the float switch lead wire (black) through the clamping material, and secure it together with the drain
pump lead wire (yellow) from above the wiring inside the indoor unit using the included clamping material 5 .
(5) Store and secure any extra lead wire with the included clamping material 5 , so that the lid is not pushed up.
Attach the control box securely.
Pass through Drain pump lead Drain pump lead wires
Float switch lead wires (black) wires (yellow)
the clamp material 5 Clamp material Float switch lead wires
Remove the
short circuit
connector. Float switch
laed wires
Sky Air : X15A Internal wiring in the
X15A (green) or X25A
VRV Air Conditioner : X8A indoor unit
X8A (green) (white)
5 Clamp material
X25A
∗ Bind and fix the lead wires from the drain up kit over
Pass through the clamp material Field wiring
(wiring between units) the internal wiring in the indoor unit using the attached
Control box clamp material 5 .
Remote control cord
Fixing screws
for the control box lid (2) Electric wiring
diagram plate Figure 17
Control box lid
4 Installing the decorative panels and suction grill

· Refer to the installation manual for the indoor unit and mount the decorative panels and suction grill firmly following the procedure in the opposite way of removing.
3K012643
Options 387
FHQ EDAU28-856
5 Test Run Procedure
In order to determine the condition of the drainage, slowly pour approximately 1500 ml of water into the unit from the air outlet. Follow the procedure below to check the drainage. Figure 18
The test run procedure differs depending on the indoor unit series (Sky Air or VRV Air Conditioner), so follow the appropriate procedure below.
Sky Air VRV Air Conditioner
If the wiring work is complete If the wiring work is complete
¡ Check the drainage while operating in cooling mode. ¡ Check the drainage while operating in cooling mode.
If the wiring work is not complete If the wiring work is not complete
¡ Remove the control box lid, connect a single-phase power supply (50/60Hz 220-240V) ¡ Remove the control box lid and connect the remote control and the singie-phase
to No. 1 and No. 2 (in the power supply terminal block), and then for safety’s sake, close the lid power source (50/60Hz 220-240V/220V) to the remote control terminal block (P1, P2)
before turning the power on. Figure 19 and the power supply terminal block (L, N).
¡ Only the drain pump will run automatically for 10 minutes, so during this time make sure water is ¡ Next, switch the unit to test run mode from the remote control, press the mode
draining out. switch button to select “fan”, and then press the start/stop button to start the indoor
¡ Once the drain check is complete, remove the power wires and replace the control box lid as it was. fan and the drain pump. Check the drainage.
¡ Take precaution, because the fan will operate as well.
¡ Do not connect anything to No. 3 in the power supply terminal block (the drain pump will not operate.)
¡ Do not touch the electrical part, emergency switch. The drain check described above can be
performed without moving the emergency switch.
Plastic container Air outlet

for pouring
Figure 19
Make sure not to splash the water.
1 2 3
Figure 18
Power supply
terminal block
Single phase
power supply
3K012643
388 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
5.2 KAF501DA56·80·112·160 — Replacement long-life filter

KAF501DA56 Dimensions Unit:mm
A
Model A
KAF501DA56 430
KAF501DA80 530
KAF501DA112 430
254.5
260
KAF501DA160 493
· Can be water-washed. Can be reused.

3
20
11.5
D3K3074A
Model
KAF501DA56 KAF501DA80 KAF501DA112 KAF501DA160
Item
Initial pressure
Pa 10 or less
loss
Final pressure
Pa 59 or less
loss
Average
efficiency % 45 (gravity method)
3
m /min 13 17 24 32
Air flow rate
I/sec 217 283 400 533
Filter element Mildew-proof resin net
Number of sheets
2 2 3 3
included
Mass (weight) kg 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
5.3 KHFP5MA63·160 — L-type piping kit (for upward direction)

KHFP5MA35 Dimensions Unit:mm
KHFP5MA35
Piping for Liquid Side

R410A 6.4
Piping for Gas side

R410A 9.5
When you install the refrigerant piping in the

KHFP5MA63
ceiling, the piping is required to be bent L-type
in the unit as shown on the right. This L-type
piping kit is developed to facilitate such
Piping for Liquid Side
installation. R410A 6.4
Installation
Piping for Gas side
L-type piping kit R410A 12.7
KHFP5MA160
Piping for liquid side
Piping for gas side
J : D3K03612B
Options 389
FHQ EDAU28-856
5.4 KRP1CA93 — Installation box for adaptor PCB

Model
KRP1CA93
Item
Installation Interior of unit
Width mm 109
Dimensions Length mm 124
Depth mm 38
Installation box. Box cover. Clamp. Screws.
Component parts
Installation Manual.
Installation
3K09595B
390 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
3K09595B
Options 391
FHQ EDAU28-856

Model
KRCS01-1B KRCS01-4B
Item
Component parts
Caution
392 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
Installation
3K019189A
Options 393
FHQ EDAU28-856
3K019189A
394 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
3K019189A
Options 395
FHQ EDAU28-856

Installation
1P107904C
396 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
1P107904C
Options 397
FHQ EDAU28-856
5.7 KJB212AA / KJB311AA — Electrical box with earth terminal
3PA34878C
398 Options
EDAU28-856 FHQ
3PA34878C
Options 399
FAQ EDAU28-856
6. FAQ
Installation
1P107904C
400 Options
EDAU28-856 FAQ
1P107904C
Options 401
FAQ EDAU28-856
6.2 KJB212AA / KJB311AA — Electrical box with earth terminal
3PA34878C
402 Options
EDAU28-856 FAQ
3PA34878C
Options 403
FBQ EDAU28-856
7. FBQ
7.1 KTBJ25K56W / 80W — Service access panel
KTBJ25K80W Dimensions Unit:mm
Model A Ceiling opening

KTBJ25K36W(T)(F) 626 606 × 680
KTBJ25K56W(T)(F) 776 756 × 680
KTBJ25K80W(T)(F) 1,076 1,056 × 680
KTBJ25K160W(T)(F) 1,476 1,456 × 680
• The inspection hatch can be made to look nice with the service access panel.
• Thin 10 mm design for the exposed part.
Model KTBJ25K36W(T)(F) KTBJ25K56W(T)(F) KTBJ25K80W(T)(F) KTBJ25K160W(T)(F)
Item
Colour W : White, T : Brown, F : Fresh white
Accessories Installation manual
Mass (weight) kg 6.0 6.5 9.0 10.7
Caution
• Ceiling joist and ceiling joist support required. (locally procured.)
404 Options
EDAU28-856 FBQ
Installation
3P225173A
Options 405
FBQ EDAU28-856
3P225173A
406 Options
EDAU28-856 FBQ
7.2 KDAJ25K56A / 71A — Air discharge adaptor

KDAJ25K56A Model
KDAJ25K36A KDAJ25K56A KDAJ25K71A KDAJ25K140A
Item
Duct connection
φ200×1 port φ200×2 port φ200×4 port
diameter
Material Steel plate Hot-dip zinc-coated steel sheet+EPS+Insulation
Mass (weight) kg 1.1 1.5 2.5 3.5
Air discharge adaptor. Screws (except KDAJ25K36A).
Component parts
Installation manual.
· The “flexible duct” is required when the air

discharge adaptor will be installed.
· Pre-insulated. Will not take up time on location.
3
Installation Dimensions Unit:mm
Suction duct (Field supply) To air discharge unit KDAJ25K36A KDAJ25K56A

375 528
To air discharge
unit
φ20 φ200
Suction grille Flexible duct with insulation 0
(Field supply) φ200
(Field supply) Inlet air
485
Air discharge adaptor 332
(280)
300 260 (157)
150
245
150
245
283
A arrow view
KDAJ25K71A KDAJ25K140A
828 1228
φ200 φ200 φ200 φ200 φ200 φ200
785 1185
3×290=870 165
380
150
245
150
245
293
A arrow A arrow
view view
A arrow view
3P012475C
Options 407
FBQ EDAU28-856

Installation
1P107904C
408 Options
EDAU28-856 FBQ
1P107904C
Options 409
Outdoor unit EDAU28-856
8. Outdoor unit
8.1 KPW937A4 — Air direction adjustment grille
KPW937A4 Dimensions Unit:mm Item Model KPW937A4
Material Resin
Air direction Upper·Lower·Left·Right
80
Colour Ivory white
Screws.
Accessories
434 (Bolt Pitch)

490
434 (Bolt Pitch)
490
Installation
Louver Installation manual

Please be sure to read before installation and follow
KPW937A4 KPW937AA4 the instruction carefully when performing installation work.
Before Installation
Checking the parts Check the following parts
Name Louver Installation manual
Shape
With 4 screws
Quantity 1piece 1piece
Installation Procedure
Selection of Installation Location
Use when installing in a location that meets the following conditions.
When installing near the border to a neighbor's house
If exhaust blows directly on passers-by because outdoor unit is installed facing a road.
Changing the fan direction of the outdoor unit to prevent it blowing directly on shrubbery, etc.
Installation of Louver
Installation is possible in the four directions: Prepared hole
upward, downward, rightward, and leftward. pitch 435 mm
Fan partition
The installation screws are attached to the louver. Part A
First temporarily attach the louver with 4 screws, (see figure below)
then check that the angle is correct, and finally Prepared hole
tighten the screws fully. pitch 435 mm
Fan partition
CAUTION
1. Install so that a short circuit is prevented.

2. For the use in snowy regions, avoid installation
with the air outlet facing upward. Install so that
the air outlet faces leftward, rightward, or down-
ward. The prepared hole is in between the grating of the grill.
Snow accumulates in the air outlet of the outdoor Part A (prepared hole) cross section (the shape of
unit, causing malfunction of the main body of the either a or b)
outdoor unit. a) Grill grating b) Grill grating
3. Be advised that if the fan direction is up,
dead leaves and other foreign matter
easily accumulates in the exhaust vent. Prepared hole Prepared hole
4P104499-1A
410 Options
EDAU28-856 Outdoor unit
8.2 KPW945A4 — Air direction adjustment grille

KPW945A4 Dimensions Unit:mm Item Model KPW945A4
549
Material Resin
452 109 Air direction Upper·Lower
(Bolt Pitch)
Colour Ivory white
Screws.
Accessories
(Bolt Pitch)
484.5
552
3
Installation
Air direction louver Installation manual

Please be sure to read before installation and follow
KPW945A4 KPW945AA4 the instruction carefully when performing installation work.
■Before installation
Check the following parts Name Louver Truss tapping screw Installation manual
Shape
M4x4screws(max.7.5kW class)
Quantity 1piece M5x4screws(8.0/9.0kW class)
1piece
■Installation Procedure
Selection of Installation Location Space Needed for Installation
Use when installing in a location that meets the following conditions. ¡A minimum of 100㎜ is needed
¡When installing near the border to a neighbor's house between the back of the outdoor
¡If exhaust blows directly on passers-by because outdoor unit is instal- unit and any obstructions
led facing a road. (walls, etc.) 100
han
¡If exhaust blows directly on vegetation re t
mo
Installation of Louvers
Caution
Attach the louvers overlapping the standard grill.
Installing the louvers without the grill would allow hands to enter the fan area,
which is dangerous, so be sure to install the standard grill.
When pointing up When pointing down

（1）Remove the 4 attachment screws from （1）Remove the 4 attachment screws from
the standard grill. the standard grill.
（2）Install the louver pointed up. （2）Install the louver pointed down.
¡Overlap the standard grill and ¡Overlap the standard grill and
screw both in together. screw both in together.
¡The attachment screws ¡The attachment screws
are in the louvers. are in the louvers.
（3）Installation complete （3）Installation complete
3P089958-2C
Options 411
8.3 KKP937A4 — Drain plug

KKP937A4 Component parts
Dimensions Unit:mm
Drain Plug (5pcs.)
36 Connectable Drain Hose: φ16(I.D.)
φ16.5
412 Options
8.4 KKP945A4 — Drain plug

KKP945A4 Component parts
Dimensions Unit:mm
Socket (1pc.)
12 12 Cap (2pcs.)
Socket Cap Receiver Receiver (3pcs.)
14
14
Connectable Drain Hose: φ25(I.D.)
2 44 3
9.5
43
43
3.5
5
Installation 3
3P089958-1B
Options 413
8.5 KKPJ5F180 — Central drain plug

KKPJ5F180 Dimensions Unit:mm
Drain socket Drain cap Drain receiver
J : D3K1342A
Model
KKPJ5F180
Item
Connecting drain hose φ25 (inside diameter)
Installation
Use this plug to connect a drain hose to dispose the drain from the
outdoor unit.
(1) Check that this kit contains the following parts.
Drain socket (1 piece) Drain cap (2 pieces) Drain receiver (3 pieces) Seal (1 sheet)
(2) Installation Procedure

1. Insert drain receiver onto drain socket and drain cap 2. Insert drain socket and drain caps into their matching drain
beyond 4 projections around drain socket and drain cap. hole; Drain socket into drain hole B and drain caps into
drain hole C and D. After insertion, turn them about 40°
clockwise.
3. Connect vinyl hose on the market (internal diameter of 25mm)

to drain socket .
(If the hose is too long and hangs down, fix it carefully to
prevent the kinks.)
4. Affix seals to part A as shown on the above drawing.
Note:
If the drain holes of the outdoor unit are covered with the
mounting bracket or the floor, raise the unit to provide the
space of more than 100mm under the leg of the outdoor unit.
414 Options
8.6 K-KYZP15C — Wire fixture for preventing overturning

K-KYZP15C
3
Dimensions Unit:mm
Wire rope
(SUSφ2.0×20m)
Attachment Plate (1)
24
nd
Arou
φ170
15
30
7×18
32 Oblong hole 5 35
Attachment Plate (2)

24
Gripple
65
12 14 15
64 10
30
2-φ7 Hole
29
32 φ12 Hole 5
C : 3K07319A
Options 415
Installation
C : 3K07319A
416 Options
8.7 KPT-60B160 — Fixture for preventing overturning

KPT-60B160 Model
KPT-60B160
Item
Material Steel plate (t 3.2)
Colour Ivory white
Screw : 4
Accessories
Installation manual
· Allows the outdoor unit to be secured to the

foundation.
→Prevents tipping of the outdoor unit due to
strong gusts.
· Useful for locations where anti-tipping wires
(Locally procured) cannot be installed.
Dimensions Unit:mm
Oblong hole Oblong hole Oblong hole Oblong hole
J : D3K2759A
Options 417
Installation
(1) Check that this kit contains the following parts.
Metal fixture Metal fixture Metal fixture

Metal fixture Screws (4 pieces)
(2) Installation Procedure

1. Install the metal fixtures ~ to the base legs as shown 2. Remove the screw from the casing and fix the metal fixture to
below. the casing.
Note:
When you install the metal fixtures , and , fix the metal
fixture to the casing by the screws M5×13 attached.For other
model
When you install the metal fixture , fix the metal fixture to the
casing by the screw M5×13 attached. However, remove the
screw on the casing, if the screw of the casing will contact with
metal fixture.
3. Fix the metal fixtures firmly by the anchor bolts. (The anchor
bolts, nuts and washers should be M12 type sold on the
market.)
418 Options
8.8 KRP58M51 — Demand adaptor

KRP58M51
Installation
3
C : 3P134153B
Options 419
3P134153B
420 Options
〈〈RZQ100KV4A / RZQ125KV4A / RZQ160KV4A〉〉
3P201377A
Options 421
422 Options
Specifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of September 2008 but subject to change without notice.
EDAU28-856
Printed in Japan 09/2008 K FS

Split System Air Conditioners: Inverter Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Split System Air Conditioners: Inverter Series

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Split System Air Conditioners: Inverter Series

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EDAU 28 - 856

Split System Air Conditioners

SkyAir Inverter Series ................................................................... 1

Installation of Indoor / Outdoor Unit .......................................... 111

2.3 FHQ50BV / 60BV / 71BV / 100BV / 125BVV1B

Detail Information of Options..................................................... 297

5.2 KAF501DA56·80·112·160 — Replacement long-life filter ....................389

Table of Contents iii

SkyAir Inverter Series

FCQ 71K 100K 125K 140K

FFQ 25B8 35B8 50B8 60B8

FBQ 50B 60B 71B

RXS 25EB 35EB 50FB 60FB 71FB

Outdoor RKS 25EB 35EB 50FB 60FB

FCQ FFQ FHQ

RKS25EB / 35EBVMA RKS50FB / 60FBVMA

RZQ71F / 100FV4A RZQ100K~160KV4A RZQ100H~160HY4A

2. Model name, power supply and nomenclature

Indoor unit Outdoor unit Power supply

Note: 1.  : New model or changed model

FCQ FFQ FHQ50·60 FHQ71~125 FAQ FBQ

Note: { : Functions exist.

3.2 Outdoor unit

Note: { : Functions exist.

Operation Cooling 10~46°CDB 10~46°CDB –5~46°CDB

Note: { : Functions exist.

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FCQ (Ceiling mounted cassette type –round flow–)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FFQ (600×600 Multi flow ceiling mounted cassette type)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FHQ (Ceiling suspended type) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FHQ (Ceiling suspended type)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FHQ (Ceiling suspended type) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FHQ (Ceiling suspended type)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FAQ (Wall mounted type) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type)

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

FBQ (Ceiling mounted built-in type) 1

*2. Wire for remote controller : field supplied.

780 (SUSPENTION POSITION)

860~910 (CELING OPENING SPACE) (NOTE 4)

20 C/L 256 35 OR LESS

SUSPENTION BOLT 157 (NOTE 4)

Note: 1. : New model or changed model